ABCC P2 Specifications - Volume 1_1ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUBSPECIFICATIONS -VOLUME 1DIVISIONS 0-10 & 12-14PHASE 2SEPTEMBER 7, 2023
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 00 0101-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Project Title Page
DOCUMENT 00 0101
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2
for
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB
1600 SELVA MARINA DRIVE
ATLANTIC BEACH, FL 32233
MAY 23, 2023
100 PERCENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
OWNER
Atlantic Beach Country Club
1600 Selva Marina Drive
Atlantic Beach, FL 32233
904-372-2222
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Shear Structural 931 Monroe Drive, Suite A102-491
Atlanta, Georgia 30308 678-664-8051
CONTRACTOR To Be Determined MECHANICAL ENGINEER GTP Consulting Engineers 4197 Pleasant Hill Road, Suite 200 Duluth, Georgia 30096
770-622-2270
ARCHITECT
Shepphird Associates Architects + Engineers
26560 Agcura Road, Suite 106
Calabasas, CA 91302
310-670-9144
PLUMBING ENGINEER GTP Consulting Engineers 4197 Pleasant Hill Road, Suite 200
Duluth, Georgia 30096 770-622-2270
CIVIL ENGINEER
(By Owner) BGE 10151 Deerwood Park Boulevard,
Building 200, Suite 200 Jacksonville, Florida 32256 904-323-0727
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
GTP Consulting Engineers 4197 Pleasant Hill Road, Suite 200 Duluth, Georgia 30096
770-622-2270
LANDSCAPE DESIGN
(By Owner)
INTERIOR DESIGNER
(By Owner)
HINT ½ Harris Interiors
7 Lenox Pointe
Atlanta, Georgia 30324 404-492-5997
FOOD SERVICE DESIGNER (By Owner)
END OF DOCUMENT
AUGUST 11, 2023
PHASE 1 UPDATES
SEPTEMBER 7, 2023PHASE 2
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 00 0107-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Seals Page
DOCUMENT 00 0107
SEALS PAGE
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2
for
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB
1600 SELVA MARINA DRIVE
ATLANTIC BEACH, FL 32233
MAY 23, 2023
100 PERCENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
ARCHITECT
Shepphird Associates
Architects + Engineers
26560 Agcura Road, Suite 106
Calabasas, CA 91302
310-670-9144
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Shear Structural 931 Monroe Drive, Suite A102-491 Atlanta, Georgia 30308
678-664-8051
MECHANICAL ENGINEER GTP Consulting Engineers 4197 Pleasant Hill Road, Suite 200 Duluth, Georgia 30096
770-622-2270
PLUMBING ENGINEER
GTP Consulting Engineers 4197 Pleasant Hill Road, Suite 200 Duluth, Georgia 30096
770-622-2270
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
GTP Consulting Engineers 4197 Pleasant Hill Road, Suite 200 Duluth, Georgia 30096
770-622-2270
END OF DOCUMENT
AUGUST 11, 2023
PHASE 1 UPDATES
SEPTEMBER 7, 2023PHASE 2
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 00 0110-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Table of Contents
DOCUMENT 00 0110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Document 00 0101 Project Title Page
Document 00 0107 Seals Page
Document 00 0110 Table of Contents
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
Document 00 4325 Substitution Request Form
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
Document 00 6536 Contractor Warranty Form
Document 00 6537 Installer Warranty Form
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 1000 Summary
Section 01 2100 Allowances
Section 01 2300 Alternates
Section 01 2513 Product Substitution Procedures
Section 01 3233 Photographic Documentation
Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 7123 Field Engineering
Section 01 7329 Cutting and Patching
Section 01 7423 Final Cleaning
Section 01 7700 Closeout Procedures
DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section 02 4100 Demolition
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
Cast-In-Place Concrete (Specified on Structural Drawings)
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
Section 04 2113 Brick Veneer Masonry
Section 04 2114 Surface Bonded Brick Veneer Masonry
DIVISION 5 METALS
Structural Steel (Specified on Structural Drawings)
Section 05 5000 Metal Fabrications
Section 05 5133 Metal Ladders
Section 05 5216 Aluminum Railings
DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
Rough Carpentry (Specified on Structural Drawings)
Section 06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 00 0110-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Table of Contents
Section 06 1300 Heavy Timber
Wood Decking (Specified on Structural Drawings)
Section 06 1639 Composite Wood Sheathing (Also Noted on Structural Drawings)
Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses (Specified on Structural Drawings)
Section 06 2000 Finish Carpentry
Section 06 2200 Millwork
Section 06 6500 Plastic Simulated Wood Trim
Section 06 6516 Plastic Simulated Wood Column Covers
Section 06 8316 Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 2100 Thermal Insulation
Section 07 2119 Foamed-In-Place Insulation
Section 07 2519 Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers – Alternate
Section 07 2616 Below-Grade Vapor Retarders
Section 07 4116 Aluminum Roof Panels
Section 07 4649 Fiber-Cement Siding
Section 07 5423 Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing
Section 07 7124 Manufactured Aluminum Gutters and Downspouts
Section 07 7233 Roof Hatches
Section 07 8100 Applied Fireproofing
Section 07 8400 Firestopping
Section 07 9200 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 OPENINGS
Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Section 08 1433 Stile and Rail Wood Doors
Section 08 1443 Aluminum-Clad Stile and Rail Wood Doors
Section 08 3100 Access Doors and Panels
Section 08 3313 Coiling Counter Doors
Section 08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors
Section 08 3819 Rigid Traffic Doors
Section 08 4113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
Section 08 5213 Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows
Section 08 9123 Aluminum Fixed Louvers
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
Section 09 2219 Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing
Section 09 2900 Gypsum Board
Section 09 2913 Acoustical Gypsum Board
Section 09 3000 Tiling
Section 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Section 09 6413 Engineered Wood Flooring
Section 09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories
Section 09 6516 Resilient Sheet Flooring
Section 09 6523 Luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring
Section 09 6566 Resilient Athletic Flooring
Section 09 6723 Resinous Flooring
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 00 0110-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Table of Contents
Section 09 6800 Carpeting
Section 09 7716 Stretched-Fabric Wall and Ceiling Systems
Section 09 8436 Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Panels
Section 09 9100 Painting
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
Section 10 2613 Corner Guards
Section 10 2815 Toilet and Bath Accessories
Section 10 3100 Manufactured Fireplaces
Section 10 4419 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
Section 10 5113 Metal Lockers
Section 10 7113 Exterior Weather Screen Devices
Section 10 7119 Bahama Hurricane Shutters
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
Section 11 4000 Food Service Equipment (Food Service)
Section 11 4100 Food Storage Equipment (Food Service)
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
Section 12 3649 Quartzite Countertops
Section 12 3669 Simulated Quartz Countertops
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Section 14 1200 Electric Dumbwaiters
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section 21 0500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
Section 21 1313 Fire Suppression Piping
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
Section 22 0500 General Plumbing Requirements
Section 22 0519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing and Piping
Section 22 0523 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
Section 22 0525 Plumbing Hangers and Supports
Section 22 0700 Plumbing Insulation
Section 22 1116 Domestic Water Piping
Section 22 1119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties
Section 22 1316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Section 22 1319 Drainage Piping Specialties
Section 22 4000 Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
Section 23 0130.52 Existing HVAC Air Distribution System Cleaning
Section 23 0529 FL Hangers and Supports for HVAC Equipment
Section 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Equipment
Section 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
Section 23 0713 SF Duct Insulation
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 00 0110-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Table of Contents
Section 23 0900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
Section 23 1123 SF Facility Natural-Gas Piping
Section 23 2300 Refrigerant Piping
Section 23 3113 Metal Ducts
Section 23 3300 Air Duct Accessories
Section 23 3346 Flexible Ducts
Section 23 3423 HVAC Power Ventilators
Section 23 3533 Listed Kitchen Ventilation System Exhaust Ducts
Section 23 3713.13 Air Diffusers And Grilles
Section 23 3813 Commercial-Kitchen Hoods
Section 23 5523.13 Low-Intensity, Gas-Fired, Radiant Heaters
Section 23 8126 Split-System Air-Conditioners
Section 23 8239.19 Wall and Ceiling Unit Heaters
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
Section 26 0010 Supplemental Requirements for Electrical
Section 26 0519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
Section 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
Section 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
Section 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems
Section 26 0533.13 Conduits for Electrical Systems
Section 26 0533.16 Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems
Section 26 0923 Lighting Control Devices
Section 26 2416 Panelboards
Section 26 2713 Electricity Metering
Section 26 2726 Wiring Devices
Section 26 2813 Fuses
Section 26 2816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Section 26 4313 Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits
Section 26 5000 Lighting
Section 26 5213 Emergency and Exit Lighting
Section 26 5568 Athletic Field Lighting
Section 26 5613 Lighting Poles and Standards
DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS
Section 27 0528 Pathways for Communications Systems
DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
Section 28 4621.11 Addressable Fire-Alarm Systems
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting for Structures (Specified on
Structural Drawings)
Section 31 3116 Termite Control
END OF DOCUMENT
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 00 4325-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Substitution Request Form
DOCUMENT 00 4325
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
NOTE: This form is for use by General Contractor only.
PROJECT: Atlantic Beach Country Club – Phase 1 & 2
LOCATION: 1600 Selva Marina Dr.
Atlantic Beach, FL 32233
OWNER: Atlantic Beach Country Club
DATE:
We hereby submit for your consideration the following substitution instead of the item
specified or shown on the drawings:
Section: Paragraph: Specified Item:
Proposed Substitution:
Attach complete product data, drawings and descriptions of product, with fabrication and installation details. Provide laboratory tests if applicable. Provide sample, if applicable. Indicate if sample will be provided under separate cover.
Include complete information on changes to drawings and/or specifications that proposed
substitution will require for its proper installation.
Fill in blanks below: (Include attachments if space is insufficient. Failure to provide information will void submittal.) A. Reason(s) for proposed substitution: (check all that apply):
1. Request is equivalent to product/material/ assembly specified. (Note: Attach technical
documentation.)
2. Specified product or method cannot be provided within the Contract Time. (Note: This
request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of
the Contractor's failure to pursue the work promptly, or to coordinate the various activities properly, or if the Contractor fails to place timely orders.) 3. Specified product or method cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the Contractor certifies that the requested substitution can be approved.
4. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy
conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting redesign and evaluation
costs and the increased cost of other work by the Owner or separate contractors, and
similar considerations.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 00 4325-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Substitution Request Form
5. Specified product or method cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible with other materials of the work, and the Contractor certifies that the substitution will
overcome the incompatibility.
6. Specified product or method cannot be properly coordinated with other materials in the
work, and the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be properly
coordinated.
7. Specified product or method cannot receive a warranty as required by the Contract
Documents, and the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can receive the
required warranty. B. Does the substitution affect dimensions or details shown on drawings:
No Yes.
(Attach marked up prints of drawings showing changes required.)
C. What effect does the substitution have on other trades? D. Compare significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of work or product originally specified or shown on drawings. Include elements such as size, weight,
durability, performance, visual effect, etc.
E. Coordination information. Include all changes required in other elements of the work in
order to accommodate the substitution, including work performed by the Owner or
separate contractors. F. State effect the substitution will have on the work schedule in comparison to the schedule which would prevail without the proposed substitution. State the effect of the
proposed substitution on the Contract Time.
G. Provide complete cost information, including a proposal of any net change in the
Contract Amount.
H. Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different (explain on attachment)
The Undersigned Contractor certifies its opinion that, after thorough evaluation, the proposed
substitution will result in work that in every significant respect will be equivalent to or superior
to the work required by the original Contract Documents and that it will perform adequately in
the application indicated. Rights to additional payment or time because of failure of the substitution to perform adequately are hereby waived. The Undersigned hereby agrees to pay in full for any changes to design, including detailing and
engineering costs caused by the requested substitution.
Submitted by: NOTE: Submittal void and will be discarded if unsigned or if signed by entity
other than General Contractor.
Signature: (Contractor's Authorized Representative)
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 00 4325-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Substitution Request Form
(Title)
Contractor's Firm Name:
Date:
For use by Architect: Accepted Accepted as Noted
Not Accepted Received Too Late
By: Date:
Remarks:
END OF DOCUMENT
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 00 6536-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Contractor Warranty Form
DOCUMENT 00 6536
CONTRACTOR WARRANTY FORM
PROJECT: Atlantic Beach Country Club – Phase 1 & 2
LOCATION: 1600 Selva Marina Dr.
Atlantic Beach, FL 32233
OWNER: Atlantic Beach Country Club
We, ____________________________________________________________, Contractor for
(Company Name) the above-referenced project, do hereby warrant that all labor and materials furnished and work
performed are in accord with the Contract Documents and authorized modifications thereto,
and will be free from defects due to defective materials or workmanship for a period of one year
from Date of Substantial Completion. This warranty commences on
___________________________________________________________________________ (Date of Substantial Completion affixed by Architect)
and expires on _______________________________________________________________
(Expiration Date)
Should defects develop during the warranty period due to improper materials, workmanship or
arrangement, the same, including adjacent work displaced, shall be made good by the
undersigned at no expense to the Owner.
The Owner will give Contractor written notice of defective work. Should Contractor fail to
correct defective work within 60 days after receiving written notice, the Owner may, at his option, correct defects and charge Contractor costs for such correction. Contractor agrees to pay such charges upon demand.
Nothing in the above shall be deemed to apply to work which has been abused or neglected by
the Owner. FOR ___________________________________________
(Company Name)
BY ___________________________________________ TITLE ___________________________________________
DATE ___________________________________________
END OF DOCUMENT
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 00 6537-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Installer Warranty Form
DOCUMENT 00 6537
INSTALLER WARRANTY FORM
PROJECT: Atlantic Beach Country Club – Phase 1 & 2
LOCATION: 1600 Selva Marina Dr.
Atlantic Beach, FL 32233
OWNER: Atlantic Beach Country Club
GENERAL CONTRACTOR: We, _________________________________________________________________, Installer
(Company Name)
for _________________________________________________________________________,
(List Trade)
as described in Specification Section(s) ____________________________________________
(List appropriate sections of Specifications)
do hereby warrant that all labor and materials furnished and work performed in conjunction with
the above-referenced project are in accord with the Contract Documents and authorized modifications thereto, and will be free from defects due to defective materials or workmanship for a
period of _____ year(s) from Date of Substantial Completion. This warranty commences
on _________________________________________________________________________
(Date of Substantial Completion affixed by Architect)
and expires on _______________________________________________________________.
(Expiration Date)
Should defects develop during the warranty period due to improper materials, workmanship or
arrangement, the same, including adjacent work displaced, shall be made good by the undersigned at no expense to the Owner.
The Owner will give Installer written notice of defective work. Should Installer fail to correct
defective work within 60 days after receiving written notice, the Owner may, at his option, correct defects and charge Installer costs for such correction. Installer agrees to pay such charges upon
demand.
Nothing in the above shall be deemed to apply to work which has been abused or neglected by the
Owner. FOR ____________________________ FOR ____________________________
(General Contractor) (Installer's Company Name) BY ____________________________ BY ____________________________
TITLE ____________________________ TITLE ____________________________
DATE ____________________________ DATE ____________________________
END OF DOCUMENT
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 1000-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Summary
SECTION 01 1000
SUMMARY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 PROJECT
A. Project Name: Atlantic Beach Country Club – Phase 1 & 2
B. Owner’s Name: Atlantic Beach Country Club
C. Architect’s Name: Shepphird Associates Architects + Engineers
D. Project consists of selective site and building demolition for new buildings,
additions, modifications, renovation work, and site improvements to existing
club facilities; divided into Phase 1 and Phase 2 construction, as follows:
1. Phase 1.
a. Remodel Fitness Center and Minor Expansion.
b. Remodel and Expand Pete’s Turn.
c. New Tennis Pavilion.
d. New Youth Pavilion.
e. New Shed.
f. New Golf Bag Drop.
g. New Pool Cabanas.
h. Pickleball Courts.
i. New Tennis Courts.
j. Outdoor Event Space.
k. Paver Patio.
l. Cart Parking and Landscape.
2. Phase 2.
a. Main Clubhouse Expansion.
b. Extend Hardscape between Clubhouse and Sherman’s Creek.
c. Replace Turf between Clubhouse and Sherman’s Creek with
Synthetic Turf.
E. Work by Owner:
1. Civil engineering.
2. Landscape design.
3. Food service design.
4. Interior design.
5. Fixtures, furniture, and equipment (FF&E), including:
a. Bathroom mirrors.
b. Decorative light fixtures.
c. Signs.
6. Locker numbering.
7. Manufactured fire pits.
8. Voice/data cabling and equipment.
1.2 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. The GC will cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate
continuous use of club facilities and golf course.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 1000-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Summary
1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Arrange use of site and premises to allow:
1. Construction office, storage, staging, and parking areas.
2. Work by Owner’s Subcontractors.
B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required
by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if
exit routes are temporarily altered.
2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.
C. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities.
1.4 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner.
1.5 CONTRACTOR PRICING
A. Include the following pricing clarifications in Guaranteed Maximum Pricing
(GMP), and subsequent pricing:
1. State and local sales tax is included.
2. Wage scale is excluded.
3. Building Permit is to be included. 4. Water Department fees are to be included. 5. Gas Utility Department fees are to be included. 6. Electrical Utility fees are to be included.
7. Include Liability Insurance.
8. Include Builder’s Risk Insurance.
9. Materials Testing and Special Inspections are by Owner.
10. Commissioning Authority to be engaged and paid by Owner.
11. Water Consumption charges are to be paid by Owner. 12. Power consumption charges are to be paid by Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 2100-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Allowances
SECTION 01 2100
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Lump-sum allowances.
1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the
date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by
an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B. At Architect’s request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making
final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the
Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect form the designated
supplier.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in
the form specified for Change Orders.
B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered
to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.
C. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for
installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.
D. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for
other portions of the Work.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates
as required to coordinate installation.
1.5 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials
ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include
taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor’s costs for receiving and handling at
Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to
products and materials ordered by owner or selected by Architect under
allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the
allowance.
C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to
manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been
completed and accepted.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 2100-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Allowances
1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage
by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner’s storage space as directed.
1.6 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES
A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner’s
purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the
allowance.
B. Contractor’s overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment
ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the
allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery,
installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.
C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will
include Contractor’s related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.
D. At project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency
allowance to Owner by Change Order.
1.7 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order
proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance,
multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If
applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing
wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as
part of the allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate
distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed.
3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in
Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances.
4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by
independent quantity survey, measure, or count.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the
allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order
amount or Contractor’s handling, labor, installation, overhead and profit.
1. Do not include Contractor’s or subcontractor’s indirect expense in the
Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or
extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from
information in the Contract Documents.
2. No change to Contractor’s indirect expense is permitted for selection of
higher or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature
as originally indicated.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 2100-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Allowances
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by allowances promptly upon delivery for damage or
defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related
materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely
integrated and interfaced with related work.
3.3 ALLOWANCE SCHEDULE
Allowance No. 1 – DOOR HARDWARE: Include in Base Bid the total line item amounts
for purchase only of hardware and interior doors. Include hardware and door
installation in Base Bid.
1. New Andersen and Other Exterior Doors: $750 each door leaf for
hardware.
2. New Interior Doors: $85,000 total for doors and hardware.
NOTE: Include selected existing interior doors only if required by Owner
and design professional to match design and finish of new interior or
exterior doors.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 2300-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Alternates
SECTION 01 2300
ALTERNATES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
2. Alternate schedule.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for
certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or
subtracted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding
change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products,
materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract
Documents.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to
completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects,
and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation
whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
B. Execute acceptable alternates under the same conditions as other work of the
Contract.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 ALTERNATE SCHEDULE
Alternate No. 1: Delete Section 06 1639 – Composite Wood Sheathing with integral WRB
included in Base Bid; and substitute Section 07 2519 – Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant
Barriers – Alternate, installed over plywood sheathing specified on Structural Drawings.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 2513-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Product Substitution Procedures
SECTION 01 2513
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Products are specified by reference standards, performance and manufacturer's
name and model number or trade name.
1. When specified only by reference standard or performance, Contractor
may select any product meeting specified standards or performance
requirements, by any manufacturer. 2. When several products or manufacturers are specified as being acceptable, Contractor has the option of choosing among those named. 3. When one product or manufacturer is specified or indicated as the "basis
of design", "basis of selection" or "scheduled", Contractor shall bear costs
associated with changes required for application or installation of other
products or assemblies.
4. When proprietary products are specified, substitutions will be allowed
only by substitution provisions specified herein, unless it is specifically stated that no substitutions are allowed.
B. If it is desired to use products different from those indicated in the Contract
Documents, the party requesting the substitution shall make written application
on Document 00 4325 – Substitution Request Form included in this Project
Manual. The burden of proving equality of proposed substitutions rests with the
party making the request for substitution.
1. Requests for substitution will be considered by Architect in accord with
the following: a. Requests will be considered from Contractor only, following contract award. b. Contract sum shall be based only on products and systems
specified in the Contract Documents.
c. Requests for substitution shall be made in a timely manner such
that progress of the Work will not be adversely affected if
substitution is unacceptable.
d. Substitution requests shall precede and shall not be made as a part of shop drawings or product data submittals. 2. Requests for substitution shall be accompanied by such technical data and samples as the party making the request desires to submit. Architect
will consider reports from independent testing laboratories, verified
experience records from previous users, and other printed or written
information valid in the circumstances.
3. Requests for substitution shall indicate in what respects proposed
materials or products differ from those specified and the effect on interfacing or related work. 4. Requests for substitution shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's dated product data describing the installation, use and care, as applicable,
of proposed substitution. Include reference standards, test data and
clarification drawings.
5. Requests for substitution shall be accompanied by complete cost data
indicating material cost, installed cost and savings, if any, resulting from
proposed substitution.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 2513-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Product Substitution Procedures
6. Determination as to acceptability of proposed substitutions will be made based only on data submitted.
7. Contractor shall coordinate installation of accepted substitutions with
interfacing work, bearing re-design costs and making approved changes
in the Work to properly incorporate the substitutions, and shall waive all
claims for additional costs related to use of acceptable substitutions which
become apparent following acceptance.
8. Contractor shall be responsible for payment of time for research,
evaluation, selection and re-design costs incurred by Architect and his consultants for substitutions. 9. Requested substitution shall provide same sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided.
C. The appropriate contract modification will be issued to Contractor if a proposed
substitution is accepted by Architect. Response regarding non-acceptance will
also be given Contractor. Contractor shall furnish materials and products in
accord with the Contract Documents unless requests for substitutions are
received and accepted as described above.
D. In the event that specified items cannot be delivered to the job site and
incorporated into the Work at such times and in such quantities as to cause no delay, then Contractor may request a substitution in the manner described
above. Should the accepted substitution provide a cost savings, the Contract
price will be adjusted by Change Order, with Owner receiving the benefit of the
net savings. No increase in the Contract price will be allowed on substitutions
made after the award of Contract, except where the Contractor can verify a
timely placement of orders appropriate to the materials and conditions involved.
E. Inability to obtain specified items due to Contractor's failure to place timely
orders will not be considered reason for authorizing substitutions.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 3233-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Photographic Documentation
SECTION 01 3233
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Provisions of this section are mandatory procedures for preparing and
submitting construction photographs.
1.2 PHOTOGRAPH REQUIREMENTS:
A. Contractor shall take photographs of type specified herein, to show progress of
the Work.
B. Take photographs on a monthly basis. Schedule photography to allow submittal of photographs with each Application for Payment.
C. Take photographs beginning at first month of construction activity and
terminating at Date of Final Completion.
D. Take photographs on same day each month, weather permitting, and at same
time of day.
E. Take photographs of 4-standard photograph locations, as selected by Architect.
Take photographs of same standard locations each month, unless otherwise
directed by Architect. Assign a number to each standard photograph location, for comparison with previous and future submittals.
F. In addition to photographs of standard locations, take 8-photographs which best
show significant elements of the Work. Locations for these photographs shall be
selected by Contractor. Assign a number to each non-standard photograph
location, for comparison with previous and future submittals.
G. In addition to photographs specified above, take 4-aerial photographs to show
overall progress of the Work and significant changes from previous photographs.
Assign a number to each aerial photograph location, for comparison with
previous and future submittals.
1.3 PHOTOGRAPH SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit photographs with each Application for Payment.
B. Submit photographs in digital, color, high resolution, jpg, or pdf format.
C. Label each photograph with project name, date, description and photograph
number of location or element of the Work and Contractor's name.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 3300-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Submittal Procedures
SECTION 01 3300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes procedures for preparing and transmitting submittals required
by specification sections for a product, material, or construction method:
1. Shop drawings.
2. Product data.
3. Manufacturer’s certificates. 4. Design data and calculations. 5. Manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Manufacturer’s field service reports.
7. Samples.
8. Operation and maintenance manuals (timing, quantity, content and
form).
B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to convey the requirements of
this Section to their sub-contractors and their suppliers and vendors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule submittals to expedite Work. Unless otherwise indicated in this Section, submittals shall be submitted within 30 days of date of Notice to
Proceed.
B. Preparation:
1. Provide separate submittal for each specification section requiring
submittals. Where multiple sections relate to the same system or element
and are being provided from the same source, a single combined submittal is acceptable. 2. Coordinate submission of related items. Group submittals of related products in a single transmission.
3. Include all submittal material requested for that Section.
4. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents. State
product and system limitations which may adversely affect Work.
5. Mark or show dimensions and values in same units as specified.
C. Contractor responsibilities: 1. Review submittals prior to transmittal. Verify compatibility with field conditions and dimensions, product selections and designations, quantities and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract
Documents. Return non-conforming submittals to preparer for revision
rather than submitting for review.
2. Coordinate submittals to avoid conflicts between various items of work.
3. Submittal transmittal form:
a. Include with each submittal a transmittal form. Sample copy of an acceptable form is at Attachment A. Contractor’s standard submittal form may be used provided it contains essentially the same information as sample.
b. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier,
manufacturer, pertinent drawing sheet and detail numbers, and
associated Specification Section numbers.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 3300-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Submittal Procedures
c. Sequentially number transmittal forms. Re-submittals shall have original number with a suffix. Acceptable form of number is
SSSSS-NN-T where:
1) SSSSS indicates 5 digit specification section number.
2) NN indicates different submittals for that
specification section.
3) T indicates the number of times that submittal has
been made.
4. Failure of Contractor to review submittals prior to transmittal for review shall be cause of rejection. 5. Incomplete, improperly packaged, and submittals from sources other than Contractor will not be accepted.
D. Transmittal: Where possible, transmit all submittals electronically. Where
electronic submittal is not possible, submit five (5) paper copies or as many
copies as Contractor desires returned after review. Exception: Retained
quantities for samples, color charts, and manufacturer’s equipment manuals
shall be as specified elsewhere herein.
E. Deliver all submittals to Architect at business address.
F. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittals until return
of reviewed submittal with Architect’s acceptance.
G. On return, promptly distribute reviewed submittals to concerned parties.
Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.
H. Resubmission:
1. Revise and resubmit submittals as required within 15 days of return form
initial review. 2. Make re-submittals under procedures specified for initial submittals. 3. Identify all changes made since previous submittal.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Where required by Specification Sections, provide quality assurance submittals:
1. Qualification data: Written information demonstrating capabilities and
experience of firm or person. Include lists of complete projects with
names contact information for references.
2. Manufacturer’s certificates: Submit reference data, affidavits, and certifications on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that products conform to or exceed specified requirements. Certificates may be based on recent or previous test results supplied by manufacturer and accepted
by A/E or SNL SE.
3. Installer approval: Certification on manufacturer’s letterhead that
installer compiles with requirements and is approved for installing
manufacturer’s products.
4. Welding certificates: Written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements, submit record of Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of
firms and personnel certified.
5. Field test reports: Written reports from qualified testing agency
indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
or after installation for compliance with specified requirements.
1.4 DRAWINGS
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 3300-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Submittal Procedures
A. Where required by specifications or otherwise needed, prepare drawings illustrating portion of Work for use in fabricating, interfacing with other work,
and installing products. Contract Drawings shall not be reproduced and
submitted as show drawings.
B. When construction is complete, prepare and submit red-lined copies of the
Contract Drawings showing clearly how construction deviated from the design,
along with the authority for the deviation or change.
C. Electronic Format:
1. Size printable to: 8-1/2 by 11 inches minimum and 30 x 42 inches maximum. 2. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with Project name. Identify each element of drawing with reference number.
3. Plans, elevations, sections, and detail shop drawings shall be to scale with
scale indicated.
4. Indicate field verified dimensions. Show relationship of products to
adjacent work. Note coordination requirements.
5. Schematics and diagrams shall be logically arranged and presented in a clear understandable manner with all items labeled.
1.5 PRODUCT DATA
A. Provide product data such as manufacturer’s brochures, catalog pages,
illustrations, diagrams, tables, performance charts, and other material which
describe appearance, size, attributes, code and standard compliance, ratings, and
other product characteristics.
B. Form:
1. Provide all critical information such as reference standards, performance characteristics, capacities, power requirements, wiring and piping diagrams, controls, component parts, finishes, dimensions, and required clearances.
2. Submit only data which are pertinent. Mark each copy of manufacturer’s
standard printed data to identify products, models, options and other
data pertinent to project.
3. Modify manufacturer’s standard schematic drawings and diagrams and
supplement standard data to provide specific information applicable to project. Delete information not applicable. 4. Colors and patterns: Unless color and pattern is specified for product, submit accurate color and pattern charts or samples illustrating
manufacturer’s full range for selection by Architect. Submit two (2) hard
copies only.
1.6 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of products
with all integral parts and attachment devices. Include full range of manufacturer’s standard finishes, indicating colors, textures and patterns for A/E selection.
B. Submission: Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification
sections (minimum of two). One sample will be retained by Architect.
C. Label with identification related to submittal transmittal form.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 3300-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Submittal Procedures
2.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Upon signed release from the Contractor, Architect will make electronic copies of
construction floor plans and reflected ceiling plans available for use as base sheet
for providing coordinated Shop Drawings.
B. Types of media required:
1. If hard copy, submit Shop Drawings in the form of one original
reproducible copy of each drawing plus six bond prints of each.
2. Unless absolutely necessary, the size of Shop Drawings shall not exceed
30” x 42”. Provide space on Drawings for approval stamps and brief review comments. 3. Copies of architectural/engineering blueprints will not be accepted.
C. Review comments of the Architect will be shown on the reproducible drawings
when it is returned to the Contractor. The Contractor may make and distribute
such copies as are required for his purpose.
2.2 EQUIPMENT OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Provide operating, Maintenance and Product data manuals as described in
Section 01 7700 of these specifications.
2.3 UTILITY APPROVALS
A. Approval of utilities or other public authorities having jurisdiction shall be obtained and reflected on affected submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEVIATIONS FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Clearly mark deviations in a conspicuous manner indicating component and
system variations, additions and deletions, revised equipment locations,
construction detail variations, substitutions, and similar changes or deviations. Indicate headroom heights, ceiling heights, clearances, and other dimensions affected by proposed deviations. Variations from Contract Documents not brought to the attention of Construction Manager and Architect shall be the sole
responsibility of Contractor even though such submittal has been accepted.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. Consecutively number submittals.
1. When material is resubmitted for any reason, transmit under a new letter
of transmittal and with original transmittal number and letter designation beginning with “A”. 2. Changes should be clearly designated as to revisions made. No consideration will be allowed for submittal revision labor made to
coordinate revised, changed, adjusted details or extent.
B. Accompany each submittal and resubmittal with a letter of transmittal showing
information required for identification and checking. Letter of transmittal
should make reference to applicable drawing numbers, specification sections and
submittal schedule item number to which each submittal applies.
C. On at least the first page of each submittal, and elsewhere as required for
positive identification, show submittal number in which items was included. Include space for Architect’s review stamp.
D. Each submittal should indicate supplier/installer’s name, phone number and
specific location(s) of submitted product in project.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 3300-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Submittal Procedures
E. Maintain an accurate submittal log for duration of Work, showing current status
of submittals at all times. Make submittal log available to Construction Manager
and Architect for review upon request. List submittals and resubmittals
together.
F. Deliver submittals to Architect at business address.
3.3 GROUPING OF SUBMITTALS
A. Unless otherwise specified, make submittals in groups containing associated
items to ensure that information is available for checking each item when it is
received. 1. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with provisions of Contract. 2. Contractor may be held liable for delays so occasioned.
3.4 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Summary:
1. Shop drawing and product data submittals may be transmitted to the
Architect in electronic (PDF) format by electronic mail, General
Contractor’s or equal pre-approved website service designed specifically for transmittal submittals between all construction team members. 2. The intent of electronic submittals is to expedite the construction process by reducing paperwork, improving information flow, and decreasing
turnaround time.
3. The electronic submittal process is not intended for color samples, color
charts, or physical material samples.
4. Typical internet Service and Equipment Requirements:
a. Email address and Internet access at Contractor’s main office. b. Adobe Acrobat (www.adobe.com), or other similar PDF review software for applying electronic stamps and comments.
3.5 ARCHITECT’S REVIEW
A. Review by Architect does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for
errors which may exist in submitted data.
B. Revisions:
1. Make revisions required by Architect.
2. If Contractor considers required revisions to be a change, notification shall be given to Architect as provided for in General Conditions. 3. Make only those revisions required to obtain approval by Architect
C. Architect’s approval:
1. Until approval has been given by Architect, materials or items shall not
be fabricated or incorporated in Work. Architect’s approval will be only
general in nature and shall not be construed as permitting departure from
Contract requirements, or as relieving Contractor of responsibility for any
errors concerning details, dimensions, materials, etc. If drawings show variations from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, Contractor shall describe such variation in letter of transmittal. If acceptable, Architect may approve variations, subject to
proper adjustment in Contract price. If Contractor fails to describe such
variation, Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for executing
Work in according with Contract, even though such drawings have been
approved.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 3300-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Submittal Procedures
2. Acceptance shall not be construed as a complete check but will indicate only that design, fabrication, and detailing is consistent with design
intent and that errors and discrepancies observed when reviewed have
been noted. Acceptance of a separate item shall not be interpreted as an
approval of an assembly in which the item functions. The right is
reserved by the Architect to require submission of additional detail, shop,
erection or setting drawings and of any schedules for any part of Work,
whether or not specifically mentioned in Project Specifications, where
substitutions or modifications are proposed by Contractor, or where such information is essential to proper assembly, coordination or execution of Work under Contract. 3. Review and acceptance shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for errors in shop drawings or for proper coordination
assembly of materials and equipment with other Work, nor from
responsibility of furnishing materials and labor not indicated on
approved shop drawings, but required by Contract Documents for
completion of Work.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 3300-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Submittal Procedures
ATTACHMENT “A”
CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION:
The undersigned, as representative of Contractor for the above Project, submits the following
and certifies that:
1. Submittal has been reviewed and it is complete and conforms with requirements of Contract Documents except as noted.
2. Required dimensions have been field verified and are acceptable for installation
of proposed products and construction of proposed work.
3. Required quantities for products and materials covered by this submittal have
been verified as correct. 4. Fabrication processes and construction methods proposed in this submittal are acceptable for this Project and will result in a complete, functional installation.
5. Submittal has been coordinated with other submittals and work and proposed
products and construction will properly interface with other construction.
Project Name:
General Contractor:
Name of Contractor Reviewer:
Signature of Contractor Reviewer:
Date:
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7123-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Field Engineering
SECTION 01 7123
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work of this section includes Contractor's responsibilities for verifying existing
grades indicated on the drawings, establishing and maintaining bench marks
and reference lines, laying out buildings and appurtenances and coordinating locations of various trades work within the Work.
1.2 DUTIES
A. Engage a licensed land surveyor or engineer, acceptable to Owner, to provide
services and execute duties as specified.
B. Perform the following:
1. Verify existing grades prior to beginning site preparation. If existing
grades are at variance with drawings, notify Architect and receive
instructions prior to proceeding. 2. Verify limits of site preparation and earthwork operations. Locate adjacent buildings, appurtenances and trees to remain. a. Record lines and depths of rock, prior to rock excavation for use
with unit prices to determine adjustments to Contract Sum due to
rock excavation.
b. Re-establish permanent monuments disturbed during
construction.
3. Establish bench marks outside building lines. Establish two bench marks,
located on the project site, as widely separated as possible. 4. Verify locations and levels of buildings and appurtenances, including
structural and facing components. Note variation from indicated
5. locations and levels.
6. 5. Verify batter boards at building corners.
7. 6. Verify utility locations and pipe sizes, including new construction,
existing utilities to which a tap-on is required, and other existing active
and inactive utilities encountered during construction activity.
8. 7. Verify outside building lines to ensure correct position of buildings and appurtenances on project site. Make required surveys to fix and verify foundation locations and elevations, column centerlines, piers, walls, pits and trenches.
9. 8. Measure settlement of building during construction operations.
10. 9. Measure deflection in structural members.
11. 10. Coordinate work of all trades where work is concealed above
finish ceilings, below finish floors or within walls, particularly where
contract drawings are diagrammatic. Coordinate locations of piping, ductwork, conduit, lighting fixtures and similar items.
C. During the course of Work, prepare a log containing all data observed as a result
of field engineering. Maintain log for reference by the Owner and Architect.
D. Notify Architect, in writing, of on-site conditions which are at variance with the
Contract Documents. Compare variations in locations, level, plumb and
deflection with allowable tolerances given in the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7123-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Field Engineering
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7329-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Cutting and Patching
SECTION 01 7329
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Contractor's responsibilities:
1. Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting and patching required
to complete the work and as follows:
a. Make new and existing parts fit together.
b. Provide penetrations of existing structural, non-structural, mechanical and electrical elements and surfaces for installation of new materials and products. Provide shop drawings or other appropriate submittals for each structural penetration, as herein
specified.
c. Restore penetrations of existing structural, non-structural,
mechanical and electrical elements and surfaces in accord with
accepted submittals. Restoration materials shall be similar to
those removed or disturbed and/or materials and products as specified. d. For structural, mechanical and electrical penetrations and disturbances, engage the services of a professional Engineer
registered in the State where the project is located for all aspects of
the work. Submittals shall bear the Engineer’s seal.
2. In addition to Contract requirements, upon written instructions of
Architect:
a. Uncover work to provide for observation of covered work. b. Remove samples of existing installed materials for testing and for matching of new materials. c. Remove work to provide for alteration, restoration or refinishing
of existing work.
3. Do not endanger work by cutting or altering work.
4. Do not cut or alter work not of this Contract without written consent of
Owner.
B. Costs incurred for ill-timed work or uncovering of work shall include costs for services of Owner's consultants.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Temporary facilities and controls.
2. Product requirements.
3. Selective demolition.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings, calculations, product data and samples:
1. Submit shop drawings, calculations, product data and samples for structural, mechanical and electrical penetrations and disturbances. Indicate existing conditions, extent of cutting and patching work required, and restoration of elements to accommodate new work.
Include concrete mixes, structural steel and reinforcement, wiring,
conduit, piping, ductwork, fixtures and other engineering elements
required for completion of new work.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7329-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Cutting and Patching
2. Submittals shall bear the seal of an Engineer licensed in the State where the project is located.
B. Cutting/patching request:
1. Submit a written request to Architect, well in advance of executing
cutting or alteration, which affects the following and are not indicated on
the drawings:
a. Work of Owner or any separate Contract.
b. Structural value or integrity of any element of project.
c. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems. d. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements.
e. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
2. Request shall include:
a. Identification of project.
b. Description of affected work.
c. Necessity of cutting or alteration. d. Effect of work on Owner or separate Contract, or on structural or weatherproof integrity of project. e. Description of proposed work:
1) Description of cutting, patching or alteration.
2) Trades who will execute the work.
3) Products proposed to be used.
4) Extent of work to be done.
f. Alternatives to cutting and patching. g. Cost proposal, when applicable. h. Written permission of separate Contractors whose work will be affected.
3. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of
products from the original installation, Contractor shall submit a request
for substitution as specified in ** Product Substitution Procedures **
section.
4. Submit a written notice to Architect designating date and time work will be uncovered.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials for replacement of work removed: Materials shall be similar to those
removed or disturbed and shall comply with specification sections for type of
work to be performed.
B. Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
C. In-place materials: 1. Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials
that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the
visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7329-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Cutting and Patching
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Pre-cutting and patching conference: Review cutting and patching work with
Architect and affected subcontractors as a part of pre-construction conference
and monthly progress meetings.
B. Examination:
1. Examine existing conditions of the project, including elements subject to
damage or to movement during cutting and patching.
2. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of products or performance of work. 3. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing; do not proceed with work until Architect has provided further
instructions.
C. Preparation:
1. Provide adequate temporary support to ensure the structural value or
integrity of the affected portion of the work.
2. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the project from damage. 3. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work. Maintain excavations free
from water.
D. Performance:
1. Execute cutting, patching and demolition by methods which will prevent
damage to other work and will provide surfaces to receive installation of
repairs. 2. Execute work by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work.
3. Elements of a structural or support nature, including concealed elements
exposed by the removal of existing elements of the work, shall be
inspected and the Architect notified should additional work be indicated
due to loss of structural integrity, rot, rust, corrosion or other similar
condition. 4. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
5. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to
provide complete work in accord with requirements of Contract
Documents.
6. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations
through surfaces. Firestop penetrations through fire-rated construction as specified in Firestopping section. 7. Refinish entire surfaces (as necessary) to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes:
a. For continuous surfaces: Refinish to nearest intersection.
b. For an assembly: Refinish the entire unit.
8. Repair damaged adjacent surfaces and finishes to original condition.
9. Maintain integrity of fire-resistant and rated construction.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7329-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Cutting and Patching
E. Restoration:
1. Remove existing elements of a particular visual nature with care and in
such manner that maximum reuse is possible. Label, clean, protect and
store to ensure reusability or reinstallation, as applicable, to as near
original condition as possible.
2. Existing items of significant visual or operational value to Owner, not
planned for reinstallation, shall be made available for Owner's retention
for use in other work.
3. Repairs of visual or finish materials requiring new material shall be made using materials which will match existing work in type, size, texture and all other visual aspects as approved by Architect. 4. Comply with the requirements of the Product Requirements section for
delivery, storage, handling and installation of materials.
5. Restore penetrations of existing structural, non-structural, mechanical
and electrical elements and surfaces in accord with accepted submittals.
Restoration materials shall be similar to those removed or disturbed
and/or materials and products as specified. 6. Finish surfaces requiring removal and repair, but designated to receive a new finish obscuring the nature of the original surface, may be repaired using materials most expedient to the nature of the work and which will
result in a uniform, sound finished new surface of at least equal strength
to existing adjacent material replaced. Sub-surfaces to receive the new
finish shall be of like nature to existing surrounding surfaces and
acceptable to new finish surfacing installer for receipt of new materials
without extra surface preparation for the repaired area. 7. Wiring, conduit, pipe or other utility service elements shall be enclosed or recessed within the building elements or surfaces as approved by Architect with associated material removal and restoration as described
above. This shall include both new elements and existing surface-
mounted elements to be retained within finished area.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7423-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Final Cleaning
SECTION 01 7423
FINAL CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation
of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.
1. At completion of the work, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools,
construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and
about the Project. 2. At the Date of Substantial Completion, turn over to Owner those tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials specifically required by Contract Documents to be left for Owner's maintenance.
B. If Contractor fails to keep project clean or to clean up prior to Date of Substantial
Completion, the Owner may do so as provided in the General Conditions, and
the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.
1.2 STORAGE AND DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store volatile waste in covered metal containers. Remove from project site daily. 1. Do not allow volatile wastes to accumulate on project site. 2. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile substances.
B. Do not burn or bury waste materials or rubbish on project site. Comply with
governmental and environmental regulatory requirements for disposal of waste.
C. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in
storm or sanitary drains, on pavements, in gutters or on project site.
D. Do not dispose of waste or cleaning materials containing materials harmful to
plant growth on project site. As quickly as possible, clean up materials which are accidentally spilled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANING AGENTS
A. Cleaning agents:
1. Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned.
2. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or
property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANUP DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Execute cleaning procedures to ensure that building, project site and adjacent
properties are maintained free from debris and rubbish.
B. Wet down materials subject to blowing. Do not throw waste materials from
heights.
C. Provide covered on-site containers for waste collection. Place all waste materials
and rubbish in containers in an expeditious manner to prevent accumulation. Remove waste from project site when containers become full.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7423-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Final Cleaning
D. Legally dispose of all waste materials, rubbish, volatile materials and cleaning
materials off project site.
E. Do not dispose of materials in waterways.
F. Prior to start of finish painting, clean and maintain interior spaces in a "broom
clean" state until Date of Substantial Completion. Protect newly finished and
clean surfaces from contamination during cleaning operations.
G. Do not allow accumulation of debris contributing to survival or spread of
rodents, roaches or other pests.
1. On daily basis, remove debris containing food scraps. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for securing services of a pest exterminator at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.2 FINAL CLEANUP
A. Clean all finished surfaces in accord with manufacturer's product data and
requirements specified in trade sections, prior to Date of Substantial Completion.
All general and specific cleaning shall be performed prior to Contractor's request
that the project or portion thereof be inspected for Substantial Completion.
B. Remove dust, debris, oils, stains, fingerprints and labels from exposed interior and exterior finish surfaces, including glazing materials.
C. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. Replace
materials which cannot be repaired or patched.
D. Clean disturbed areas of project site of debris:
1. Broom-clean paved surfaces. Remove oil and similar deleterious
substances.
2. Remove debris from grassed and landscaped areas and from undisturbed
areas.
E. Install cleaned or new filters if HVAC units were operated during construction
period. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7700-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Closeout Procedures
SECTION 01 7700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Closeout includes general requirements in preparation for Final Completion and
Final Payment. Closeout is directly related to Substantial Completion and may
be a single time period for the entire work or a series of time periods for parts of
the work accepted as substantially complete.
1.2 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Prior to requesting Architect’s certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following and list known exceptions. 1. If Substantial Completion is being requested for a portion of the work,
define such portion.
2. Submit application for payment:
a. Submit sworn statement indicating 100 percent completion of
work claimed as “Substantially Complete”.
b. List incomplete items, value of incomplete work, and reasons for being incomplete. c. Include documentation for completion. 3. Indicate accounting changes to Contract Sum.
4. Submit for that portion of the work:
a. Specific warranties.
b. Workmanship/maintenance bonds.
c. Maintenance agreements.
d. Final certifications. e. Record drawings. f. Maintenance manuals. g. Project photographs, if pertinent to project activities.
h. Damage or settlement survey.
5. Obtain and submit releases enabling:
a. Owner’s use of the work.
b. Access to services and utilities.
c. Occupancy permits. d. Operating certificates. 6. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 7. Obtain and submit operating certificates, final inspection/test certificates,
and similar releases enabling Owner’s full and unrestricted use of the
work and access to services and utilities.
8. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical
items to Owner.
9. Make final change-over of locks and transmit keys to Owner, and advise Owner’s personnel of change-over in security provisions. Tag each key to indicate which lock key operates. Accompany keys with final hardware schedule, as specified in Finish Hardware section.
10. Complete start-up testing of systems and instruction of Owner’s
operating/maintenance personnel.
11. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.
B. Observation procedures:
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7700-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Closeout Procedures
1. Upon receipt of Contractor’s request, Architect will either proceed with observation or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled.
2. Following initial observation, Architect will either prepare Certificate of
Substantial Completion or advise Contractor of work which must be
performed prior to issuance of certificate.
3. Re-observe when requested and assured the work has been substantially
completed. If Architect and/or his consultants are required to perform
more than two re-observations, Contractor shall be responsible for
payment of time and costs incurred by Architect and his consultants for further re-observations. 4. Results of completed observation will form initial “punch list” for final acceptance.
1.3 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. General: Prior to requesting Architect’s observation for certification of Final
acceptance and Final payment, complete the following. List known exceptions.
1. Indicate accounting changes to Contract Sum.
2. Submit Final Application for Payment with: a. Final releases. b. Supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted.
c. Certificates of insurance for Products and Completed Operations
where required.
3. Submit copy of Architect’s Final Punch List. Contractor shall certify each
item has been completed or resolved for acceptance.
4. Submit final meter readings for utilities. 5. Submit: a. Specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar
documents not submitted at time of Substantial Completion.
b. Record drawings and maintenance manuals not submitted at time
of Substantial Completion.
c. Final project photographs.
6. Submit consent of surety. 7. Finishes manual: a. Assemble a manual bound in hard cover binders, presenting for Owner’s guidance full details of finish materials used in the
building including care and maintenance.
b. Include a list of all finishes and their product names, numbers,
colors, and cleaning and maintenance data. Include a list of
installers and service representatives with company names and
addresses, names of individual contacts, and telephone numbers. c. Submit documents in suitable transfer cases indexed and marked for each division of the work. 8. Submit executed contracts for extended maintenance or service required
by Contract Documents to Architect for transfer to Owner.
9. Revise and submit evidence of final (continuing) requirements.
10. Complete final clean-up.
11. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters
during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter
on inspection.
a. Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standards. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7700-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Closeout Procedures
B. Re-observance procedure:
1. Upon receipt of Contractor’s Notice that the work has been completed,
including punch list items and excepting incomplete items delayed
because of acceptable circumstances, Architect will observe the work.
2. Upon completion of observation, Architect will either prepare certificates
of Final Acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or
obligations not fulfilled.
3. If necessary procedure will be repeated.
1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Unless otherwise required, furnish three complete sets of required documents.
2. Do not use required documents for construction purposes.
3. Protect from deterioration and loss in a secure fire resistive location.
4. Provide access to record documents.
B. Record drawings:
1. Maintain a print set of Contract Drawings and shop drawings in clean, undamaged condition. 2. Mark up variations in the work as originally shown. 3. Mark drawing most capable of showing field condition.
4. Where shop drawings are used for mark-up, cross reference with
Contract Drawings.
5. Mark with red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to
distinguish categories of work.
6. Mark up new information of importance not shown on Contract Drawings or shop drawings. 7. Record work covered by subsequent construction or requiring removal of finish material should maintenance be necessary.
8. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable.
9. Organize Record Drawing sheets into manageable sets. Identify each set.
10. At completion of project, provide the following:
a. Digital copy of scanned documents marked-up and noted with all
variations and revisions. Provide on cloud-based document service, or USB flash drive in PDF format, as directed by Architect. b. Indicate digital copies of Drawings as Record Drawings.
C. Record Project Manual:
1. Maintain 1-copy of Project Manual, including addenda, Change orders,
and similar modifications.
2. Mark up variations occurring in actual work.
3. Record substitutions and selection of options.
4. Cross reference with other documents. 5. Where feasible, mark up variations on blank left-hand pages of Project Manual, opposite original text.
D. Record product data:
1. Maintain one copy of each Product Data Submittal.
2. Mark up significant variations in actual work. Include:
a. Variations in product as delivered to site.
b. Variations from manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations for installation.
3. Cross-reference with Change Orders and mark up Record Drawings and
Specifications.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7700-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Closeout Procedures
E. Record sample submittal: Immediately prior to Date(s) of Substantial
Completion, Architect will meet with Contractor at site, and determine which, if
any, samples to be transmitted to Owner. Comply with Architect’s instructions
for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to Owner’s sample storage
place. Dispose of other samples.
F. Maintenance and operating manuals:
1. Organize maintenance and operating information into sets of manageable
size. Manuals divisions shall match organization and location of
specification sections indicated in Project Manual. 2. Bind into heavy duty 3-ring binders, minimum 2" size, permanently identified and indexed with thumb tabs. 3. Include:
a. Name of project, nature of information, Contractor/subcontractor
and name and address of local parts supplier and service
organization.
b. Emergency instructions.
c. Spare parts listing. d. Warranties. e. Wiring diagrams. f. Recommend turn-around cycles.
g. Inspection procedures.
h. Applicable shop drawings.
i. Applicable product data.
G. Miscellaneous record submittals:
1. Refer to other sections of these specifications for requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with performance of the work. 2. Immediately prior to Date(s) of Substantial Completion:
a. Complete miscellaneous records and place in good order.
b. Identify and bind or file.
c. make ready for continued use and reference.
H. Inspection reports: Submit certificates from applicable local governmental
agencies indicating that construction has been inspected as required by laws or ordinances and that project is approved for occupancy.
I. Warranties: In accord with Contract Conditions, provide warranties as follows:
1. Contractor shall furnish his warranty in writing, on form bound herein.
2. Forward each installer’s warranty, in writing, on form bound herein.
3. Forward manufacturers’ and installers’ warranties as specified in
individual specification sections; fully executed, issued in Owner’s name,
and registered with issuing manufacturer, or installer.
4. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in individual sections, period for warranties shall begin on Date of Substantial Completion and shall continue for one year. 5. Warranties shall state Date of Substantial Completion and date on which
warranty expires.
6. Assemble, bind, label and transmit warranties as required for other
manuals above.
J. Valve tag schedules: Furnish two copies of schedules with closeout documents,
and mount one copy, framed under glass, in mechanical room.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 01 7700-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Closeout Procedures
K. Keys: Deliver at Date of Substantial Completion. Tag each key to indicate lock
which key operates. Accompany keys with final hardware schedule, as specified
in Finish Hardware Schedule.
1.5 OPERATING/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Coordinate demonstrations and trial operations of equipment for Owner’s
designated personnel, and complete such demonstrations prior to Date of Final
Acceptance. Each installer of work requiring maintenance or operation shall:
1. Meet with Owner’s personnel, at project site to provide basic instructions
needed for proper operation and maintenance of the entire work. 2. Provide instructions by manufacturer’s representatives as required. 3. Review maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, spare parts and materials, lubricants, fuels, identification materials, control
sequences, hazards, cleaning and similar procedures and facilities.
4. Demonstrate start-up, shut-down, emergency operations, noise and
vibration adjustments, safety, economy/efficiency adjustments, and
similar operations.
5. Review maintenance and operations in relation to warranties and similar continuing commitments.
1.6 CONTINUING INSPECTIONS:
A. Comply with Owner’s request to participate in inspections at end of each time
period required by specific warranties or similar components. Participate in
general inspection of the work one year following Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 02 4100-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Demolition
SECTION 02 4100
DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Selective site and building demolition to accommodate new buildings,
additions, modifications, renovation work, and site improvements to
existing club facilities, as shown on Drawings.
1.2 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. During demolition operations, should suspect asbestos or asbestos-containing
materials, or other material listed as a hazardous material by the Environmental Protection Agency be discovered, notify Architect and Owner and discontinue work until further instructed.
B. Conduct demolition operations and the removal of debris to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, and adjacent facilities.
C. Do not close or obstruct streets or walks without permission from authorities
having jurisdiction. Provide flagman where public thoroughfares are used for
debris removal. Maintain thoroughfares free of dirt and debris caused by
demolition or hauling operations.
D. Erect and maintain temporary ditches and silt barriers to prevent surface water
from carrying soil and debris beyond contract limits, onto adjacent properties or
pavements or into storm drainage structures.
E. Limit exterior dust by sprinkling or other acceptable methods.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PRE-DEMOLITION CONFERENCE: A. Visit Project site and compare utility locations with indications in Contract Documents. Report any discrepancies discovered for resolution.
B. Prior to beginning demolition work, a pre-demolition conference will be held to
review work to be accomplished. Contractor, Architect, Owner and related
subcontractors involved in demolition work will be present. Contractor shall
notify Architect and Owner at least 14-days prior to time of conference.
C. Demolition work shall be reviewed at conference. Contractor shall make list of
items to be removed, reused, or stored.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate disconnection or disruption of utility services with Owner.
B. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by
demolition operations, as directed by Architect or authorities having jurisdiction.
Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to the start of the work.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 02 4100-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Demolition
D. Erect and maintain temporary ditches, barriers, and straw bale dams to prevent surface water from carrying debris beyond contract limits, onto adjacent
properties or into storm drainage system.
3.3 SITE DEMOLITION
A. Remove existing above and below-grade construction indicated to be removed to
the limit indicated on drawings.
1. Remove underground structures totally below areas of new building
construction and within 2 ft. of building lines.
2. Remove underground structures to within 2 ft. of subgrade elevations in
areas to receive new site pavements and landscape planting.
B. Disconnect and seal off abandoned utilities and utilities to be removed prior to start of demolition. Utilities shall be disconnected below existing grade level or outside of contract limits by representatives of public utility being disconnected. Maintain utility service to facilities in use.
3.4 DEMOLITION A. General: Remove existing construction as indicated on Drawings. Include portions of the building above and below grade, including floor slabs and
foundations, as required for new construction.
B. Disconnect and seal off abandoned utilities and utilities to be removed prior to
start of demolition. Utilities shall be disconnected below existing grade level or
outside of contract limits by representatives of public utility being disconnected.
Maintain utility service to facilities in use.
C. Except for items designated to be removed and reused in the work or items retained by Owner for storage, all material resulting from demolition work shall become property of Contractor and shall be promptly removed from site. Storage or sale of removed materials will not be permitted on Project site or within building.
D. Prepare an itemized list of material or equipment for reuse or storage. List
quantities, condition and location. Submit copies to Owner within 7-days of
removal of item.
E. Materials resulting from demolition become the property of Contractor except as
follows:
1. Equipment belonging to utility or public service companies unless
abandoned by such companies.
2. Hidden valuable items, buried items and property of third persons.
3. Other items indicated or otherwise identified by Owner or Architect.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove debris, and other materials resulting from demolition operations from the Project site. Do not stockpile debris on Project site.
B. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures will not be permitted
on Project site.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2113-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Brick Veneer Masonry
SECTION 04 2113
BRICK VENEER MASONRY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Brick veneer.
2. Masonry mortar; grey, white, and custom color.
3. Masonry accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 2300 – Alternates for Fluid-Applied Weather-Resistive Barriers. 2. Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications for steel lintels, and shelf angles installed under this Section.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C91 – Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
2. ASTM C144 – Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Mortar.
3. ASTM C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
4. ASTM C207 – Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry
Purposes.
5. ASTM C216 – Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry
Units Made from Clay or Shale).
6. ASTM C270 – Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
7. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
8. ASTM C979 – Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete.
B. Brick Industry Association (BIA): www.gobrick.com
1. BIA Technical Note 1 – Hot and Cold Weather Construction.
2. BIA Technical Note 18A – Accommodating Expansion of Brickwork.
3. BIA Technical Note 20 – Cleaning Brickwork.
4. BIA Technical Note 28B – Brick Veneer/Steel Stud Walls.
5. BIA Technical Note 28D – Brick Veneer/Concrete Masonry Walls.
6. BIA Technical Note 36A – Brick Masonry Details, Caps and Copings,
Corbels and Racking.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets for masonry accessories.
2. Color charts for masonry mortar and sealants.
3. Technical data sheets.
B. Mix Design: Mortar mix designs including types, properties, materials, and
proportions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2113-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Brick Veneer Masonry
C. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Movement Joint Locations: In accordance with BIA Technical Note
18A.
b. Brick Sizes: Match existing.
c. Special Shape Profiles: Match existing.
d. Bonding Patterns: Match existing.
e. Mortar Joint Width: Match existing.
f. Brick Veneer Anchors: Layout, length and spacing with veneer
offset dimension from face-of-brick to face-of-substrate.
g. Details at through-wall flashing, cavity drainage material, and
weep vents.
h. Details at movement joints.
i. Details at caps, copings, corbels, racking, and special conditions.
2. Verified field dimensions for existing brick sizes, special shape profiles,
and mortar joint width; for matching purposes.
D. Samples:
1. Face Brick: Straps of 5 or more bricks, showing full range of color
variation and appearance characteristics expected in finished installation.
2. Masonry Mortar: Color sample sets prepared with 1/4 in. wide strips of
available colors; for verification.
3. Sealant: Color sample sets with 1/4 in. wide strips of available colors; for
verification.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain brick through single source from same manufacturer.
2. Obtain mortar through single source from same manufacturer.
3. Obtain accessory products through single source from same
manufacturer, or other manufacturers; subject to Architect’s review, and compliance with specified requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of brick veneer work required
for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockups:
1. At location directed by Architect; install minimum 4 by 4 ft. by full
thickness, freestanding sample wall panel using materials noted on
approved submittals to match existing brick work, including:
a. Substrate wall construction.
b. Veneer anchors, through-wall flashing, weep holes, and other
accessories.
c. Brick size, color, texture, and pattern.
d. Mortar joint width, color, and profile.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2113-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Brick Veneer Masonry
e. Inside and outside corners, perimeter edges, special conditions,
and openings.
f. Sealant joint widths, and color.
g. Workmanship.
h. Aesthetic effects.
2. Prepare mockup for Architect’s approval, after receipt of approved
submittals, and 3-weeks before start of installation. Prepare additional
mockups, if required by Architect, until approved.
a. Orient mockup to face south.
b. Orient mockup adjacent to and parallel with existing brick work
for matching purposes.
c. Clean 1/2 of finished face with approved cleaner.
d. Protect approved mockup with weather-resistant covering.
3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockup, unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by Architect.
4. Maintain approved mockup during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Do not remove approved mockups until directed
by Architect.
E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting after receipt of approved
submittals, installation of mockup, and 2-weeks before start of installation to
review brick masonry requirements.
1. Attendance: Owner’s representative, Contractor, brick installation
foreman, Architect; and others installing work interfaced with brick
masonry.
a. Confirm attendance of brick foreman, and Architect before
scheduling meeting.
b. Notify attendees 1-week before scheduled meeting date and time.
c. Submit meeting report to Architect and copy attendees within 3-
days after meeting.
2. Agenda:
a. Contract Documents, brick veneer design and materials, and
submittal requirements.
b. Brick Industry Association installation instructions, standard
details, and recommendations.
c. Interface, and coordination with other work.
d. Review samples, and mockup.
e. Observe installation areas, and working conditions.
f. Availability of materials.
g. Schedule.
h. Environmental conditions.
i. Other items required for successful completion of work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle brick masonry products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2113-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Brick Veneer Masonry
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Install brick veneer masonry in accordance with BIA’s recommended
environmental conditions.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 BRICK VENEER
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products.
1. Basis of Design: Match existing face brick.
NOTE: Final selection and approval face brick, based on aesthetic effects,
is judged solely by Architect.
B. Description: Manufactured clay brick stretchers; meeting ASTM C216, Grade
MW or SW, and Type FBX, FBS, or FBA to match existing face brick.
1. Thickness: Match existing.
2. Size: Match existing.
3. Color, Texture, and Finish: Match existing.
4. Installation Method: Mortar set and mechanically attached.
C. Special Shapes: Provide special brick shapes with color, texture, and finish of
exposed surfaces to match exposed surface of stretchers as required, including:
1. Where installations would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces at
ends of sills, caps, and steps; paver and other applications provide solid
units, without cores or frogs.
2. Where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including:
corners, sealant joints, bond beams, and lintels.
3. Where special shapes requiring brick of size, color, texture, and finish on
exposed surfaces cannot be fabricated by sawing.
4. Where shapes fabricated by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being
exposed to view.
2.2 MASONRY MORTAR
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: CEMEX; www.cemexusa.com
a. Grey Mortar: Portland Cement-Lime Mix.
b. Custom Color Mortar: Richcolor Masonry Cement.
2. National Cement: www.nationalcement.com
a. Grey Mortar: Coosa Masonry Cement.
b. Custom Color Mortar: Coosa Color Masonry Cement.
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description:
1. Grey or White Mortar: Factory blended masonry cement composed of
portland cement, and hydrated lime; designed for on-site mixing with
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2113-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Brick Veneer Masonry
manufacturer’s recommended amounts of masonry sand, and water to
produce masonry mortar meeting requirements of ASTM C270 for Type
N mortar.
a. Compressive Strength: Minimum 750 lb./in.2 at 28 days.
b. Air Content: Maximum 14 percent.
2. Custom Color Mortar: Factory blended masonry cement composed of
portland cement, white limestone, pigments, and chemical admixtures for
plasticizing and other performance properties; designed for on-site
mixing with manufacturer’s recommended amounts of masonry sand,
and water to produce custom color masonry mortar meeting
requirements of ASTM C270 for Type N mortar.
a. Compressive Strength: Minimum 750 lb./in.2 at 28 days.
b. Air Content: Maximum 20 percent.
c. Color: As selected by Architect.
C. Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 or Type 2, except Type 3 may be
used for cold-weather construction; natural color or white cement may be
used as required to produce mortar color indicated.
2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type N.
3. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium
oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with
ASTM C979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance
in brick masonry mortar.
4. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144, and as follows:
a. Grey Mortar: Natural sand or crushed stone.
b. White Mortar: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
c. Custom Color Mortar: Natural colored sand or ground marble,
granite, or other stone of color necessary to produce required
mortar color.
5. Water: Drinkable.
2.3 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following; unless noted
otherwise:
1. Basis of Design: Hohmann & Barnard; www.h-b.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Brick Veneer Anchors: Hohmann & Barnard; Thermal 2-Seal Wing Nut Anchor
with 2X-Hook. Use for stud frame construction.
1. Description: Adjustable, thermally-broken, single screw veneer anchor
with adjustable wing nut; dual-diameter barrel with 2 EPDM washers to
seal against rigid insulation and WRB; and 2X-Hook.
a. Anchor Length: Equal to combined thickness of rigid insulation
and sheathing.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2113-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Brick Veneer Masonry
b. Anchor Spacing: 16 in. on-center vertically and horizontally to
anchor brick veneer every 1.77 ft.2, or as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
c. Installation Method: Mechanically attach anchors to substrate;
adjust wing nut to tighten and seal washer; insert 2X-Hooks into
wing nuts, and vertically adjust to align with bed joints.
2. Components:
a. Screw Fastener: 5/16 in., hex head, polymer coated steel, self-
drilling screw.
b. Thermal Wing Nut: Polymer coated steel with slotted holes to
receive 2X-Hook, and 1/2 in. inward adjustment.
c. Dual-Diameter Barrel: Type 304 stainless steel.
d. Large Washer: 1-1/2 in. diameter, Type 304 stainless steel bonded
to EPDM compression washer to seal hole in rigid insulation.
e. Small Washer: Fits outside barrel diameter, Type 304 stainless
steel bonded to EPDM compression washer to seal hole in WRB.
f. Veneer Hook: HB-2X-Hooks: 3/16 in. diameter wire by length
required; Type 304, stainless steel.
C. Brick Veneer Anchors: Hohmann & Barnard; HB-5213-2X Adjustable Veneer
Anchor with Brass Expansion Bolt. Use for concrete, and concrete block
construction.
1. Description: Adjustable, single bolt veneer anchor with backplate,
expansion bolt, and veneer hook.
a. Anchor Length: Equal to combined thickness of rigid insulation
and sheathing.
b. Anchor Spacing: 16 in. on-center vertically and horizontally to
anchor brick veneer every 1.77 ft.2, or as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
c. Installation Method: Mechanically fasten anchors into metal stud
flanges through continuous rigid insulation, WRB, and gypsum
sheathing; adjust wing nut to tighten and seal washer against
rigid insulation; insert 2X-Hooks into wing nuts, and vertically
adjust to align with bed joints.
2. Components:
a. Backplate: HB-5213; 12 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, L-shaped
anchor plate with slotted hole to receive 2X-Hook, and 7/16 in.
diameter mounting hole for attachment bolt.
b. Expansion Bolt: HB-523; 1/4 in. internal bolt, and 3/4 in.
diameter stainless steel washer with brass expansion sleeve and
expander cone.
c. Veneer Hook: HB-2X-Hook; 3/16 in. diameter wire by length
required; Type 304, stainless steel.
D. Through-Wall Flashing: Hohmann & Barnard; Expra-Max EPDM Thru-Wall
Flashing; with termination bar.
1. Description: EPDM synthetic rubber; flexible to minus 49 degrees F, tear
and puncture resistant, UV stable.
a. Thickness: 40 mil. (0.040 in.)
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2113-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Brick Veneer Masonry
b. Roll Size: 12, 16, 18, 20, 24, or 36 in. width as required, by 50 ft.
long.
2. Other Components:
a. Termination Bar: HB-T2-Termination Bar; 1-1/2 in. by 8 ft. long;
26-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, with 3/8 in. 45-degree caulking
flange on top edge, and pre-drilled mounting holes at 8 in. on-
center.
E. Control Joint Filler: Hohmann & Barnard; NSTA – Closed Cell Neoprene Sponge
with tear strip, and pressure-sensitive adhesive on 1-side.
1. Description: Neoprene control joint and bearing pad material.
a. Thickness: 3/8 in., unless noted otherwise.
b. Size: 3 in. wide by 48 in. long.
c. Installation Method: Adhered at brick control joints, and
horizontal bearing locations under lintels and shelf angles.
F. Cavity Drainage Material: Hohmann & Barnard; Mortar Trap.
1. Description: Crenellated top edge; 90 percent open mesh construction
with woven high-density polyethylene (HDPE) fibers.
a. Thickness: Match cavity wall air-space.
b. Size: 10 in. high by 48 in. long.
c. Installation Method: Continuous loose-fit in cavity wall air-space
over thru-wall flashing along horizontal drain locations.
G. Weep Vents: Hohmann & Barnard; Quatro-Vent.
1. Description: Rectangular, polypropylene, honeycomb weep vent.
a. Thickness: 3/8 in.
b. Size: 2-1/2 in. high by 3-3/8 in. wide.
c. Color: Clear, or as selected by Architect.
d. Installation Method: Loose-fit in open brick head joints at 16 in.
on-center over thru-wall flashing at horizontal drain locations.
H. Sealant: Hohmann & Barnard; HB Sealant.
1. Description: Multi-purpose, elastomeric, moisture-curing polyether
sealant; meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, T2, M,
G, A, and O.
I. Masonry Cleaner: Prosoco; Sure Klean Vana Trol; www.prosoco.com
1. Description: Concentrated acidic cleaner for new masonry surfaces;
designed for on-site dilution with water in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions for intended use.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of brick
masonry in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2113-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Brick Veneer Masonry
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Maximum substrate variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
2. Maximum wall stud framing deflection of L/360.
3. Installation of items located in or behind brick veneer, including backing
plates, blocking, electrical device boxes, door frames, and other built-in
items.
4. Control joint locations.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install brick masonry in accordance with BIA Technical Note 18A, 28D, and 28D;
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean installed brick masonry using methods and materials recommended by
BIA Technical Note 20, Chapter 21.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed work from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged work to new condition with no remaining evidence of damage.
Replace damaged work that cannot be restored to acceptable condition, as
directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2114-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Surface Bonded Brick Veneer Masonry
SECTION 04 2114
SURFACE-BONDED BRICK VENEER MASONRY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior thin brick installed like tile on interior fireplace fronts.
2. Exterior thin brick cut from full size face brick, and installed like tile on
exterior walls.
3. Cement backer board substrate.
4. Secondary weather-resistive barrier at thin brick veneer installed over
wood sheathing with integral primary WRB.
5. Installation materials.
6. Thin brick installation schedule.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 1639 – Composite Wood Sheathing with integral primary WRB.
2. Section 09 9100 – Painting for painting interior thin brick.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM)
1. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
2. ASTM C216 – Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry
Units Made from Clay or Shale).
3. ASTM C1088 - Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made
From Clay or Shale.
4. ASTM C1193 – Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
5. ASTM C1325 – Standard Specification for Fiber-Mat Reinforced
Cementitious Backer Units.
6. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
B. Brick Industry Association (BIA):
1. BIA Technical Note 1 – Hot and Cold Weather Construction.
2. BIA Technical Note 6 – Painting Brick Masonry.
3. BIA Technical Note 20 – Cleaning Brickwork.
4. BIA Technical Note 28C – Thin Brick Veneer.
C. Tile Council of North America (TCNA); Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone
Tile Installation:
1. TCNA W244C – Interior Walls.
2. TCNA W244E – Exterior Walls.
3. TCNA EJ171 – Movement Joint Guidelines for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone
Tile.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2114-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Surface Bonded Brick Veneer Masonry
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Technical data sheets.
2. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Substrate joint locations.
b. Thin brick and joint layouts, patterns, trim, and special shapes.
c. Grout joint width.
d. Movement joint types and details.
e. Details at adjoining materials, perimeters, penetrations, and
special conditions.
2. Verified field dimensions for installation areas, and special conditions.
C. Samples:
1. Full size thin brick units, and special shapes specified or selected for this
Project; show color variations, and textures expected in finished
installation.
2. Color samples for mortar joints.
D. Installer Certification: Document prepared by organization listed under Installer
Qualifications showing approval, authorization, or licensing for each thin brick
installer working on this Project.
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Installation.
F. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited lifetime warranty against defects in
materials and manufacturing of thin brick.
G. Installation Products Warranty: Manufacturer’s 25-year limited system warranty
against defects in materials and manufacturing.
H. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain thin brick, and special shapes through single source from same
manufacturer.
2. Obtain cement backer board through single source from same
manufacturer, or from other manufacturers acceptable to installation
product manufacturer.
3. Obtain installation products through single source from same
manufacturer.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2114-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Surface Bonded Brick Veneer Masonry
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of thin brick work required for
this Project; approved, authorized, or licensed by one of the following:
1. National Tile Contractors Association; 5-Star Members.
2. Tile Contractors Association of America; Trowel of Excellence Members.
3. Ceramic Tile Education Foundation; Certified Installers.
4. US Department of Labor; Journeyman Tile Layers.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockups:
1. At locations directed by design professional, install min. 4 by 4 foot
freestanding sample wall panels for interior and exterior wall installations
using materials noted on approved submittals, showing:
a. Substrate preparation.
b. Thin brick pattern, and texture.
c. Paint finish on half of interior wall panel in color as approved by
design professional, in accordance with Section 09 9100.
d. Mortar joint width, and profile.
e. Detail at inside and outside corners, perimeter edges, special
conditions, and openings.
f. Joints, caulking and sealant.
g. Workmanship.
h. Aesthetic effects.
2. Prepare mockups, for design professional’s approval, after receipt of
approved submittals, and 3 weeks before start of installation. Prepare
additional mockups, if required by design professional, until approved.
a. Clean exposed face of mockups with approved cleaner.
3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockup, unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by design professional.
4. Maintain approved mockup during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Do not remove approved mockups until directed
by design professional.
D. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting after receipt of approved
submittals, installation of mockups, and 2 weeks before start of installation to
review thin brick requirements.
1. Attendance: Owner’s representative, Contractor, thin brick foreman,
installation material manufacturer’s technical representative, design
professional; and others installing work interfaced with thin brick
installation.
a. Confirm attendance of foreman, manufacturer’s technical
representative, and design professional before scheduling meeting.
b. Notify attendees 7 days before scheduled meeting date and time.
c. Submit meeting report to design professional, and copy attendees
within 3 days after meeting.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2114-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Surface Bonded Brick Veneer Masonry
2. Agenda:
a. Warranty requirements.
b. Contract Documents, thin brick design, materials, and submittal
requirements
c. Manufacturer’s installation instructions, and BIA Technical Notes
28C.
d. Substrate preparation
e. Interface, and coordination with other work.
f. Review approved samples, and mockups.
g. Observe installation areas, and working conditions.
h. Availability of materials.
i. Schedule.
j. Acceptable field conditions, for scheduled installation period.
k. Other items required for successful completion of work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle thin brick and installation materials in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental: Install thin brick, mortar, and grout when ambient temperature of
materials and substrates is between 40 and 90 degrees F.; outside these limits use
hot or cold weather construction methods described in BIA Technical Note 1.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR THIN BRICK
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products:
1. Basis of Design: General Shale; Old Brick Originals Thin Brick;
www.generalshale.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Manufactured thin clay brick stretchers; meeting ASTM C1088, Type
TBX in accordance with ASTM C67; with paint finish as shown on Drawings, for
use on walls in dry interior areas scheduled to receive thin brick finish.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Size: 2-1/4 inch by 7-5/8 inch.
3. Color and Texture: City Hall.
4. Installation Method: TCNA W244C Interior Walls; with thin brick
installed like tile over cement backer board on stud framing.
5. Joint Installation Method: TCNA EJ171 for location, width, and details of
movement joints.
C. Special Shapes: Provide special thin brick shapes with color and texture to match
stretchers as shown on Drawings, and as follows:
1. Where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including
corners, edge caps, offsets, movement joints, and custom shapes. Do not
miter stretcher units to form standard corners.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2114-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Surface Bonded Brick Veneer Masonry
2. Where special shapes requiring thin brick of size, color, and texture on
exposed surfaces cannot be fabricated by sawing.
3. Where shapes fabricated by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being
exposed to view.
2.2 EXTERIOR THIN BRICK
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products:
1. Basis of Design: Match existing face brick.
NOTE: Final selection and approval of face brick, based on aesthetic
effects, is judged solely by Architect.
B. Description: Clay brick stretchers; meeting ASTM C216, Grade MW or SW, and
Type FBX, FBS, or FBA to match existing face brick.
1. Thickness: 1 in.; cut from full size face brick.
2. Size: Match existing.
3. Color, Texture, and Finish: Match existing.
4. Installation Method: TCNA W244E Exterior Walls; with thin-cut brick
installed like tile over cement backer board on stud framing.
5. Joint Installation Method: TCNA EJ171 for location, width, and details of
movement joints.
2.3 CEMENT BACKER BOARD
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Custom Building Products; WonderBoard Lite
Backerboard; www.custombuildingproducts.com
2. United States Gypsum Company; Durock Cement Board with
EdgeGuard; www.usg.com
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Fiberglass mesh-reinforced boards composed of Portland cement,
EPS beads, and aggregates; meeting ASTM C1325; for use on walls in dry interior
areas scheduled to receive thin brick finish.
1. Thickness: 7/16 in.
2. Size: 36 by 60 in.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 10; smoke
developed 10; in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Board Installation Method: Mechanically attached to metal studs with
joints and corners taped.
5. Joint Installation Method: TCNA EJ171 for location, width, and details of
movement joints.
C. Accessories: Recommended by backer board manufacturer for conditions of use
and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to design professional’s review,
and compliance with specified requirements.
1. Joint Tape: 2 in. wide, alkali-resistant fiberglass mesh tape.
2. Joint Filler: Same as cementitious bond coat.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2114-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Surface Bonded Brick Veneer Masonry
3. Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant screws.
2.4 SECONDARY WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIER
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: DuPont; Tyvek StuccoWrap; www.construction.tyvek.com 2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Accessories: Recommended by secondary WRB manufacturer for conditions of
use and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Tyvek Tape. 2. Tyvek Sealant.
2.5 INSTALLATION PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: As shown on Part 3, Thin Brick Installation Schedule.
2. Custom Building Products, Inc.; www.custombuildingproducts.com
3. Laticrete International, Inc.; www.laticrete.com
4. Mapei Corporation; www.mapei.com
5. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
NOTE: Final selection and approval of grout and sealant colors, based on
aesthetic effects, is judged solely by design professional.
B. Description: Recommended by installation products manufacturer for TCNA
conditions of use and application, unless noted otherwise; meeting applicable
standards of ANSI A118 Series of material specifications.
1. Grout and Sealant Colors: Standard or color matched as selected by design
professional.
2. Installation Methods: TCNA and applicable standards of ANSI A108
Series of installation specifications, as shown on Part 3, Thin Brick
Installation Schedule.
C. Compatibility: Provide installation products for substrate preparation, setting,
grouting, care and maintenance that are compatible with one another, and with
specified substrates; based on testing and manufacturer’s field experience.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of thin
brick interior and exterior wall finishes in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, BIA Technical Note 28C, Contract Documents, and approved
submittals.
1. Notify design professional of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2114-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Surface Bonded Brick Veneer Masonry
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Max. substrate variation of 1/4 in. in 10 feet.
2. Max. wall stud framing deflection of L/360.
3. Installation of items located in or behind thin brick, including backing
plates, blocking, electrical device boxes, and other built-in items.
4. Movement joints in substrates are aligned with movement joints in thin
brick work, or relocated with crack isolation membrane as directed
by design professional.
5. Control Joint Locations:
a. Interior Dry Use Areas: Max. 25 ft. apart in each direction with
max. area of 625 ft.2
b. Exterior Areas: Max. 18 ft. apart in each direction with max. area of
144 ft.2, or length-to-height or height-to length ratio of 2.5 to 1.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install thin brick interior and exterior wall finishes in accordance with TCNA
Handbook, BIA Technical Note 28C, manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, approved submittals, and Part 3, Thin Brick Installation Schedule.
1. Apply thin set mortar to back of each thin brick to ensure full coverage.
2. Use grout bag to fill joints between thin bricks.
3. Protect thin brick surfaces from grout stains with grout release agent as
necessary.
B. Clean installed thin brick and grout using methods and materials recommended
by BIA Technical Note 20.
C. Paint interior thin brick in color specified on Drawings, or selected by design
professional in accordance with BIA Technical Note 6, and Section 09 9100.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
3.4 THIN BRICK INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Wall Finish – TCNA W244C
1. Use: Thin-set thin brick over stud framed walls with cement backer board
substrate.
2. Installation Products:
a. Cement Backer Board: Custom; WonderBoard Lite Backerboard.
NOTE: Install backer board with alkali-resistant fiberglass mesh
tape and thin-set mortar for taping joints.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 04 2114-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Surface Bonded Brick Veneer Masonry
b. Bond Coat: Custom; ProLite Premium Large Format Tile Mortar;
latex-modified dry set mortar for interior installations.
c. Grout: Custom; Prism Ultimate Performance Grout; cement-based
grout.
B. Exterior Wall Finish – TCNA W244E
1. Use: Thin-set thin brick over stud framed walls, composite wood
sheathing with integral WRB specified in Section 06 1639, secondary WRB,
and cement backer board substrate.
2. Installation Products:
a. Secondary WRB: DuPont; Tyvek StuccoWrap
b. Cement Backer Board: Custom; WonderBoard Lite Backerboard.
NOTE: Install backer board with alkali-resistant fiberglass mesh
tape and thin-set mortar for taping joints.
c. Bond Coat: MegaLite Ultimate Crack Prevention Large Format Tile
Mortar; latex-modified dry-set mortar..
d. Grout: Custom; Prism Ultimate Performance Grout; cement-based
grout.
C. Movement Joints: TCNA EJ171 – Movement Joint Guidelines, and ASTM C1193.
1. Use: Expansion, contraction, and perimeter joints.
2. Installation Products:
a. Backer Rod: Recommended by sealant manufacturer.
b. Bond Breaker Tape: Recommended by sealant manufacturer.
c. Joint Sealant: Custom; 100% Silicone Sealant; Type S, grade NS,
Class 25, Use T, I, M and G; meeting ASTM C920.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5000-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Metal Fabrications
SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description:
1. This section includes items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars,
strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or
other metal systems specified elsewhere.
B. Related Documents and Standards:
1. All referenced standards and cited publications shall be those specifically
denoted within the applicable building code noted in the General Notes
of the Construction Drawings.
2. All Metal Fabrication work on this project shall confirm to the
Construction Documents and applicable building code including
referenced standards.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction
contiguous with Metal Fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for Metal Fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of Metal Fabrications and
their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless
otherwise indicated. For Metal Fabrications exposed to view in the completed
Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names,
or blemishes.
2.2 METAL MATERIALS
A. Provide Structural Steel materials meeting the standards and grades set forth in
the Construction Drawings.
2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. Provide Bolts, Connectors, and Anchors materials meeting the standards and
grades set forth in the Construction Drawings.
2.4 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5000-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Metal Fabrications
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease
edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain
separation or otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop
strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded
surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners or welds where possible.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a
manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish
hardware, screws, and similar items.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as
needed to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as
necessary to receive adjacent construction.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
2.7 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld
adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required
for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of
rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5000-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Metal Fabrications
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld
connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for
bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop
strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded
surface matches that of adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners
where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle
bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items
being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and
requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from
building structure.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the
same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching
up shop-painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5113-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Metal Ladders
SECTION 05 5133
METAL LADDERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum fixed ladders.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 7233 – Roof Hatches for ladder safety post attached to ladders.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Ladder design, and bracket layout.
b. Location of concealed blocking for attachment wall brackets.
c. Mounting details with brackets, fasteners and compression
spacers.
2. Verified field dimensions of floor to attic platform and attic platform to
roof heights.
3. PE stamp; signed and dated.
C. Engineer Certification: Document prepared, stamped, signed and dated by
Professional Engineer, registered to practice in state where Project is located,
certifying that ladder design submitted on shop drawings meets requirements of
Contract Documents, and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
E. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 5-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and manufacturing.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5113-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Metal Ladders
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain metal ladders through single source from same
manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of metal ladders required for
this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle metal ladders in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM FIXED LADDERS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Precision Ladders; FL Series, Aluminum Fixed Vertical
Ladder; www.precisionladders.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Aluminum standard-duty, fixed vertical ladders; custom fabricated;
fully-welded construction.
1. Use/Location:
a. Fixed Ladder (L-1) at Tennis Building (Building 3), Storage 303 for
attic platform access.
b. Fixed Ladder (L-2) at Tennis Building (Building 3) for roof hatch
access from attic platform.
2. Material and Finish: Aluminum; meeting ASTM B209 and B221, 6005-T5
alloy; mill finish.
3. Ladder Size: 20 in. wide, out-to-out of siderails by heights shown on
Drawings.
4. Pitch: 90-degrees.
5. Capacity: 1,500 lb. load rating.
6. Installation Method: Ladder wall brackets mechanically attached to
concealed blocking, and floor brackets attached to floors.
C. Components:
1. Siderail Stringers: 2-1/2 by 1-1/16 in. by 1/8 in. thick extruded aluminum
channel; with 1/8 in. thick molded polyurethane safety caps on top ends.
2. Treads: 2–1/4 by 3/4 in. by 1/4 in. thick, C-shaped extruded aluminum
profile with serrated top surface, at 12 in. on-center; welded to siderail
stringers.
3. Wall Brackets: 8–1/2 by 4-1/2 by 3 in. by 1/4 in. thick aluminum angle
with 9/16 in. diameter fastener hole; increase wall bracket length to
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5113-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Metal Ladders
match horizontal offset, if any, from inside face of attic platform opening
to face of ladder support wall.
4. Floor Brackets: 3 by 2 by 2–1/2 in. by 1/4 in. thick, aluminum angle with
3/8 in. diameter fastener hole.
D. Accessories: Recommended by metal ladder manufacturer for conditions of use
and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
2. Compression Spacers: 5/8 in. long aluminum tube spacer, installed
between wall bracket and concealed blocking to transfer loads to
supporting structure, and prevent damage to finished wall material.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of metal
ladders in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Locations of concealed blocking for attachment of wall brackets.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal ladders in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Install ladders plumb, level, centered on access opening above, and
securely attached.
2. Install floor bracket at each siderail stringer; shim or adjust brackets at
uneven floor conditions.
B. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Replace damaged products that cannot be restored to acceptable condition, as
directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5216-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Railings
SECTION 05 5216
ALUMINUM RAILINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum guardrails, railings, handrails, and gates.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 2000 – Finished Carpentry for wood railings at Pete’s Turn.
2. Section 09 9100 – Painting for shop-painted finish and on-site touch-up.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): www.ada.gov
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law.
C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org
1. ASCE/SEI 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
D. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
3. ASTM B429 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Structural Pipe and Tube.
4. ASTM E894 – Standard Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent Metal
Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.
5. ASTM E985 – Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing
Systems and Rails for Buildings.
E. American Welding Society (AWS): www.aws.org
1. D1.2 – Structural Welding Code – Aluminum.
F. National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metal Association (NOMMA):
www.nomma.org
1. NOMMA Guideline 1: Joint Finishes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5216-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Railings
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Design, and layout of railings and handrails, for each location.
b. Slopes of steps.
c. Handrail details with wall bracket anchorage, fastener types, and
sizes; fittings, connections, wall returns, transitions, and
terminations.
d. Railing details with post anchorage, fastener types, and sizes;
fittings, connections, corners, top and bottom rails, infill
ornamentation, returns, transitions, and terminations to match
existing railings.
e. Member profiles, dimensions, metal thicknesses, and weights.
f. Bare metal pretreatment.
2. Verified field dimensions:
a. Stair design with length, rise, and slope of each run, landings,
treads and risers.
b. Existing railing design, member profiles and sizes for matching
purposes.
c. Supporting construction for anchorage and attachment of railings
and handrails.
3. PE stamp; signed and dated; certifying compliance with design
requirements.
C. Samples:
1. Guardrail Section: Full height by 12 in. min. length, fabricated with
materials noted on approved submittals; for verification; showing:
a. Post, base flange, rails, and pickets.
b. Drink rail assembly with shelf, and support brackets.
c. Shop-painted finish.
d. Color and gloss.
e. Workmanship.
2. Handrail Section: 12 in. length; fabricated with materials noted on
approved submittals; for verification; showing:
a. Handrail, and wall bracket.
b. Shop-painted finish.
c. Color and gloss.
d. Workmanship.
3. Ornamentation Panel: Full-size; fabricated with materials noted on
approved submittals; for verification; showing:
a. Design.
b. Shop-painted finish.
c. Color and gloss.
d. Workmanship.
NOTE: Do not ship railing samples to Architects office; deliver to on-site
field office for review by Architect.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5216-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Railings
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain railing products, and accessories through single
source from same fabricator.
B. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Specialized in custom fabrication and
installation of railing work required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle railing products in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to avoid damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM RAILINGS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
products by one of the following:
1. Florida Outdoor Products; Custom Aluminum Railings;
www.floridaoutdoorproducts.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Custom aluminum railings, handrails, infill ornamentation, and
gates fabricated from standard aluminum shapes, plates, and bars in accordance
with ASTM E985; meeting ADA Standards or ANSI A117.1 as applicable to state
law.
1. Use/Location: Rooftop locations.
2. Design: Match existing.
3. Materials: Aluminum; meeting ASTM B209, ASTM B221, and ASTM
B429.
4. Finish: Shop-primed and painted in accordance with Section 09 9100.
5. Color: Match existing railing color, and gloss level.
C. Railing and Gate Components:
1. Framing Members: Standard aluminum shapes.
2. Gate Hardware: Fabricator’s standard; welded to gate and post members.
a. Hinges: Non-lift-off type.
b. Latch and Keeper: Positive locking; designed for padlock.
c. Double-Gate Drop-Rod: Composed of 2-aligned sleeves and L-
shaped latching drop-rod. Install 1-sleeve on latch side of closed
gate leaf, and 1-sleeve set with anchoring cement in cored hole in
terrace floor substrate.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5216-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Railings
3. Installation Method: Meeting ASTM E894.
D. Handrail Components:
1. Handrail: Standard aluminum tube.
2. Handrail Brackets:
a. Wall Brackets: Standard manufactured brackets.
b. Post Brackets: Custom; L-shaped, 3 by 2-1/4 in. (SLV) bent rod
brackets fabricated with 3/8 in. square aluminum bar; weld to
posts and handrail.
3. Handrail Fittings: As required for conditions of use and application.
4. Installation Method: Wall brackets fastened to concealed blocking in wall
substrate with screws and compression spacers, unless noted otherwise.
E. Design Requirements: Provide qualified professional engineer registered in state
where Project is located to perform engineering services, including:
1. Design of railing, handrail, and gate members, post anchorage, support
bracket attachment, and fasteners for required loads, and combination of
loads.
2. Certification that structural components of railing, handrail, and gate
design, as shown on shop-drawings, meet structural load requirements of
ASCE/SEI 7, Contract Documents, and authorities having jurisdiction;
evidenced by PE stamp, signed and dated.
F. Accessories: Recommended by railing manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Compression Spacers: 5/8 in. long aluminum tube spacer, installed
between wall bracket mounting plate and concealed blocking to transfer
loads to supporting structure, and prevent damage to finished wall
material.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Phillips flat-head screws, countersunk, of same metal
as items fastened, unless noted otherwise.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate and assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize on-
site reassembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use
connections that maintain structural integrity of joined units.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease
edges to radius of approximately 1/32 in., unless noted otherwise. Remove sharp
or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
D. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive screws, and similar items.
E. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain cross section of
member throughout bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise
deforming exposed surfaces of components.
F. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5216-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Railings
G. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to
supporting construction. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of transferring
loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting
construction.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
railings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Installation and location of concealed blocking for anchorage and
attachment of handrail wall brackets.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install railings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
2. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set
railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from
established lines and levels; without racking.
a. Set posts plumb within tolerance of 1/16 in. in 3 feet.
b. Set horizontal railing members level; and sloping members
parallel to steps, ramps and other building elements within
tolerance of 1/4 in. in 12 feet.
3. Adjust railings for proper alignment before anchoring.
4. Anchor railings in accordance with design requirements for rigid
installation and transferring loads to supporting substrates.
B. Welded Connections: Provide fully welded joints for shop-fabrication, on-site
reassembly, and installation.
1. Finish exposed welds to provide smooth, flush surfaces blended to match
contours of adjoining surfaces with no remaining evidence of welded
joints; meeting NOMMA Guideline 1.
2. Protect railing members and fittings during installation and reassembly
with wood blocks and padding.
C. Touchup Paint: Clean field welded connections, and abraded areas; touchup
damaged finishes in accordance with Section 09 9100.
D. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 05 5216-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Railings
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 1053-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
SECTION 06 1053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood blocking and nailers.
2. Plywood equipment backboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply
with requirements.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer
and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for
fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing
the classification marking is representative of the material tested.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,
securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading
agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any
rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded
by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber
under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or
less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 1053-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with ground.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not
use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated
material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members
in contact with masonry or concrete.
2. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply
with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a
flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.
1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or
less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity.
C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-
dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of
qualified testing agency.
E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Plywood equipment backboards.
2. Plywood sheathing on back, roof side of parapet walls.
3. Concealed blocking.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or
attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Furring.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and
the following species and grades:
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 1053-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2.5 PLYWOOD
A. Equipment Backboards: APA A-D, Interior Group 1 where exposed one side, 3/4 inch.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304
stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,
and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for
accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with
requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Install plywood by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring
equipment backboards.
C. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backboards with classification marking of testing
agency exposed to view.
D. Securely attach miscellaneous rough carpentry work to substrate.
3.2 PLYWOOD INSTALLATION
A. Install with face grain perpendicular to supports. Terminate panels over supports.
Stagger end joints of adjacent panels.
1. Allow 1/8 in. gap between end joints for expansion and contraction.
2. Attach panels with fasteners and at spacings recommended by panel
manufacturer.
B. Equipment backboards: Install in full height pieces, with tight butted edge joints. Sand
joints if required to obtain joints without offsets.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 1300-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Heavy Timber
SECTION 06 1300
HEAVY TIMBER
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Heavy timber products.
B. Related Sections:
2. Section 09 9100 – Painting for on-site painted finish.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org
1. ASCE/SEI 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Anchor bolt layouts.
b. Framing layouts.
c. Dimensions and profiles of each member.
d. Details of attachments, and fasteners.
2. Verified field dimensions for structural support.
3. PE stamp; signed, and dated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain heavy timber products through single source from
same fabricator.
B. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Specialized in custom fabrication and
installation of heavy timber work required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide fabricator’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 HEAVY TIMBER PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Whetstone Designs; custom designed heavy timber
products; www.whetstonedesigns.com .
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 1300-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Heavy Timber
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description:
1. Custom designed heavy timber members; as shown on Drawings,
including:
a. Brackets.
b. Rafter tails.
c. Solid lumber columns with chamfered edges.
d. Column wrap lumber with chamfered edges.
2. Material: Western Red Cedar, or cypress, unless noted otherwise.
3. Texture: Smooth, S4S for paint finish.
4. Finish: Shop-primed and painted as specified in Section 09 9100.
5. Color: As selected by Architect.
6. Installation Method: Structurally connected and attached as shown on
shop drawings.
C. Design Requirements: Provide qualified professional engineer registered in state
where Project is located to perform engineering services, including:
1. Design of heavy timber members, attachments to supporting structure,
and fasteners; for required loads, combination of loads, and wind speed
noted on Drawings.
2. Certification that structural components of heavy timber design, as
shown on shop-drawings, meet structural load requirements of
ASCE/SEI 7-10, Contract Documents, and authorities having jurisdiction;
evidenced by PE stamp, signed and dated.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of heavy
timber work in accordance with fabricator’s instructions, Contract Documents,
approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected, start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Installation of foundations and anchor bolts for mounting and attachment
of columns.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install heavy timber products in accordance with fabricator’s instructions
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Paint heavy timber members in accordance with Section 09 9100.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 1300-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Heavy Timber
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Replace damaged products that cannot be restored to acceptable condition, as
directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 1639-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Composite Wood Sheathing
SECTION 06 1639
COMPOSITE WOOD SHEATHING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Composite wood sheathing with integral water-resistive barrier (WRB).
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.ansi.org
1. ASTM D779 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Vapor
Resistance of Sheet Materials in Contact with Liquid Water by the Dry
Indicator Method.
2. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.
3. ASTM E2357 – Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier
Assemblies.
B. Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA): www.fgiaonline.org
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. AAMA 711 – Voluntary Specifications for Self-Adhering Flashing
Used for Installation of Exterior Wall Fenestration Products.
C. US Department of Commerce (DOC): www.nist.gov
1. Voluntary Product Standard DOC PS 2 – Performance Standard for
Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Technical data sheets.
2. Standard details applicable to this Project.
3. Building code evaluation reports.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Manufacturer’s Instructions, including:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
C. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 30-year limited commercial warranty against
defects in material and manufacturing.
D. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, approved submittals, or authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain sheathing, and accessories through single source from
same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of composite sheathing work
required for this Project.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 1639-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Composite Wood Sheathing
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm proper
installation.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle sheathing products in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install products that are
damaged or aged beyond shelf life.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPOSITE WOOD SHEATHING
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements.
1. Basis of design: Huber Engineered Woods, LLC; ZIP System Wall
Sheathing; www.huberwood.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Composite, sheathing panels composed of oriented-strand-board
(OSB), with factory-laminated integral water-resistive barrier (WRB) on exterior
face, and fastener location marks for 16 and 24 in. on-center spacing.
1. Use/Location: Exterior wall sheathing and WRB with sealed joints, and
flashing.
2. Panel Thickness: 7/16 in.
3. Panel Size: Nominal 4 ft. wide by 8, 9, or 10 ft. long.
4. Edge Profile: Square.
5. Weight: 1.94 lb./ft.2
6. Properties:
a. Water Vapor Transmission: (WRB only) 12 to 16 perms in
accordance with ASTM E96; considered permeable for greater
than 10 perms.
b. Assembly Air Leakage:
1) Infiltration: 0.0072 cfm/ft.2 maximum air leakage in
accordance with ASTM E2357.
2) Exfiltration: 0.0023 cfm/ft.2 maximum air leakage at
pressure differential of 1.57 lb./ft.2 in accordance with
ASTM E2357.
c. Exposure Time: Designed to resist weather exposure for 180 days.
7. Installation Method: Mechanically attached to stud framing.
C. Components:
1. Oriented Strand Board:
a. Exposure Durability Classification: Exposure 1; meeting DOC PS
2.
b. Panel Grade: 24/16, Structural 1, 7/16 Performance Category (4 ft.
by 8, 9, and 10 ft.); meeting DOC PS 2.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 1639-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Composite Wood Sheathing
2. Water-Resistive Barrier (WRB): Medium-density, phenolic-impregnated
polymer-modified sheet material meeting ASTM D779 Grade D; water-
resistive barrier with fastener location marks for 16 and 24 in. on-center
spacing.
D. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Flashing Tape: Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP System Seam and Flashing
Tape; pressure-sensitive, self-adhering, proprietary seam tape composed
of polyolefin film with acrylic adhesive; meeting AAMA 711. Use for
sealing panel joints, door and window frames, and other rectangular wall
penetrations.
2. Liquid Flashing: Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP System Liquid Flash;
gun-grade, silyl-terminated polyether (STPE) liquid flashing membrane
compatible with sheathing water-resistive barrier (WRB), and self-
adhering flashing tapes.
3. Flexible Flashing Tape: Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP System Stretch
Tape; pressure-sensitive, self-adhering, flexible flashing tape composed of
flexible acrylic foam backing with acrylic adhesive; meeting AAMA 711.
Use to stretch and form around rough-openings, transitions to other
materials, penetrations, curved, irregular, and other hard to seal areas for
continuous, single-piece flashing.
4. Fasteners: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
sheathing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Fastener length provides required penetration into wood stud framing.
2. Required spacing and alignment of framing members.
3. Metal straps, ties, or other connectors designed to resist wind uplift are
installed before sheathing installation begins.
4. Minimum 6 in. ground clearance between sheathing panels and finished
grade.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install sheathing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Install panels with water-resistive barrier to exterior (WRB). Stagger end
joints of adjacent panel runs.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 1639-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Composite Wood Sheathing
2. Provide 1/8 in. gap between OSB panel edges.
3. Fasten sheathing panels to stud framing members with approved
fasteners. Place fasteners 3/8 in. from panel edges.
4. Provide minimum 1/2 in. wide joint between sheathing panels and
abutting construction; install backer rod and sealant.
NOTE: Do not bridge building expansion joints; match joint width of
structural members.
B. Install joint and flashing tape in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
and approved submittals, after sheathing panels are fully fastened to wall
framing members.
1. Apply seam tape at panel seams, inside and outside corners, penetrations,
and facer defects or cracks to form continuous weathertight surface.
2. Center tape over seam within plus or minus 1/2 in. to provide adequate
coverage and reduce wrinkles in tape. Apply uniform pressure to tape
surface with rubber roller to provide secure bond.
3. Splice tape at vertical and horizontal seams by overlapping 3 in.
minimum; splice tape at T-joints by overlapping 1 in. minimum.
4. Install sill pan flashing at rough openings in accordance with AAMA 711.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until covered and protected by
subsequent construction.
B. Replace damaged sheathing.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2000-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Finish Carpentry
SECTION 06 2000
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood ceilings, railings, trim, mouldings, and miscellaneous items as
shown on Drawings.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 9100 – Painting for site-applied paint finish.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawings: Submit for finish carpentry. Indicate construction and
installation details, species and grades of materials, and finishes.
B. Samples: Indicate selected finishes on samples of species and grade material specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Applicable standards; comply with the following, as referenced herein:
1. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC).
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
3. APA The Engineered Wood Association (APA).
4. ASTM International (ASTM). 5. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA). 6. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification
Program," 2005 Edition, herein referred to as AWI Standards. Work shall
comply with applicable portions of AWI Standards.
7. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA).
8. U. S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and
Testing: a. Lumber: PS 20-10. b. Construction and Industrial Plywood: PS 1-95.
B. Current grading rules of the following industry associations apply to wood
products:
1. National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA).
2. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS).
3. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 4. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLB). 5. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
C. Grade marks: Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark.
1. Lumber: Grade stamp shall contain symbol of grading agency, mill
number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or
combination designation, rules under which graded where applicable,
and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.
2. Plywood: Appropriate grade trademark of the APA. Indicate type,
grade, class, identification index and inspection and testing agency mark.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2000-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Finish Carpentry
3. On components to be exposed to view, grade marks shall be located so as
to be concealed in finished work.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Do not deliver carpentry to project site until areas are ready for carpentry
installation.
B. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place materials indoors, protected from
weather.
C. Store materials a minimum of 6" above ground on framework or blocking, and cover with waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation and ventilation. Store in dry, conditioned space.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS:
A. Field measurements: Take field measurements to ascertain exact millwork sizes.
Indicate exact dimensions on shop drawings.
B. Do not install interior finish carpentry until spaces are enclosed, dry and capable of being heated. Maintain temperature between 55 degrees F. and 80 degrees F. for 72 hours before beginning installation and afterwards until Date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Moisture content: 10-15%. B. Surfacing: Surface four sides dry (S4S-dry), unless otherwise noted.
C. Dimensions: Indicated lumber dimensions are nominal. Comply with PS 20.
D. Grades for exposed and semi-exposed finish carpentry lumber and plywood are
based on AWI Standards. Grades for unexposed work are based on referenced grading rules. E. Drying: Kiln dried.
2.2 LUMBER:
A. Species and grades:
1. Unexposed framing and blocking: Match existing.
2. Exposed and semi-exposed trim: Match existing with paint finish. 2.3 FASTENERS: A. Provide bolts, nails, screws, toggle bolts and similar fasteners as indicated or
required to attach and secure work under this section.
B. Fasteners for trim shall be finishing nails for attachment to wood framing and
trim-head screws for attachment to metal framing.
C. Material and finish for fasteners in contact with non-pressure treated and fire-
retardant-treated components shall be G90 hot dip galvanized steel or Type 304 stainless steel, except nails shall be hot dip galvanized.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2000-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Finish Carpentry
D. Adhesives: 1. Glue:
a. Type: Aliphatic or phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by
manufacturer’s product data for general carpentry use.
b. Wood glue shall have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Multipurpose construction adhesive:
a. Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is recommended
for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. b. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.4 FABRICATION:
A. Custom Grade.
B. Fabricate finish carpentry in accord with approved shop drawings.
C. Shop-assemble for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. Items which cannot be manufactured in one piece shall have joints at logical breaking points and shall be so noted on shop
drawings.
D. Shop prepare and identify components for grain matching during site erection.
E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. F. Finger-jointed members will not be allowable for exposed, transparent finish
work.
G. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance
for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
H. Scribe, miter and accurately join members. I. Finish work shall be smooth, free from abrasion, tool marks, open joints or raised
grain on exposed surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP: A. Install work plumb, level, true and straight, without distortions. Shim using concealed shims.
B. Finish work shall be smooth, free from abrasion, tool marks, raised grain grade
markings or similar defects on exposed surfaces.
C. Cut work to fit unless specified to be shop-fabricated or shop-cut to exact size.
Where carpentry and millwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for
accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2000-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Finish Carpentry
D. Distribute defects allowed in the quality grade specified to the best overall
advantage when installing job-assembled work.
E. Install hardware in accord with manufacturer's instructions using anchor devices
furnished with hardware items.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM:
A. Install in single, unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than 10'-0". For
longer runs, use only one piece less than 10'-0" in straight runs with no piece
being less than 4'-0" in length. Stagger joints in adjacent members. Join ends with beveled butt joints, cope at returns and miter at corners. B. Attach and secure in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and
building movements.
C. Attachment: Blind-anchor where possible. Use trim-head screws or finishing
nails where exposed. Set exposed heads for filling. Secure work to framing or
blocking which is built in or attached to structural elements. 3.3 FIELD FINISH: A. Field finish: Field finish exterior finish carpentry in accord with requirements of
Painting section. Prior to finishing, sand using 120 to 180 grit abrasive on a
smooth sanding block, to remove scuff and handling marks, raised grain,
scratches and effects of moisture exposure.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Protect finished surfaces from work of other trades. B. Prior to Date of Substantial Completion, examine work for damages. Repair or
replace such damaged work to original condition.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2200-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Millwork
SECTION 06 2200
MILLWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Millwork cabinets, bars and other millwork items shown on ID Drawings.
2. Cabinet hardware.
3. Wood grounds, blocking, nailers, and furring.
4. Rough hardware and fastenings.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 12 3649 – Quartzite Countertops. 2. Section 12 3669 – Simulated Quartz Countertops.
1.2 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Quality standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute, “Architectural
Woodwork Standards” shall apply to all workmanship including materials and
installation, for architectural woodwork and by reference are made a part of this
specification. All work shall conform to “Premium” grade requirements of the
AWI “Architectural Woodwork Standards”, unless otherwise modified herein. B. Employ only tradesmen experienced in the fabrication and installation of architectural woodwork.
C. Woodworking firm must be accredited by the AWI Quality Certification
Program (QCP).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit shop drawings of all woodwork specified and indicated on the
drawings. Shop drawings shall indicate room plans and elevations at ¾” equals 1’-0” scale and typical construction details at 3” equals 1’-0” scale. Shop drawings shall indicate all materials, thicknesses and finishes. 2. Shop drawings shall show all finishes hardware, anchors, fastenings and
accessories.
3. Shop drawings shall show all jointing, joint treatment and butt jointing in
veneers and plastic laminate.
4. Shop drawings for cabinet work must show centerline height and
horizontal location of all required internal wall blocking. 5. Where architectural woodwork deviates from AWI standards noted herein, shop drawings must identify these deviations.
B. Samples: Submit samples of each of the following items:
1. Plastic laminate, twelve (12) inches square, including a section of outside
corner.
2. Each cabinet hardware item.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The work of this Section shall be provided by a firm having a minimum of 5-
years’ experience on projects of similar size and quality to that specified and
shown.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2200-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Millwork
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with other appropriate Sections of the specifications to insure proper scheduling for fabrication and installation of the
work specified herein.
B. Coordinate with partition and finish trades to insure that proper provisions are
made for the installation of the work specified herein.
C. Verify all dimensions in the field prior to fabrication of millwork to assure
proper fit.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. All materials and work of this Section shall be protected from damage, from time
of shipment from shop to final acceptance of work. Cover, ventilate, and protect
work of this Section from damage caused by weather, moisture, heat, staining, dirt, abrasions, any other causes which may adversely affect appearance or use, or which may cause deterioration of finish, warping, distortion, twisting, opening of joints and seams, delamination, and loosening of work.
B. Keep millwork under cover both in transit and at the premises. Do not deliver
millwork before it is required for installation. Protect such work to avoid damage
in transit, during erection and after erection until acceptance of the building; use
methods to provide proper protection. Remove protection when directed by the
Architect.
C. Deliver millwork in a dry stable condition; protect same against injury and
dampness. Do not store or install millwork until wet work is dry.
D. Damaged or defective items of work of this Section are subject to rejection and replacement with new by Contractor, at no cost to Owner.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Humidity Controls: The ambient relative humidity at the site, including both the
storage and the installation areas, shall be maintained between 25% and 55%
prior to delivery and through installation period.
B. Examination of Substrate and Conditions: The installer must examine the
substrate and the conditions under which the work of this Section is to be
performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do
not proceed with work under this Section until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
C. Any wet work shall be fully dry.
D. Millwork shall be allowed to come to equilibrium on site for 7 days prior to
installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Wood Moisture Content: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber with an average
moisture content range of six (6) to eleven (11) percent for interior work.
B. Measurements: Before proceeding with woodwork required to be fitted to other
construction, obtain field measurements and verify all dimensions of shop drawing details as required for accurate fit.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2200-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Millwork
C. Machine and sand woodwork to comply with requirements of Standards for
specified grade.
D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles and details shown. Rout or groove
back of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members except plywood
or veneered members.
E. Miter joints by joining, splining and gluing to comply with requirements of the
specified grade.
F. Inspect each piece of lumber and plywood or each unit of woodwork after
drying; do not use twisted, warped, bowed or otherwise damaged or defective
wood.
2.2 GENERAL – MATERIALS
A. Grounds, Blocking, Nailers, and Furring: Southern Pine, Douglas Fir or Sitka Spruce, grade to suit particular purpose and to be straight, square edged, straight
grained, surfaced four sides (S4S), and which will retain nails and screws
without splitting. Provide fire retardant treatment.
B. Lumber: AWI Section 3, with the following requirements:
1. Hardwood for Opaque Finish: Any hardwood which, when finished, will
not show any grain, imperfection or other surface defects when used with the opaque finish specified.
C. Plywood: AWI Section 4:
2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATE
A. Face Sheets: NEMA Publication LD3, Grade GP50, Type I, 0.05” thick, as
manufactured by Formica, Nevamar, Wilson-Art. Color, pattern and finish as
selected by the Architect.
B. Backing Sheets: Non-decorative, high-pressure plastic laminate, NEMA LD3,
Grade BK20, 0.02” thick.
C. Edges: Finish with plastic laminate to match face and applied before face sheets
are applied, unless otherwise shown or specified.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Fasteners
1. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111, type, size, material and finish as required for
the condition of use.
2. Nails: FS FF-N-105, type, size, material and finish as required for the
condition of use. 3. Anchors: Type, size, material and finish as required for the condition of use.
B. Adhesives
1. For Laminating Plastic Laminate Surfaces: Urea resin, Type II, as
recommended by fabricator.
2. For All Other Uses: Polyvinyl acetate resin emulsion or other type as
recommended by the fabricator.
2.5 CABINETS A. General 1. Fabricate millwork to the “Premium Grade” standards of the AWI, Section 10.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2200-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Millwork
2. Face construction of cabinets shall be “Flush Overlay”.
3. Provide ¾” thick doors, drawer fronts and fixed panels (including thickness of plastic) except where required to be thicker by Standards;
and provide flush units.
4. Provide dust panels of ¼” thick plywood or tempered hardboard above
compartments and drawers, except where located directly below
countertops.
5. Exposed Edges: Hardwood matching exposed panel surfaces. Ease
exposed edges.
B. Plastic Laminate 1. Plastic Laminate for Horizontal Surfaces: 0.05” thick, general purpose type (high pressure). 2. Plastic Laminate for External Vertical Surfaces: 0.028” thick, general
purpose type (high pressure).
3. Plastic Laminate for Cabinet Linings: 0.020” thick, cabinet liner (high
pressure).
4. Plastic Laminate for Concealed Panel Backing: 0.020” thick, backer type
(high pressure). 5. Exposed Edges: Plastic laminate matching exposed panel surfaces. Ease exposed edge of overlap sheet. 6. Plastic Laminate Colors and Patterns: As selected by the Architect from
manufacturer’s standard satin finish products. Acceptable
Manufacturers: Wilson-Art, Nevamar, Formica.
C. Shop Assembly: All work shall be shop assembled. Work that is too large for
entrance into the use area shall be fabricated in attachable sections with
provisions for reconnection in the using space.
D. Material Thicknesses: See drawings for general materials thicknesses. Minimum
thickness of solid lumber for web frames, trim, bases, etc., shall be ¾”. Minimum thickness of plywood and particleboard shall be ¾”.
E. Sizes: See drawings for woodwork sizes required. The manufacturer shall check
field dimensions and verify all openings and actual field conditions prior to
fabrication of work.
F. Manufacturer is responsible for rigidity and structural stability.
2.6 CABINET HARDWARE A. Provide the following items, or their approved equal, as required: 1. Hinges: Hafele concealed, self-closing hinges. 2. Silencers: On doors and drawers.
3. Pulls: Selected by design professional.
4. Locks: Directed by design professional.
5. Drawer Slides: Accuride, Model 7434, full extension, 100 lb. capacity.
6. Shelf Supports: Pin and grommet system equal to No. 282.01.701 pin and
282.50.704 grommet made by Hafele. 7. Finish: Selected by design professional.
2.7 FABRICATION – GENERAL
A. Provide lumber framing for millwork, complete with all bracing and fastening
devices as required for a rigid installation, and as required to sustain the
imposed loads.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2200-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Millwork
B. Do all fabrication from field measurement with provision for scribing as required
to meet built-in conditions.
C. Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other trades.
D. Fabricate units in largest practicable sections. Assemble in the shop for trial fit,
disassemble for shipment and reassemble with concealed fasteners.
E. Maintain relative humidity and temperature during fabrication, storage and
finishing operations matching that of the areas of installation.
F. Details indicate the required type and quality of construction. Modifications to
conform to manufacturer’s standards will be considered providing they comply
with the Contract Documents, maintain the profiles shown and subject to acceptance by the Architect.
G. Reinforcing shown in minimum. Provide additional reinforcing as required to
ensure a rigid assembly. Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents, tool marks,
warpage, buckle, glue and open joints, or other defects affecting serviceability or
appearance. Accurately fit all joints, corners and miters. Conceal all fasteners.
Make threaded connections up tight so that treads are entirely concealed.
H. Comply with AWI, Premium Grade standards for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, back priming and similar preparations for the finishing of millwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
2.8 FABRICATION – SPECIFIC ITEMS
A. Millwork:
1. Include all preparations for mechanical, electrical, telephone and
plumbing work required.
2. Provide cabinet hardware as shown.
3. Provide dust panels in body webs and between drawer units.
4. Provide drawers with slides as specified. Drawers shall not rest on web body frames.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions where architectural woodwork is to be
installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Wall anchorage and general installation procedures for cabinetry work shall conform to AWI Section 10.
B. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as
required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8” in 8’-0” for plumb
and level (including countertops), and with a 1/16” maximum offset in flush
adjoining surfaces, 1/8” maximum offset in revealed adjoining surfaces.
C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair
damaged finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to
substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2200-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Millwork
3.3 GROUNDS, BLOCKING, NAILERS AND FURRING
A. Provide all wood grounds, blocking, nailers, furring and the like for work of this Section, where shown and where required, dressed to size indicated or required
to suit the condition. Install grounds, blocking, nailers, and furring, rigidly, in
proper alignment, trued with a long straight edge.
3.4 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Provide all rough hardware, such as nails, screws, bolts, anchors, hangers, clips
and similar items. Hardware shall be of the proper size and kind to adequately
secure the work together and in place, in a rigid and substantial manner. Use
galvanized hardware at exterior walls and at other locations where subject to moisture or where water will be present.
B. Secure wood to concrete and to solid masonry with countersunk bolts in
expansion sleeves or other approved manner, to steel with countersunk bolts, to
hollow masonry and to drywall with heavy duty countersunk toggle bolts.
Space fastenings not more than sixteen (16) inches apart. Hardened cut nails,
power-driven fastenings, or other suitable devices may be used where approved
by Architect.
C. Connections and fastenings shall be made in such manner as will compensate for swelling and shrinkage and shall permit the work to remain permanently in place without any splitting or opening of joints.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CABINET FINISH HARDWARE
A. All items of finish hardware furnished under this Section shall be carefully fitted
and secured in place as part of the work of this Section. Locations and
positioning of hardware shall be subject to the Architect’s approval. Care shall
be taken not to mar or damage hardware, or other work. Install doors plumb
and true. Hardware shall be fitted to assure operation without forcing.
B. After preliminary fitting of hardware, the Contractor shall remove trim for
finishing work; after which he shall reinstall the hardware in a permanent manner.
C. Upon completion of the work, before final acceptance of the building by the
Owner, the Contractor shall, in the presence of the Architect, show that all
hardware is in satisfactory working order; fit all keys in their respective locks
and, upon acceptance of the work, shall tag and deliver all keys to the Architect
and Owner.
D. When directed by the Owner, at any time during the first year after the
completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall return to the building and adjust and refit the work and hardware, and leave such items in satisfactory working
order.
3.6 MILLWORK
A. General:
1. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the Quality Standards of the
Architectural Woodwork Institute specified herein and to the drawings. 2. Millwork shall be performed by experienced millwork company, having craftsmen skilled in their trade.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2200-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Millwork
3. Fabricate all millwork completely in the shop, in complete and/or as
large units as practical, leaving only fitting, assembly, installation and a minimum of fabrication and finishing to be done at the building.
Assembled work shall be rigidly secured and permanently fastened
together with concealed fasteners.
4. Allow Architect every facility for inspection of work at shop or mill at
such times as the Architect may select.
5. As far as practicable, use concealed fastenings for joining and assembling
the work. Where this is impossible, the means of securing shall be placed
in inconspicuous places and methods of joining and assembling submitted for Architect’s approval prior to fabrication. 6. Mill all finish wood accurately to detail, with clean cut moldings, profiles and lines, machined, sanded smooth, housed, jointed, blocked, put
together in the best manner, with provision for swelling and shrinkage,
and to assure the work remaining in place without warping, splitting or
opening of joints.
7. Cut trim to dimensions and profiles shown, from solid stock.
8. Make all trim and the like in single lengths wherever possible; joints mitered, glued and splined. Continuous members shall have tight flush joints, doweled or splined and glued. 9. Make all joints hairline tight, fitted accurately and joined with hardwood
splines or dowels, glued together, or by other method approved by
Architect. Use screws, not nails, for fastenings.
10. Gluing shall, where practicable, shall be by the hot plate press method
and glued surfaces shall be in close contact throughout. Glue stains on
finished work will not be permitted. 11. Work which adjoins drywall, concrete, or other finish shall be fitted and scribed in a careful manner and ample allowance shall be given for cutting and scribing.
12. Erect work true to lines, levels and dimensions, square, aligned and
plumb, securely and rigidly fastened in place.
B. Millwork: Provide all items of millwork indicated on drawings and as herein
specified.
1. Tops, sides, backs, bottoms, dividers, shelves, fronts, doors and drawer fronts shall be of plywood core, with the specified plastic laminate as indicated on drawings. 2. Drawer sides and backs shall be ½” thick solid clear selected white birch,
suitable for clear finish. Drawer bottom shall be 3/8” thick plywood with
clear selected white birch veneers, suitable for clear finish.
3. Cabinet doors and drawers shall be flush mounted.
4. Adjustable shelves in cabinets shall have grommets spaced 2” o.c.
5. Fixed shelves shall be dadoed into side supports and glued. 6. Shelves shall be ¾” thick for spans up to 30”; for spans in excess of 30” to 48” shelves shall be 1” thick. 7. All millwork cabinets shall have closed top, sides, bottom, and back.
Cabinets to fit accurately into indicated locations; scribe moldings
permitted only where indicated.
8. Millwork cabinet interiors and shelves, indicated on drawings to have
plastic laminate, shall have plastic laminate shop applied to ¾” thick core,
with plastic laminate backing sheet on underside or back of shelves.
Plastic laminate shall be pressure laminated to core at external corners.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 2200-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Millwork
3.7 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION
A. Clean Up: At regular intervals during the course of the work, all debris and excess material shall be cleaned up and removed from the site. Upon completion
of installation, clean all spaces of debris caused by woodwork installation.
B. Projection: Protect all millwork from marring, defacement or other damage until
final completion and acceptance of the project by the Owner. Repair or replace
all defective units prior to final inspection as directed by the Architect. Any units
that cannot be satisfactorily repaired in the opinion of the Architect shall be
replaced with new units of same original design, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 6500-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Plastic Simulated Wood Trim
SECTION 06 6500
PLASTIC SIMULATED WOOD TRIM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic simulated wood trim.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 4649 – Fiber-Cement Siding for mockup including plastic
simulated wood trim specified in this section.
2. Section 09 9100 – Painting for on-site painted finish.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
2. ASTM D570 – Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
3. ASTM D792 – Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific gravity
(Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement.
4. ASTM D3679 – Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Siding.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Building code evaluation reports.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Samples:
1. Plastic Trim: 12 in. lengths of each profile type.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions, including:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
D. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited lifetime warranty against defects in
materials and manufacturing.
E. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain plastic trim, and accessories through single source from same
manufacturer, or other manufacturers acceptable to plastic trim manufacturer;
subject to Architect’s review, and compliance with specified requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of plastic trim work required
for this Project.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 6500-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Plastic Simulated Wood Trim
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockups: See Section 07 4649 – Fiber-Cement Siding for mockup including
plastic trim.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle plastic trim products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install products that are
damaged, or aged beyond shelf life.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC SIMULATED WOOD TRIM
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable] products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Azek Trim and Moulding; www.azekexteriors.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Trim boards composed of high-density polyurethane; meeting
ASTM D3679.
1. Use/Location: Exterior trim, as shown on Drawings.
2. Texture: Smooth, unless noted otherwise.
3. Finish: Painted on-site in accordance with Section 09 9100.
4. Color: Match fiber-cement siding, unless noted otherwise.
5. Properties:
a. Density: 34.34 lb./ft.3 in accordance with ASTM D792.
b. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent by weight in accordance with
ASTM D570.
c. Fire Resistance: Not fire rated; verify use with authorities having
jurisdiction.
6. Installation Method: Mechanically attached to solid wood sheathing,
framing, or blocking, with trim screws.
C. Trim: Boards: Nominal 8/4.
1. Actual Thickness: 1-1/2 in.
2. Length: 20 ft.
3. Widths: 3-1/2, 5-1/2, 7-1/4, 9-1/4, and 11-1/4 in.; as shown on Drawings.
4. Weight: 4.87 lb./ft.2
D. Accessories: Recommended by plastic trim manufacturer for conditions of use
and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Contact Adhesive: Azek Cellular PVC Cement. Use to connect end-to-
end, T-joints, and corner joints.
2. Biscuits: Azek Plastic Joining Biscuits. Use with PVC cement to connect
end-to-end, T-joints, and corner joints.
3. Fasteners: No. 8 trim head, stainless steel screws.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 6500-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Plastic Simulated Wood Trim
4. Filler: Compatible, non-shrink, exterior spackling compound. Use for
filling and finishing fastener holes.
5. Joint Sealants: 1-part, moisture-curing, elastomeric, polyurethane sealant;
meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35.
a. Azek Sealant.
b. Master Builders; MasterSeal NP 1.
c. Sika; Sikaflex – 1A.
d. Tremco: Vulkem 116.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of plastic
trim in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Installation of continuous 2-by wood backing for support and attachment
of plastic trim boards.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic trim boards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Fasten trim boards to 2-by wood studs, or blocking with 1-1/2 in. min.
fastener penetration into solid wood.
2. Place fasteners 3/4 in. min. to 2 in. max. from side edges of trim boards, 1
in. min. from ends, and 16 in. max. on-center spacing.
NOTE: Corner boards are not used on this Project.
3. Connect end-to-end, T-joints, and corner joints with plastic joining
biscuits and PVC cement.
4. Attach fascia boards directly to continuous 2-by wood sub-fascia backing.
5. Shim trim boards for flush alignment.
B. Installation Tolerances:
1. Between Trim Boards and Adjoining Materials: 1/4 in.
2. Between Trim Boards And Siding: 1/8 to 1/4 in.
C. Install joint sealant between plastic trim, fiber-cement siding, and adjoining
materials, except drip edges.
NOTE: Do not install joint sealant at horizontal drip edges to allow drainage
from behind siding.
D. Apply on-site paint finish to plastic trim in accordance with Section 09 9100.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 6500-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Plastic Simulated Wood Trim
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 6516-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Plastic Simulated Wood Column Covers
SECTION 06 6516
PLASTIC SIMULATED WOOD COLUMN COVERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cellular PVC column covers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 1053 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry for 2-by wood framing
for attachment of column covers.
2. Section 09 9100 – Painting for on-site paint finish.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. UL (UL): www.ul.com
1. ANSI/UL 94 – Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for
Parts in Devices and Appliances.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Color charts for joint sealants.
3. Technical data sheets.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Structural columns, and wood blocking for column cover
attachment.
b. Column cover components, joints, and trim; fastener locations,
spacing, and finish treatment.
c. Details at adjoining materials, and special conditions.
2. Verified field dimensions for structural column sizes; installation heights,
and clearances.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
D. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 25-year limited warranty against defects in
materials, manufacturing, and workmanship of cellular PVC products.
E. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 6516-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Plastic Simulated Wood Column Covers
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain cellular PVC column covers, and accessories through
single source from same manufacturer, or from other manufacturers acceptable
to column cover manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of cellular PVC column covers
required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle cellular PVC products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE COLUMN COVERS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Chatsworth; Advanced Cellular Vinyl Columns;
www.columns.com
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Cellular PVC units; fabricate column covers in halves to fit around
structural columns.
1. Design: Match existing square column shafts, capitals and bases.
2. Shell Thickness: 5/8 in.
3. Size: As shown on Drawings.
4. Finish: Smooth.
5. Properties:
a. Vertical Burn Test: Passed; in accordance with ANSI/UL 94.
6. Installation Method: Screw attached to concealed 2-by wood framing
members.
C. Accessories: Recommended by column cover manufacturer for conditions of use
and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant screws.
2. Joint Sealants: 1-part, moisture-curing, elastomeric, paintable,
polyurethane sealant; meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35.
a. Master Builders; MasterSeal NP 1.
b. Sika; Sikaflex – 1A.
c. Tremco: Vulkem 116.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 6516-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Plastic Simulated Wood Column Covers
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
cellular PVC column covers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Continuous 2-by wood framing members located behind vertical joints of
column halves for required attachment, and joint sealant back-up.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cellular PVC column covers in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended manufacturer.
C. Apply on-site paint finish as specified in Section 09 9100.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 8316-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling
SECTION 06 8316
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic wall panels.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board for glass mat gypsum board substrate
behind FRP wall panels.
2. Section 10 2613 – Corner Guards for protection of FRP outside corners.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM D638 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
2. ASTM D790 – Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of
Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics.
3. ASTM D2583 – Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid
Plastics.
4. ASTM D5319 – Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced
Polyester Wall and Ceiling Panels.
5. ASTM D5420 – Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid
Plastic Specimen (Gardner Impact).
6. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Color charts.
3. Technical data sheets.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Panel and joint layouts; fully dimensioned.
b. Details at panel joints, bottom edges at wall base, corners,
terminations, expansion gaps, and special conditions.
c. Trim and installation accessories.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with interior
elevations, and construction details shown on Drawings.
3. Verified field dimensions for panel, and joint layouts.
C. Samples:
1. Colors: 3 by 3 in. set of available colors, textures, and finishes prepared
with specified FRP material; for initial selection.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 8316-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling
2. FRP: 12 by 12 in. panels of each color, texture, finish combination shown
on Drawings, or selected by design professional; for verification.
3. PVC Trim: 12 in. pieces of each profile; match panel color.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
4. Maintenance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain FRP wall panels, and accessories through single
source from same manufacturer, or from other manufacturers acceptable to FRP
wall panel manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of FRP wall panel work
required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockup:
1. At locations directed by design professional; install minimum 25 ft.2 area
for each type of FRP wall panels using materials noted on approved
submittals to show:
a. Substrate preparation.
b. Installation method.
c. Panel color, texture, and finish.
d. Details at panel joints, bottom edge at floor base, corners,
terminations; expansion, and special conditions.
e. Trim details.
f. Workmanship.
g. Aesthetic effects.
2. Prepare mockup for design professional’s approval, after receipt of
approved submittals, and 3-weeks before start of installation. Prepare
additional mockups, if required by design professional, until approved.
3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockup, unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by design professional.
4. Maintain approved mockup during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Approved mockup may remain as part of finished
installation.
E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting after receipt of approved
submittals, installation of mockup, and 2-weeks before start of installation to
review FRP wall panel requirements.
1. Attendance: Owner’s representative, Contractor, FRP foreman,
manufacturer’s technical representative, design professional; and others
installing work interfaced with FRP installation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 8316-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling
a. Confirm attendance of FRP foreman, manufacturer’s technical
representative, and design professional before scheduling
meeting.
b. Notify attendees 7-days before scheduled meeting date and time.
c. Submit meeting report to design professional, and copy attendees
within 3-days after meeting.
2. Agenda:
a. Contract Documents, and submittal requirements.
b. Manufacturer’s installation instructions, and recommendations.
c. Substrate preparation.
d. Interface, and coordination with other work.
e. Availability of materials.
f. Review samples, and mockups.
g. Observe installation areas, and working conditions.
h. Schedule.
i. Environmental conditions.
j. Other items concerning successful completion of work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle FRP panel products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install products that are
damaged, or aged beyond shelf life.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install FRP materials until building is enclosed with HVAC and
lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner occupancy; wet work
completed, and residual moisture dissipated. 1. Provide installation temperatures between 60 and 75 degrees F, and relative humidity between 35 and 55 percent. Do not install at temperatures below 60 degrees F.
2. Maintain constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F in installation
areas for minimum of 48 hours before, during, and 48 hours after
installation.
3. Provide temporary ventilation to remove fumes during application of
adhesive.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC WALL PANELS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Crane Composites; Glasbord; www.cranecomposites.com
2. Nudo Products; FiberLite FRP; www.nudo.com
3. Marlite; Standard FRP; www.marlite.com
4. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Fiberglass reinforced plastic wall panels; meeting ASTM D5319.
1. Thickness: 0.075 in.
2. Panel Width: 4 ft.
4. Panel Length: 8, 9, 10, and 12 ft; as required to provide full height vertical installation without horizontal seams.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 8316-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling
5. Finish: As shown on Drawings, or selected by design professional. 6. Color: As shown on Drawings, or selected by design professional.
7. Properties:
a. Tensile Strength: 7,000 lb./in.2; in accordance with ASTM D638.
b. Flexural Strength: 14,000 lb./in.2; in accordance with ASTM D790.
c. Barcol Hardness: 45; in accordance with ASTM D2583.
d. Impact Strength: 4.0 in.-lb.; in accordance with ASTM D5420.
e. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class C; flame spread 200; smoke
developed 450; in accordance with ASTM E84.
8. Installation Method: a. Wall Panels: Fully adhered to substrate. b. Trim: Adhered to wall panels with sealant.
C. Accessories: Recommended by FRP panel manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Wall Adhesive: Crane Composites, Advanced Polymer Adhesive; 100
percent solids, contact adhesive, waterproof, mold and mildew resistant;
tan. Use for adhering wall panels to glass mat gypsum board substrate.
2. Trim: Crane Composites, Kemlite Moldings; PVC, 1-piece profiles;
including, division bar, corners, and cap; match panel color and finish.
3. Seam Adhesive: Crane Composites, Polyurethane Seam Sealant; 100
percent solids, 2-part, urethane sealant; standard white. Use to bond trim
to wall panels.
4. Seam Sealant: Color Rite; Color Sil; 100% RTV Silicone Sealant, 1-part,
acetoxy silicone caulk; color to match panels; www.colorrite.com. Use to
seal exposed joints including: trim to panels, trim to adjoining materials,
and panels to penetrations.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of FRP
wall panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Substrate joints filled, taped, and flush.
2. Maximum wall plane variation of 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
3. Maximum wall stud deflection of L/360.
4. Wall corners plumb and straight, and substrate fasteners countersunk.
5. Installation of items located behind, or through wall panels, including
backing plates for surface mounted items, blocking, rough-openings for
electrical device boxes, door frames, and other built-in items.
6. Environmental conditions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 8316-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates to receive FRP wall panels in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
1. Remove wallpaper, and vinyl wall covering.
2. Remove high spots, and fill low spots to provide flat, uniform wall
surface. Fill joints and cracks flush and smooth.
3. Prime, or seal painted walls, and other substrates.
4. Clean substrates to remove dust, dirt, debris, moisture, oil and other
substances detrimental to adhesive bond.
B. Acclimate FRP materials by removing packaging, and placing in installation
areas for 24-hours min. before start of installation.
C. Layout panels before installation. Locate joints symmetrically on each wall, as
shown on approved shop drawings, to provide equal width panels at ends of
walls with minimum width of 12 in.
1. Mark plumb lines on substrates at trim locations for accurate placement. 2. Locate trim to allow 1/8 in. expansion gap at each panel edge.
D. Protect other construction from damage by wall panel work.
3.3 FRP PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install FRP wall panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Install wall panels vertically in full height sections; plumb, level, square, and
aligned with adjoining panels. Coordinate bottom edge dimension above floor
with resinous flooring base detail.
1. Provide 1/8 in. panel expansion space at panel joints, edges, and corners,
concealed by trim profiles.
2. Surface Mounted Items: Install panels before installing surface mounted
items. Pre-drill 1/8 in. oversized holes in panels for surface mounted item
fasteners.
3. Penetrating Items: Provide uniform 1/8 in. space between panel cut-outs
and wall penetrations. Fill space with seam sealant.
4. Field fabricate, cut, and drill panels with clean, straight, square edges,
and no evidence of damage.
C. Install PVC trim at panel joints, exposed edges, and corners.
1. Adhere trim to substrate with seam adhesive.
2. Adhere back face of panel to trim leg with seam adhesive, but do not allow adhesive to enter panel expansion space
3. Install 1/4 in. joint between edge trim and adjoining materials, and seal
with seam sealant; match panel color.
4. Seal other exposed joints with seam sealant to provide watertight
installation; match panel color.
D. Remove excess sealant and smears as each panel is installed.
E. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 06 8316-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2100-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermal Insulation
SECTION 07 2100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fiberglass batt insulation, and PVC baffles.
2. Mineral wool batt insulation.
3. Polystyrene board insulation.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C578 – Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene
Thermal Insulation.
2. ASTM C665 – Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
3. ASTM C1104 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Vapor
Sorption of Unfaced Mineral Fiber Insulation.
4. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
5. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Technical data sheets.
2. Building code evaluation reports.
B. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Fiberglass Products: Obtain fiberglass insulations through single source
from same manufacturer.
2. Mineral Wool Products: Obtain mineral wool insulations through single
source from same manufacturer.
3. Polystyrene Products: Obtain polystyrene insulations through single
source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of insulation required for this
Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2100-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermal Insulation
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle thermal insulation products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Protect insulation materials from physical damage, and from
deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other causes.
2. Store inside in dry location.
B. Foam-Plastic Insulations:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except as necessary for installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic
insulations to Project site until just before installation.
3. Expedite installation and concealment of foam-plastic insulation in each
area of construction.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Owens Corning; EcoTouch PINK Fiberglas Insulation;
www.owenscorning.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Unfaced, inorganic, non-combustible, formaldehyde-free, fiberglass
batts; meeting ASTM C665, Type I.
1. Applications: Match width to space between framing members.
a. Wall Insulation: R-21
b. Ceiling Insulation: R-49
2. Properties:
a. Thermal Resistance: R- 3.5 for 1 in. thickness at 75 degrees F.
b. Water Vapor Absorption: Less than 5 percent by volume; in
accordance with ASTM C1104.
c. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 25, smoke
developed 50; in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Installation Method:
a. Walls: Friction-fit between framing members.
b. Ceilings: As required.
C. Insulation Baffles: Brentwood Industries; AccuVent Cathedral Ceiling Starter Strips and Extensions; www.brentwoodindustries.com . 1. Material: Recycled, flame-retardant PVC. 2. Width: Match baffle width to space between roof framing members.
3. Installation method: Mechanically attach baffle starter strips from top of
exterior walls between roof framing members, and continue with
extensions attached to bottom of plywood deck up to ridge vents or other
ventilated high-points of roof.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2100-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermal Insulation
2.2 MINERAL WOOL BATT INSULATION
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Owens Corning; Thermafiber SAFB FF Formaldehyde-
Free Mineral Wool Insulation; www.owenscorning.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Unfaced, inorganic, non-combustible, formaldehyde-free, high-fiber
mineral wool, batt insulation; meeting ASTM C665, Type I.
1. Application: Match R-value, size, and thickness to conditions of use and
application, or as noted on Drawings.
a. Sound Attenuation: As required.
b. Fire Protection: As required.
c. Thermal Insulation: As required.
2. Properties:
a. Density: 2.5 lb./ft.3
b. Thermal Resistance: R-3.94 for 1 in. thickness at 75 degrees F.
c. Water Vapor Absorption: Less than 1 percent by volume; in
accordance with ASTM C1104.
d. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 0; smoke
developed 0; in accordance with ASTM E84.
e. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 1.125 for 3-1/2 in. thickness.
3. Installation Methods:
a. Sound Attenuation: As required.
c. Fire Protection: As required.
d. Thermal Insulation: As required.
2.3 POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Owens Corning; Foamular 250 Extruded Polystyrene
(XPS) Rigid Foam Insulation; www.owenscorning.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Extruded polystyrene, closed cell, moisture-resistant, rigid foam
insulation boards; meeting ASTM C578, Type IV.
1. Application:
a. Continuous Foundation Wall Insulation: R-10; 24 by 96 by 2 in.
thick.
2. Properties:
a. Compressive Strength: 25 lb./in.2
b. Thermal Resistance: R-5.0 for 1 in. thickness at 75 degrees F.
c. Water Vapor Transmission: 1.15 perms for 1 in. thickness in
accordance with ASTM E96; considered semi-impermeable for 1 to
10 perms.
d. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 10; smoke
developed 175; in accordance with ASTM E84.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2100-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermal Insulation
3. Installation Method: Loose laid vertical against interior side of foundation
wall, and horizontal against bottom of floor slab.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Install thermal insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Extend insulation to cover entire area to receive insulation. Provide tight fit
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that
interfere with placement.
C. Apply insulation in single layer unless multiple layers are shown or required to
make up total thickness, or provide specified R-value.
D. Do not install more insulation in exterior walls, than can be fully covered and
protected by permanent construction by end of work day.
3.3 BATT INSTALLATION
A. Install batts in cavities formed by framing members with proper widths and
lengths to fully fill cavity areas with tight fitting batts.
B. Place batts in cavities formed by framing members to produce friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
C. Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces to prevent gaps in
insulation coverage.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage until covered and protected by
permanent construction.
B. Provide temporary covers or enclosures where insulation is subject to damage, or
exposure to harmful conditions; and cannot be covered and protected by
permanent construction immediately after installation.
C. Replace damaged insulation, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2119-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Foamed-In-Place Insulation
SECTION 07 2119
FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Open-cell spray foam insulation.
2. Intumescent coating.
3. Latex vapor retarder.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board for prescriptive use of 5/8 in. regular
gypsum board for required 15 minute thermal barrier over spray foam
insulation.
2. Section 09 9100 – Painting for prescriptive use of painted finish including
1 coat latex primer plus 2 coats latex paint applied on interior gypsum
board surfaces of exterior walls or roof joists for required latex vapor
retarder.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C411 – Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of
High- Temperature Thermal Insulation.
2. ASTM C518 – Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
3. ASTM D1622 – Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid
Cellular Plastics.
4. ASTM D1653 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Organic Coating Films; for latex vapor retarder.
5. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
6. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.
7. ASTM E2178 – Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building
Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Technical data sheets.
2. Building code evaluation reports.
3. Sample warranty forms.
B. Installer Certification: Document prepared by spray foam manufacturer
confirming approval, certification, or licensing of spray foam installer selected
for this Project.
C. Warranty Certification: Document prepared by spray foam manufacturer
indicating spray foam insulation design, materials, and existing conditions are
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2119-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Foamed-In-Place Insulation
acceptable to receive specified warranties. Do not order materials until approved
by Architect.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions, including:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
E. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s lifetime limited warranty against defects in
material, or performance of insulation.
F. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2 year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, approved submittals, or authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain spray foam products through single source from
same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of spray foam insulation
required for this Project; approved, certified, or licensed by spray foam
manufacturer.
C. Installation Documents: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 OPEN-CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION (SFI-1)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Icynene; Classic Ultra; www.icynene.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: 2-part, low-density, open-cell, 100 percent water-blown,
polyurethane foam plastic insulation, and air barrier.
1. Use/Location:
a. Attics: R-38 (10.27 in.), unless noted otherwise.
b. Walls: R-20 (5.4 in.), unless noted otherwise.
2. Materials:
a. Part A: Polymeric isocyanate.
b. Part B: Polymeric resin.
3. Density: 0.5 lb./ft.3; nominal; meeting ASTM D1622.
4. Thermal Resistance: R-3.7 for 1 in. thickness; aged; meeting ASTM C518.
5. Air Permeance: 0.0028 ft.3/min/ft.2 for 3 in. thickness in accordance with
ASTM E2178; considered impermeable.
6. Water Vapor Transmission: 11 perms for 5-1/2 in. thickness in accordance
with ASTM E96; considered permeable at greater than 10 perms.
7. Surface Burning Characteristics; meeting ASTM E84, Class 1:
a. Flame Spread Index: 20.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2119-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Foamed-In-Place Insulation
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 340.
7. Installation Method: Spray-applied; 14 in. max. first layer thickness with
additional 2 in. layers, as required, to meet specified R-value.
2.3 INTUMESCENT COATING
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: International Fireproof Technology; DC 315;
www.painttoprotect.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: 1-part, water-based, liquid-applied intumescent coating; used over
spray-applied foam plastic insulation as an “Alternative Thermal Barrier Coating
System”; flat finish; grey color.
1. Film Thickness:
a. Wet: 20 mils.
b. Dry: 13 mils.
2. Installation Method: Brush, roller, or spray.
2.4 LATEX VAPOR RETARDER, CLASS 2
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Latex Vapor Barrier Primer
Sealer 573; www.benjaminmoore.com
2. Sherwin-Williams; Moisture Vapor Barrier Interior Latex Primer/Finish
B72W00001; www.sherwin-williams.com
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Interior latex primer, fast-drying, low vapor permeance; performs as
Class 2 vapor retarder on interior walls and ceilings; flat finish; white color.
1. Materials:
a. Vehicle: Styrene butadiene acrylic.
b. Pigment: Titanium dioxide.
2. Film Thickness:
a. Wet: 3.8 mils.
b. Dry: 1.3 mils.
3. Water Vapor Transmission: 0.58 perms in accordance with ASTM D1653;
considered impermeable at less than 1 perm.
4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 25 over non-
combustible surfaces; meeting ASTM D1653.
5. Installation Method: Brush, roller, or spray.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of spray
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2119-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Foamed-In-Place Insulation
foam insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Proper adhesion of spray foam to substrates by on-site testing in small
areas before start of work.
2. Spray foam insulation is not installed within 3 inches of heat emitting
devices, or where temperature exceeds 180 degrees F in accordance with
ASTM C411.
3. Spray foam insulation is not installed at fire-rated walls or roof
assemblies.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply spray foam insulation, intumescent coatings, and latex paint vapor
retarders in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Extend spray foam in uniform thicknesses, with specified R-values, to outer
limits of areas indicated to receive spray foam insulation.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Repair damage to spray foam insulation, intumescent coatings, and latex paint
vapor retarders caused by construction activities after initial application.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2519-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers – Alternate
SECTION 07 2519
FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIERS – ALTERNATE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fluid-applied vapor permeable weather resistant barriers (WRB) for
prepared vertical above-grade concrete, concrete block, and sheathing at
exterior building envelope.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 2300 – Alternates for Fluid-Applied Weather-Resistive Barriers.
2. Section 04 2113 – Brick Veneer Masonry for veneer over WRB.
3. Section 07 4649 – Fiber-Cement Siding for cladding over WRB.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA): www.airbarrier.org
1. ABAA – Evaluated Air Barrier Assemblies for products meeting
maximum air leakage rate in accordance with ASTM E2357.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM D3273 – Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold
on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
2. ASTM D4541 – Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings
Using Portable Adhesion Testers.
3. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
4. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.
5. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in
Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.
6. ASTM E2178 – Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate
and Calculation of Air Permeance of Building Materials.
7. ASTM E2357 – Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air
Barrier Assemblies.
C. Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (AWCI): www.awci.org
1. EIFS – Doing It Right education and certification program.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Technical data sheets.
2. Standard details recommended for this Project.
3. Building code evaluation reports.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Product List: Indicate specific WRB products and accessories recommended for
this Project, including number of coats, and thickness of primary WRB material
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2519-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers – Alternate
for each substrate surface. Cross-reference products and accessories to standard
details.
C. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Locations of WRB.
b. Moving substrate joint locations.
c. Details at flashings, corners, moving joints, perimeters,
penetrations, interface with roof and foundation WRB materials,
and special conditions.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with building
elevations, and construction details shown on Drawings
3. Verified field dimensions for substrate joint locations, and special
conditions.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
D. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 5-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and manufacturing.
E. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain WRB products through single source from same manufacturer, or
other manufacturers acceptable to WRB manufacturer.
2. Obtain accessory products through single source from WRB
manufacturer; or other manufacturers acceptable to fluid-applied WRB
manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of EIFS products required for
this Project, and certified by both of the following:
1. AWCI; EIF Smart Contractor.
2. EIFS manufacturer; Certified Installer in accordance with authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockups:
1. At locations on building, and to extent directed by Architect; install
minimum 25 ft.2 sample wall areas of WRB on each type of substrate
construction using materials noted on approved submittals, showing:
a. Surface preparation.
b. Details of substrate joints, cracks, flashings, penetrations, corners,
terminations, and tie-in with roof and foundation WRB materials.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2519-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers – Alternate
c. Number of coats required.
d. Application method.
2. Prepare mockups for Architect’s approval, after receipt of approved
submittals, and 3 weeks before start of installation. Repair or replace
mockups, if required by Architect, until approved.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by Architect.
4. Maintain approved mockup during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Approved mockups may remain as part of
finished installation.
E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting after receipt of approved
submittals, installation of mockup, and 2-weeks before start of installation to
review WRB requirements.
1. Attendance: Owner’s representative, Contractor, EIFS/WRB installation
foreman, EIFS/WRB manufacturer’s technical representative, Architect;
and others installing work interfaced with WRB installation.
a. Confirm attendance of installation foreman, manufacturer’s
technical representative, and Architect before scheduling meeting.
b. Notify attendees 7 days before scheduled meeting date and time.
c. Submit meeting report to Architect and copy attendees within 3
days after meeting.
2. Agenda:
a. Warranty requirements.
b. Manufacturer’s installation instructions, standard details, and
recommendations.
c. Contract Documents, and submittal requirements.
d. Substrate preparation.
e. Interface and coordination with other work.
f. Review mockups.
g. Observe installation areas, and working conditions.
h. Environmental conditions.
i. Schedule.
j. Other items required for successful completion of work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle WRB products in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products,
or products aged beyond manufacturer’s stated shelf life.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2519-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers – Alternate
2.1 FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIERS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Dryvit Systems; www.dryvit.com
2. Master Wall; www.masterwall.com
3. Basis of Design: StoGuard System with Sto Gold Coat; www.stocorp.com
4. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Fluid-applied, flexible, vapor permeable air and water resistive
barrier (WRB).
1. Application: Use over prepared vertical above grade concrete, concrete
block, and sheathing substrates behind brick veneer, fiber-cement siding
and other wall claddings, unless noted otherwise.
a. Concrete: Apply in 1-coat at 5-7 mil dry film thickness (10-12 wet
mils).
b. Concrete Block: Apply in 2-coats at 7-19 dry film thickness (10-30
wet mils); each coat.
c. Sheathing: Apply in 1-coat at 5-7 mil dry film thickness (10-12 wet
mils).
2. Color: Yellow.
3. Properties:
a. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, best possible; in accordance with
ASTM D3273.
b. Adhesion: Primary air barrier and joint treatment; greater than or
equal to 30 lb./in.2 or exceeds strength of glass mat facing on glass
mat gypsum substrates; in accordance with ASTM D4541.
c. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread < 25,
smoke developed < 450; in accordance with ASTM E84.
d. Water Vapor Permeance: Greater than 10 perms; in accordance
with ASTM E96 Method B; greater than 10 perms considered
permeable.
e. Material Air Leakage: Primary air barrier and joint treatment; less
than 0.004 ft.3/min./ft.2 at 1.57 lb./ft.2; in accordance with ASTM
E2178.
f. Assembly Air Leakage: Less than or equal to 0.04 ft.3/min./ft.2
after conditioning protocol; in accordance with ASTM E2357.
4. Installation Method: Spray or roller applied. Backroll spray applications.
C. Components: Recommended by installer and provided by EIFS manufacturer for
conditions of use and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s
review, and compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Primary WRB Material: Sto Gold Coat.
2. Sheathing Joint Treatments: Sto RapidGuard; or Sto Gold Coat with
StoGuard Fabric.
3. Rough Opening Treatments: Sto RapidGuard; or Sto Gold Coat with
StoGuard Fabric, and StoGuard Redicorner.
4. Transition Detail Treatments: StoGuard Transition Membrane, Sto
RapidGuard, or StoGuard RapidFill.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2519-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fluid-Applied Weather Resistant Barriers – Alternate
D. Accessories: Recommended by installer for conditions of use and application,
unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and compliance with
specified requirements, including:
1. Joint Sealant.
2. Patching and Leveling Material.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of WRB
in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, manufacturer’s details, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates to receive WRB in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install WRB in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, standard or
recommended details, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean spills and soiling from other construction, to remain exposed in completed
Project, using cleaning methods and materials recommended by manufacturer of
affected construction.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until covered and protected by
subsequent construction.
B. Replace damaged products that cannot be restored to acceptable condition, as
directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2616-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Below-Grade Vapor Retarders
SECTION 07 2616
BELOW-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Under slab vapor retarders for protection of on-grade concrete slabs against moisture penetration.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C836 – Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold
Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with
Separate Wearing Course.
2. ASTM D882 – Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting.
3. ASTM D1709 – Test Method for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by Free-
Falling Dart Method.
4. ASTM E1643 – Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and
Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or
Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
5. ASTM E1745 – Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders
Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
6. ASTM F1249 – Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through
Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
B. Samples:
1. Vapor Retarder: 12 by 12 in. piece.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain under slab vapor retarder, and accessories through
single source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of under slab vapor retarder
work required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2616-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Below-Grade Vapor Retarders
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle under slab vapor retarder products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Henry Company; Moistop Ultra 15 Underslab Vapor Retarder; www.henry.com 2. Raven Engineered Films; VaporBlock VB15 Underslab Vapor Barrier;
www.ravenefd.com
3. Reef Industries; Griffolyn 15 Mil Green Underslab Vapor Retarder;
www.reefindustries.com
4. Basis of Design: Stego Industries; Stego Wrap 15-Mil Vapor Barrier;
www.stegoindustries.com 5. W.R. Meadows; Perminator 15 Mil Underslab Vapor Barrier; www.wrmeadows.com
6. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Multi-layer plastic extrusion composed of polyethylene or
polyolefin sheets; meeting ASTM E1745, Class A.
1. Thickness: 15 mil.
2. Roll Size: 14 by 140 ft.; 1,960 ft.2.
3. Roll Weight: 140 lb.
4. Properties:
a. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.0086 perms ASTM F1249.
b. Puncture Resistance: 2,266 grams in accordance with ASTM D1709. c. Tensile Strength: 70.6 lb.-ft./in.; in accordance with ASTM D882. 5. Installation Method: Loose laid over prepared base with lap joints taped.
C. Accessories: Recommended by under slab vapor retarder manufacturer for
conditions of use and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s
review, and compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Tape: Stego Tape; conformable, low-permeance tape composed of
polyethylene film, and acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. Use for
sealing, hanging, seaming, splicing, and patching work.
2. Mastic: Stego Mastic; medium viscosity, water-based, polymer-modified
bituminous asphalt emulsion; meeting ASTM C836. Use as vapor
retardant membrane for sealing around pipe, conduit, and other vertical
penetrations.
3. Pipe Boots: Stego Pre-Cut Pipe Boots; fabricated from 15-mil vapor
retarder sheet. Use to seal around permanent penetrations in under slab
vapor retarder.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 2616-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Below-Grade Vapor Retarders
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of under
slab vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Compacted, clean, prepared base material without debris, and
protrusions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, approved submittals, and ASTM E1643.
B. Loose lay vapor retarder over interior building area to receive concrete slab, in
full sheet widths; with seams parallel to, and lapped away from direction of
concrete pour.
C. Lap vapor retarder over footings, seal to foundation walls, or both. Seal around
pipe, conduit, and other vertical penetrations to create monolithic, waterproof
barrier between bottom of slab and earth below. Fold at corners to form
envelope.
D. Lap joints minimum 6 in., and seal with adhesive tape over entire lap.
E. Seal vapor retarder to penetrations and protrusions by turning membrane up minimum 6 in., and sealing edges to penetrations and protrusions with adhesive tape, mastic, or pre-cut pipe boots.
F. Install vapor retarder continuous under through-slab movement joints.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until covered with concrete.
B. Repair damaged vapor retarder with vapor retarder materials, before concrete
placement; overlap damaged areas minimum 6 in., and seal.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 4116-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Roof Panels
SECTION 07 4116
ALUMINUM ROOF PANELS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standing-seam aluminum roof panels; certified for use on buildings
located outside the High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) with Florida
Product Approval No.
2. Aluminum flashing and trim.
3. Underlayment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 7124 – Manufactured Aluminum Gutters and Downspouts.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org
1. Standards ASCE/SEI 7-10, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
3. ASTM D1187 – Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for
Use as Protective Coatings for Metal.
4. ASTM D1970 – Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer
Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials used as Steep Roofing
Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.
C. Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA): www.fgiaonline.org
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance
Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing
Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Color charts.
3. Technical data sheets.
4. Standard details applicable to this Project.
5. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Panel layouts, lengths, and slopes.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 4116-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Roof Panels
b. Panel profile, metal thickness and finish; attachment clips, bearing
plates; expansion provisions; and seam fabrication.
c. Fastener spacing and layout for field-of-roof, perimeters, and
corner conditions to meet wind uplift requirements.
d. Base flashings, joining and interface with adjacent materials and
construction.
e. Details of flashings, closures, and special fabrications at
perimeters, penetrations, and terminations.
f. Detail of snap-lock interface between new and existing panel
profiles with tape or sealant waterproofing, as required, for
watertight connection.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with roof plans, and
construction details shown on Drawings.
3. PE stamp; signed and dated; certifying compliance with structural design
requirements.
C. Samples:
1. Colors: 3 by 3 in. set of available colors, textures, and finishes; prepared
with material specified for this Project; for verification.
2. Roof Panel: Full-width, 12 in. long; showing edge profiles, metal
thickness, and color.
3. Fasteners: Panel attachment clips, bearing plates, and fasteners.
D. Product Certification: Document confirming current approval of specified
aluminum roof panels by Florida Department of Business & Professional
Regulation (DBPR)/Product Approval for compliance with Florida Building
Code (https://floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_srch.aspx ), including:
1. Code Version.
2. FL # (State Product Approval No.).
3. Manufacturer.
4. Product Category.
5. Product Model, Number or Name.
6. Product Description.
7. Approval for Use Outside HVHZ.
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage and handling.
2. Installation.
F. Finish Warranty: Manufacturer’s 20-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and factory-application of fluoropolymer finish.
G. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain roof panels, trim, and accessories through single
source from same manufacturer, or from other manufacturers acceptable to roof
panel manufacturer.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 4116-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Roof Panels
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of roof panel work required for
this Project; approved, authorized, or licensed by roof panel manufacturer.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle roof panel products in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM ROOF PANELS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Sunlast Metal; Stuart Series (1” Nail Strip); www.sunlastmetal.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
NOTE: Final selection and approval of aluminum roof panels, based on
aesthetic effects, is judged solely by Architect.
B. Description: Standing-seam aluminum roof panels.
1. Design: Match existing Semco Southeastern Metals; Sem-Lok Panel seam
height, width, edge profile, and color (www.semetals.com )
2. Material: 0.032 in. aluminum sheet; meeting ASTM B209.
3. Type: Flat roof panel with mechanically snap-locked standing seams, and
concealed fasteners allowing for thermal movement.
4. Seam Height: 1 in.
5. Panel Width: 16 in.
6. Panel Surface: Smooth.
7. Panel Length: Continuous from eave to ridge.
8. Finish: 70-percent PVDF fluoropolymer resin-based coating; meeting
AAMA 2605.
9. Color: As selected by Architect.
10. Installation Method: Attach panels in sequence with fasteners installed
along concealed lock-edges of panels, and exposed edges of adjacent
panels snap-locked in place, allowing for thermal movement.
C. Structural Design Requirements: Provide qualified professional engineer
registered in state where Project is located to perform engineering services,
including:
1. Design roof panels, fasteners, and fastener spacing for required loads,
combination of loads, and wind speed noted on Drawings.
2. Certification that structural components of roof panel design, as shown
on shop-drawings, meet structural load requirements of ASCE/SEI 7,
Contract Documents, and authorities having jurisdiction; evidenced by
PE stamp, signed and dated.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 4116-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Roof Panels
D. Components: Recommended by aluminum roof panel manufacturer for
conditions of use and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s
review, and compliance with specified requirements.
1. High-Temperature Waterproofing Underlayment: CertainTeed; Winter
Guard HT; self-adhering, reinforced, rubberized asphalt membrane with
plastic release film; meeting ASTM D1970.
2. Closures.
3. Closure Strips.
4. Sealant Tape.
5. Plastic Cap Underlayment Nails: 1 in. long by 12 gauge, stainless steel
ring-shank with 3/8-in. diameter head, and 1 in. diameter plastic cap.
6. Hip and Ridge Cap.
7. Apron Flashings.
8. Step Flashings.
9. Drip Edges.
10. Rake Flashings.
11. Vent-Pipe Flashings.
E. Accessories: Recommended by roof panel manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Match color of exposed heads with material
being fastened.
2. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic free of sulfur;
formulated for 15-mill dry film thickness of single coat; meeting ASTM
D1187.
3. Sealant: Clear, silicone-based sealant meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 35. Clear, or match panel color.
a. NovaGard; NovaFlex Metal Roof & Panel Adhesive Sealant;
www.novagard.com
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of roof
panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. 2 :12 min. roof slope for normal installation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 4116-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Roof Panels
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum roof panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Remove temporary protective film, if any, from aluminum surfaces
before installation.
2. Accurately fit, align, and securely fasten without defects or distortion;
provide for thermal expansion and watertight laps, joints and seams;
conceal fasteners where possible.
3. Apply bituminous coating to aluminum surfaces in contact with
dissimilar metals, or cementitious materials.
B. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
C. Do not allow construction use of finished roof areas.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 4649-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fiber-Cement Siding
SECTION 07 4649
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fiber-cement siding; certified for use on buildings located outside the
High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) with Florida Product Approval
No.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 2300 – Alternates for Fluid-Applied Weather-Resistive Barriers.
2. Section 06 6500 – Plastic Simulated Wood Trim
3. Section 09 9100 – Painting for on-site paint finish.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org
1. ASCE/SEI 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
2. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
3. ASTM C1186 – Standard Specification for Flat Fiber-Cement Sheets.
4. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Color charts for joint sealants.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Standard details applicable to this Project.
4. Building code evaluation reports.
5. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Substrate preparation.
b. Clearances and gaps between members.
c. Fastener types and spacing.
d. Installation and flashing details.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with exterior
elevations and construction details shown on Drawings.
3. PE stamp; signed and dated.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 4649-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fiber-Cement Siding
C. Samples:
1. Siding Boards: 12 in. lengths.
2. Drip Edge Flashing: 12 in. lengths of each type.
3. Fasteners: Each type, size, and length.
D. Product Certification: Document confirming current approval of specified fiber-
cement siding by Florida Department of Business & Professional Regulation
(DBPR)/Product Approval for compliance with Florida Building Code
(httpa://floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_srch.aspx ), including:
1. Code Version.
2. FL # (State Product Approval No.).
3. Manufacturer.
4. Product Category.
5. Product Model, Number or Name.
6. Product Description.
7. Approval for Use Outside HVHZ.
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage and handling.
2. Installation.
F. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 30-year limited warranty against defects in
material and manufacturing.
G. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, approved submittals, or authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fiber-cement products, and accessories through single
source from same manufacturer, or from other manufacturers acceptable to fiber-
cement manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of fiber-cement products
required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockups:
1. At location directed by Architect; install min. 4 by 4 ft., freestanding,
movable, sample wall panel for fiber-cement siding and plastic trim with
materials noted on approved submittals, showing:
a. Substrate preparation.
b. Clearances and gaps between boards.
c. Fastener types and spacing.
d. Installation and flashing details.
e. Plastic trim details.
f. Woven corner details, to match existing.
g. Joint sealants and painting.
h. Workmanship.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 4649-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fiber-Cement Siding
2. Prepare mockup for Architect’s approval, after receipt of approved
submittals, and 3-weeks before start of installation. Prepare additional
mockups, if required by Architect, until approved.
3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockup, unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by Architect.
4. Maintain approved mockup during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Do not remove approved mockups until directed
by Architect.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle fiber-cement products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Nichiha USA; Sierra Premium Shake-Primed, Premium
Plank Siding; www.nichiha.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Siding boards composed of portland cement, fly ash, wood fiber,
additives, and water; formed under pressure to product profile and texture;
meeting ASTM C1186 Type A, Grade II.
1. Design: Simulated cedar shake siding with woven corners to match
existing.
2. Thickness: 1/2 in.
3. Size: 8-7/8 in. wide by 9 ft.-4 in. long.
4. Exposure: Match existing.
5. Edge Profile: Square.
6. Weight: 3.1 lb./ft.2
7. Texture: Match existing.
8. Finish: Factory-primed for on-site paint finish in accordance with Section
09 9100.
9. Color: Match existing, or as selected by Architect.
10. Properties:
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 0; smoke
developed 5; in accordance with ASTM E84.
11. Installation Method: Mechanically fastened through sheathing into wall
studs, unless noted otherwise.
C. Design Requirements: Provide qualified professional engineer registered in state
where Project is located to perform engineering services, including:
1. Design of fasteners and fastener spacing, in accordance with building
code evaluation reports, for wind speed noted on Drawings.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 4649-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fiber-Cement Siding
2. Certification that structural components of siding installation, fasteners,
and fastener spacing, as shown on shop-drawings, meet structural load
requirements of ASCE/SEI 7-10, Contract Documents, and authorities
having jurisdiction; evidenced by PE stamp, signed and dated.
D. Accessories: Recommended by fiber-cement manufacturer for conditions of use
and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Drip Edge Flashing: Extruded, Z-shaped aluminum, meeting ASTM B221;
clear anodized.
2. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
3. Joint Sealants: Paintable, elastomeric, polyurethane sealant; meeting
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35.
a. Master Builders; MasterSeal NP 1.
b. Sika; Sikaflex – 1A.
c. Tremco: Vulkem 116.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installer present, that conditions of work previously installed under
other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of fiber-cement products
in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, approved
submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Required 16 in. on-center spacing of stud wall framing, in accordance
with design requirements and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Installation of items penetrating or located behind siding, including
electrical device boxes, mechanical items, opening frames, and other
built-in items.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fiber-cement siding in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Install trim boards and horizontal drip edge before siding; butt siding to
trim boards within specified tolerance.
NOTE: Do not install trim boards on-top-of siding.
2. Fasten horizontal drip edge to wall studs, or wood blocking at each stud
location and within 6 in. of each end.
3. Install 6 in. wide peel and stick joint flashing on wall surface centered
behind end-to-end vertical joints between siding boards, and overlapping
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 4649-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fiber-Cement Siding
board below; join boards with moderate contact over joint flashing. Do
not caulk joints.
NOTE: Do not install joint sealant at end-to-end vertical joints between
siding boards,
4. Cut siding to fit around penetration openings within 1/4 in. max.
tolerance.
5. Prime field-cut edges before installation.
6. Fasten siding at maximum spacing in accordance with design
requirements. Install exposed fasteners, 3/8 in. min. from edges, and 2 in.
max. from corners, in uniform fastening pattern.
B. Installation Tolerances:
1. Between Siding and Finished Grade: 6 in. min.
2. Between Siding and Pavement, Steps, Decks and Roof Surfaces: 2 in. min.
3. Between Siding and Horizontal Drip Edges: 1/4 in. min.
C. Install joint sealant between fiber-cement siding, trim boards, and adjoining
materials.
NOTE: Do not install joint sealant at horizontal drip edges.
D. Apply on-site paint finish to factory-primed fiber-cement siding, and exposed
drip edge flashing as specified in Section 09 9100.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 5423-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing
SECTION 07 5423
THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Mechanically attached TPO roofing system over level wood deck;
certified for use on buildings located outside the High Velocity Hurricane
Zone (HVHZ) with Florida Product Approval No.
2. Tapered insulation and filler board.
3. Cover board.
4. Walk pads.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. Standards ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C1289 – Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular
Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
2. ASTM D6878 – Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based
Sheet Roofing.
3. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in
Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.
C. UL (UL):
1. UL 790 (ASTM E108) – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof
Coverings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
b. Penetrations.
c. Membrane sheet layout, including slopes, and relative elevations.
d. Mechanical fastener spacings and layouts for field-of-roof,
perimeters, and corner conditions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 5423-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard or recommended details with
roof plans, and construction details shown on Drawings.
3. PE stamp; signed and dated.
C. Product Certification: Document confirming current approval of specified TPO
roof by Florida Department of Business & Professional Regulation
(DBPR)/Product Approval for compliance with Florida Building Code
(https://floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_srch.aspx), including:
1. Code Version.
2. FL # (State Product Approval No.).
3. Manufacturer.
4. Product Category.
5. Product Model, Number or Name.
6. Product Description.
7. Approval for Use Outside HVHZ.
D. Installer Certification: Document prepared by roof system manufacturer showing
approval, authorization, or licensing of roof system installer selected for this
Project.
E. Engineer Certification: Document prepared, stamped, signed and dated by
Professional Engineer, registered to practice in state where Project is located,
certifying that roof design meets building code, and Project design requirements.
F. Warranty Certification: Document prepared by roofing system manufacturer
indicating roofing system design, materials, and substrate conditions are
acceptable to receive specified warranty.
G. Manufacturer’s Field reports, including:
1. Initial inspection before start of work.
2. Progress inspections.
3. Final inspection.
H. G. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
4. Maintenance.
I. H. Roof System Warranty: Manufacturer’s 20-year labor and material
warranty against defects in materials and installation; no-dollar-limit.
J. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, approved submittals, or authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of roof system required for
this Project; approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer.
and eligible to receive manufacturer’s roofing system warranty.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 5423-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency meeting ASTM E 329;
with experience, and capability to conduct required testing and submit specified
reports.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting to review roof requirements
following approval of submittals, and at least two weeks before start of roofing
work.
1. Attendance: Owner’s representative, roof contractor, roofing foreman,
roofing system manufacturer’s technical representative; and others
installing work that penetrates, or is adjacent to roof areas.
a. Notify attendees at least one week before scheduled meeting date.
b. Submit report to Architect, and copy attendees.
2. Agenda:
a. Warranty requirements.
b. Manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.
c. Specification and submittal requirements.
d. Preparation of roof deck, perimeters, and penetrations.
e. Interface and coordination with other work.
f. Availability of roof materials.
g. Job safety.
h. Observe roof areas.
i. Existing warranties.
j. Other items concerning successful completion of work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle roofing products in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to avoid damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 TPO ROOFING
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements.
1. Basis of Design: Johns Manville; JM TPO Roofing System; www.jm.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Mechanically attached single-ply TPO membrane, full tapered
system, and cover board over level wood deck.
C. Design Requirements:
1. Wind Uplift: Provide qualified professional engineer to analyze fastener
pull-out values, wind uplift pressures in accordance with ASCE 7-10, and
calculate number of fasteners required to resist wind uplift pressures
with 2:1 safety factor at field-of-roof, perimeter, and corner conditions in
accordance with building code, and roof manufacturer’s instructions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 5423-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing
2. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Provide Class A roof system tested by
approved testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction in
accordance with UL 790 (ASTM E108).
D. Components: Products recommended by roofing system manufacturer as
required to provide complete roofing system for this Project, and covered by
specified warranty, including:
1. Membrane Sheet: JM TPO; scrim fabric reinforced thermoplastic-
polyolefin; meeting ASTM D6878.
a. Thickness: 0.060 inch (60 mil).
b. Roll Size: 5, 8, or 10 feet wide by 100 feet long.
c. Weight: 2.76 lb./ft2.
d. Color: White.
e. Properties:
1) Solar Reflectance Index: 0.85, 3-year aged value.
2) Moisture vapor permanence: Impermeable, less than 1
perm.
2. Flashing Sheet: JM TPO; match sheet membrane material, thickness, and
color.
3. Bonding Adhesive: JM Membrane bonding Adhesive; for adhering sheet
flashing to approved substrates, other than wood.
4. Termination Bars: JM Termination Systems; 1-11/32 inch wide by 10 feet
long, extruded aluminum with pre-punched holes for fasteners
recommended by roofing system manufacturer.
5. Penetration Pocket: JM TPO Penetration Pocket; 7-1/2 inch by 6 inch,
oval-shaped, 2-piece molded TPO pocket with rigid vertical sides and
integral base flange; for sealing difficult to flash penetrations.
6. Pourable Sealer: JM One-Part Pourable Sealer; 1-part polyether sealant for
filling penetration pockets.
7. Pipe Boots: JM TPO Split Pipe Boots; prefabricated, reinforced 60-mil
TPO, round-shaped split-pipe boot for flashing 1 to 6 inch diameter pipe
penetrations; color white.
8. Corners: JM TPO Universal Corners; prefabricated, flexible, non-
reinforced 60-mil TPO; 6 inch diameter, waffle-shaped patch for inside
and outside corners; color white.
9. Edge Sealant: JM TPO LVOC Edge Sealant; 1-part, membrane edge
sealant for sealing cut edges of TPO sheet membrane; color clear.
10. T-Joint Patch: JM TPO T-Joint Patch; flexible, non-reinforced 60-mil TPO;
4-1/2 inch diameter, round patches, for sealing seam laps at perimeter
and header sheet intersections; color white.
11. Sealing Mastic: JM Single Ply Sealing Mastic; 1-part, butyl polymer-based
water cutoff mastic for sealing TPO sheet membrane at perimeters and
penetrations; color grey; do not expose to ultraviolet radiation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 5423-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing
12. Cover Tape: JM TPO Cover Tape; 0.060 inch thick tape, composed of 0.030
inch thick non-reinforced TPO, and 0.030 inch thick peel-and-stick
adhesive tape; for stripping-in metal flanges to TPO sheet membrane;
color white.
13. Detail Membrane: JM TPO Detail Membrane; 0.060 inch thick, flexible,
non-reinforced TPO for field forming flashings around corners and
penetrations; color white.
14. Perimeter Strip: JM TPO 10” Reinforced Perimeter Strip (RPS); 0.075 inch
thick by 10 inch wide strip composed of 0.045 inch thick reinforced TPO,
and 0.030 inch thick peel-and-stick adhesive tape; for attachment of sheet
membrane edges to substrate with both adhesive tape and mechanical
fasteners; color white.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 5423-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing
15. Termination Strip: JM TPO 6” Reinforced Termination Strip (RPS); 0.075
inch thick by 6 inch wide strip composed of 0.045 inch thick reinforced
TPO, and 0.030 inch thick peel-and-stick adhesive tape; for attachment of
field sheet membrane to substrate at any angle change greater than 2:12
with both adhesive tape and mechanical fasteners; color white.
16. Curb Flashing: JM TPO Curb Flashing; 0.060 inch thick by 18 inch wide,
reinforced TPO with encapsulated edge; for roof curbs and parapet walls
eliminating need for field cutting and edge sealing.
2.2 COVER BOARD
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements.
1. Basis of Design: Johns Manville; JM Invinsa Roof Board; www.jm.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: High-density polyisocyanurate foam core with inorganic coated
glass facers; meeting ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 4, Grades 1,2 and 3.
1. Thickness: 1/4 in.
2. Board Size: 4 by 8 ft.
3. Weight: 0.375 lb./ft.2
4. Properties:
a. Compressive Strength: 150 lb./in.2
b. Moisture Vapor Permanence: Permeable, greater than 10 perms.
c. Thermal Resistance: R-1.2 for 1/4 in. thickness.
d. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A material.
5. Installation Method: Mechanically attached through tapered system to
roof deck with minimum number of fasteners to temporarily hold cover
board and insulation in-place until installation of mechanically attached
TPO membrane.
2.3 FILLER BOARD
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements.
1. Basis of Design: Johns Manville; Flat ENRGY 3 CGF; www.jm.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Polyisocyanurate foam core with inorganic coated glass facers;
meeting ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 2, Grade 2.
1. Total Thickness: 4.2 in.
2. Board Size: 4 ft. by 8 ft.
3. Weight: 0.375 lb./ft.2
4. Properties:
a. Compressive Strength: 20 lb./in.2
b. Moisture Vapor Permanence: 4.0 perm; semi-permeable, greater
than 1 and less than 10 perms.
c. Long Term Thermal Resistance: R-24.9
d. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class B material.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 5423-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing
5. Installation Method: Loose laid and mechanically attached to deck with
temporary cover board fasteners.
2.4 TAPERED BOARD
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements.
1. Basis of Design: Johns Manville; Tapered ENRGY 3 CGF; www.jm.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Polyisocyanurate foam core with inorganic coated glass facers;
meeting ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 2, Grade 2.
1. Tapered Slope: 1/4 in./ft.
2. Tapered Thickness: Varies from 1/2 in. to 2-1/2 in., with 2 in. thick Flat
ENRGY 3 CGF fillers.
3. Tapered Board Size: 4 by 4 ft.
4. Weight: 0.107 lb./ft.2 for 1 in. thickness.
5. Properties:
a. Compressive Strength: 20 lb./in.2
b. Moisture Vapor Permanence: 4.0 perm; semi-permeable, greater
than 1 and less than 10 perms.
c. Long Term Thermal Resistance: R-8.6 for 1-1/2 in. average
thickness above 2 in. thick filler boards.
d. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class B material.
6. Installation Method: Loose laid and mechanically attached to deck with
temporary cover board fasteners.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation Fasteners: Use for fastening cover board and insulation to steel deck:
1. UltraFast Fasteners: 12 gauge, case-hardened steel shank, polymer-coated
by length required with 1/4 inch hex, or No. 3 Phillips head; blue color.
2. UltraFast Plates: 3 inch diameter, recessed round flat-bottomed plate, 26-
gauge, Galvalume-coated steel; grey color.
B. Membrane Fasteners: Use for fastening TPO membrane to steel deck:
1. High Load Fasteners: 15-gauge, case-hardened steel shank by length
required with No. 3 Phillips head; blue color.
2. High Load Plates: 2-3/8 inch diameter, round plates with eye hooks, 20-
gauge, Galvalume-coated steel; grey color.
C. Walk Pads: Use for protecting roof membrane in service areas around roof-
mounted equipment.
1. JM TPO Walkpad; 0.150 inch (150 mil) thick, textured non-reinforced
thermoplastic-polyolefin.
a. Roll Size: 30 inch wide by 50 feet long.
b. Weight: 0.46 lb./ft2.
c. Color: Grey.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 5423-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installer present, that conditions of work previously installed under
other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of roofing in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions, contract documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions are
corrected.
B. Confirm:
1. Installation of roof openings, curbs, and penetrations; and scuppers.
2. Installation of wood nailers anchored to roof deck at perimeters and
penetrations; matching thickness of insulation materials, flush with top of
cover board.
3. Flatness of roof deck surface with no offsets between adjacent decking
units.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Prepare substrates and install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing.
C. Do not prepare more substrate; or install more roofing material specified for
installation under roof membrane, than can be fully covered and protected by
installation of complete watertight roof system by end of work day.
D. Do not leave completed sections of roof areas exposed to moisture overnight,
when work is not taking place, or when precipitation is forecast.
1. Complete terminations, and base flashings; install temporary waterstops
at exposed edges to prevent water from entering completed sections of
roof area.
2. Remove waterstops, and replace wet material before installation of
adjoining roof section.
E. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies hired, or required to perform
field services for installation of roofing system.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces to remove dust, dirt, debris, moisture, and other
substances detrimental to roofing installation; remove sharp projections, and
blow-off right before start of installation.
B Prevent materials from from spilling, or migrating onto surfaces of other
construction.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 5423-9
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing
3.4 TAPERED SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install flat insulation with long edges in continuous straight rows, and short
edges staggered 4 feet between rows; butt edges tight. Fill gaps larger than 1/4
inch with insulation.
B. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
C. Install tapered and filler board in two layers loose laid on roof deck to provide
specified thickness and thermal resistance. Offset joints of top layer 6 inches
minimum, in each direction, from joints of bottom layer.
D. Provide slopes indicated; butt edges tight.
E. Trim surface of insulation at scuppers, as necessary to provide flush finished
surface for proper drainage without restriction of water flow.
3.5 COVER BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install cover board over insulation with long edges in continuous straight rows,
and short edges staggered 4 feet between rows. Offset joints of insulation 6
inches minimum, in each direction; loosely butt cover board edges, and fasten
through insulation to roof deck.
B. Cut and fit cover board within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
C. Mechanically attach each 4 by 8 foot cover board with 6 fasteners, as
recommended by roofing system manufacturer, to temporarily hold cover board
and insulation in-place until installation of mechanically attached TPO roof
system.
3.6 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Align roofing membrane sheets over cover board with long dimension
perpendicular to roof slope, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and
end laps. Stagger end laps.
B. Mechanically attach membrane sheets with fastener spacings and layouts
recommended by roofing system manufacturer, and any additional fasteners
required by engineering calculation to resist wind uplift pressures in accordance
with Engineer Certification; starting at low point of roofing system, overlapping
side laps shingle fashion, where possible, to shed water.
C. Clean seam areas, overlap membrane sheets, and hot-air weld side and end laps
to ensure watertight seam installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap
sealant to seal cut edges of membrane.
2. Verify seam strength, and repair seam sample areas.
3. Repair tears, voids in laps, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that
do not meet requirements by end of each workday.
D. Secure one edge of roofing membrane sheet using fastening plates centered
within membrane splice, mechanically fasten roofing membrane to roof deck for
in-splice attachment, and field-splice seam.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 5423-10
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing
E. Install roofing membrane and accessory materials to tie into adjoining
construction.
3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories to substrates in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and approved submittals.
B. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive at required rate and allow to partially
dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners.
D. Clean seam areas, and overlap. Firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive.
Weld side and end laps to ensure watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate
through termination bars.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Roof Inspections: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's Registered Roof
Observer (RRO) to perform progress inspections of roofing installation, final
inspection upon completion, and submit reports.
1. Notify Owner 48-hours in advance of date and time of inspections.
B. Repair, or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results
or inspections indicate non-compliance with warranty requirements.
C. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine
compliance of replaced, or additional work with warranty requirements.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by roofing work. Promptly clean spills
and soiling from adjacent surfaces using cleaning methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
B. Protect installed roofing system from damage during remainder of construction
period. Do not lean ladders on metal coping.
C. Repair or replace damaged roofing before Final Inspection, as directed by
Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 7124-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Manufactured Aluminum Gutters and Downspouts
SECTION 07 7124
MANUFACTURED ALUMINUM GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum gutters and downspouts.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 4116 – Aluminum Roof Panels for aluminum flashing and
trim..
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org
1. ASCE/SEI 7-10 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
3. ASTM D1187 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use
as Protective Coatings for Metal.
C. Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA): www.fgiaonline.org
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance
Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing
Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):
www.smacna.org
1. SMACNA – Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
2. Color charts for fluoropolymer coating and joint sealant.
3. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Gutter and downspout layout with sizes, expansion joint
locations, slope indications, hangers, and wall bracket spacings.
b. Expansion joint, end cap, and seam fabrication details.
c. Gutter and downspout mounting details.
d. Downspout outlet connection to pipe boots for sub-drainage
piping.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 7124-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Manufactured Aluminum Gutters and Downspouts
e. Components and accessories.
2. Verified field dimensions for lengths of gutters and locations of
expansion joints and downspouts.
3. PE stamp; signed and dated; certifying compliance with structural design
requirements.
C. Samples:
1. Colors: 3 by 3 in. set of available colors, textures, and finishes; prepared
on material specified for this Project; for verification.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
E. Finish Warranty: Manufacturer’s 20-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and factory-application of fluoropolymer finish.
F. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain gutter and downspout products, and accessories
through single source from same manufacturer, or from other manufacturers
acceptable to gutter and downspout manufacturer.
B. Installer: Specialized in installation of gutter and downspout work required for
this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle gutter and downspout products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED ALUMINUM GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Chris Industries; www.chrisind.com
2. K & M Sheet Metal; www.kmsheetmetal.com
3. Basis of Design: Metal-Era; Seal-Tight; www.metalera.com
4. Rutland Gutter Supply; www.rutlandguttersupply.com
5. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 7124-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Manufactured Aluminum Gutters and Downspouts
B. Description: Half-round gutter system, including: miters, hangers, end caps,
expansion joints, outlets, and strainers; with round downspouts, including:
elbows, offsets, and wall brackets.
1. Design: Match existing.
2. Material: Aluminum sheet meeting ASTM B209, 3003-H14 alloy. Use
same material for all components unless noted otherwise.
a. Thickness: 0.032 in. for girth up to 15 in.:
b. Thickness: 0.040 in. for girth from 16 to 20 in.:
3. Size: As determined by engineering design.
4. Finish: 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer coating meeting AAMA 2605.
5. Color: Selected by Architect.
6. Installation Method: Hang gutters on heavy-duty hangers anchored
through fascia to solid wood sub-fascia.
C. Structural Design Requirements: Provide qualified professional engineer
registered in state where Project is located to perform engineering services,
including:
1. Design gutter and downspout sizes, metal thicknesses, gutter hangers,
downspout wall brackets, and fasteners for required loads, combination
of loads, and wind speed noted on Drawings.
2. Certification that structural components of gutter and downspout design,
as shown on shop-drawings, meet structural load requirements of
ASCE/SEI 7-10; SMACNA size and capacity requirements for roof areas,
slopes, and rainfall intensity for 10-year storm; and authorities having
jurisdiction; evidenced by PE stamp, signed and dated.
D. Gutter Components:
1. Miters: Pre-formed, 1-piece inside and outside corners; 18 in. min.
returns.
2. Hangers: Heavy-duty, fascia mount type to match existing.
3. End Caps: Flanged, half-round; flat.
4. Expansion Joints:
a. Lapped, baffle type fabricated with end caps, and joint cover;
minimum 3/4 in. expansion width.
(or)
b. Flow-through type fabricated with neoprene expansion material
attached and sealed between aluminum flanges matching gutter
profile; including front edge and bottom trim pieces.
5. Outlets: Flanged tubes fabricated for half-round gutters; sized for
downspouts.
6. Strainers: Aluminum wire ball type for each outlet.
E. Downspout Components:
1. Elbows: As required or shown on Drawings.
2. Offsets: As required or shown on Drawings.
3. Wall Brackets: Formed aluminum bracket with single screw wall anchor,
and hinged pipe strap with thumb-screw fastener.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 7124-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Manufactured Aluminum Gutters and Downspouts
F. Fabrication:
1. Shop-fabricate aluminum gutters and downspouts to longest lengths
possible; in accordance with approved submittals. Form joints between
gutter sections by overlapping ends 1-1/2 in. in direction of flow,
applying continuous bed of sealant between overlapped ends, and
riveting at 1 in. on-center.
2. Form aluminum work with clear, sharp and uniform arrises. Hem
exposed edges.
3. Provide gutters with back edge not less than 1/2 in. higher than front
edge.
4. Provide shop-fabricated, one-piece corners with 18 in. min. returns; seal
and rivet at 1 in. on-center for rigidity.
G. Accessories: Recommended by gutter and downspout manufacturer for
conditions of use and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s
review, and compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Fasteners: Stainless steel or other non-corrosive types as recommended by
aluminum gutter and downspout manufacturer. Match color of exposed
heads with material being fastened.
2. Pop rivets: 1/8 to 3/16 in. diameter; aluminum or stainless steel shank
and mandrel. Match color of exposed heads with material being fastened.
3. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic free of sulfur;
formulated for 15-mill dry film thickness of single coat; meeting ASTM
D1187.
4. Joint Sealant: 1-part, clear, silicone-based sealant meeting ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 35. Clear, or match gutter and downspout color.
Use for seam sealant and joint filler.
a. NovaGard; NovaFlex Metal Roof & Panel Adhesive Sealant;
www.novagard.com
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
aluminum gutters and downspouts in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Structural suitability of roof eave fascia and wall construction for
attachment and support of aluminum gutters and downspouts.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 7124-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Manufactured Aluminum Gutters and Downspouts
2. Correct size of pipe boots for downspout outlets.
3. Installation of drip edge and kick-out flashing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum gutters and downspouts in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Accurately fit, align, securely fasten and install free from distortion or
defects; provide for thermal expansion; conceal fasteners where possible;
and install watertight laps, joints and seams.
2. Apply additional sealant to riveted joints and fabrications after
completion of gutter and downspout installation.
3. Apply asphalt mastic on aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious
materials and dissimilar metals.
4. Set gutter system components plumb and level; except for sloping
gutters. Install gutters level, or slightly sloped to 1/16 inch in 1 ft., in
accordance with approved submittals.
5. Hang gutters with heavy-duty, fascia mount type hangers at 32 in. max.
on-center spacing. Attach hangers through fascia to solid wood sub-
framing. Provide closer spacing, if required, to handle heavier loads.
6. Set front height of gutter based on roof slope.
7. Provide minimum 1 in. clearance between ends of gutters and abutting
vertical walls.
8. Install gutter expansion joints at 48 ft. max. on-center spacing, and not
more than 24 ft. from corners.
9. Attach downspouts to walls with wall brackets at 6 ft. max. on-center
spacing. Install offset at bottom end of downspout for connection to pipe
boot.
B. Remove protective film, if any, from aluminum surfaces upon installation.
C. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
C. Do not lean ladders on gutters.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 7233-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Roof Hatches
SECTION 07 7233
ROOF HATCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum roof hatches; certified for use on buildings located outside the
High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) with Florida Product Approval
No.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05 5133 – Metal Ladders for fixed wall ladder access to roof hatch.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org
1. ASCE/SEI 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM A240 – Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-
Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for
General Applications.
2. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Sheet and Plate.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
2. Available finishes.
3. Color charts.
4. Technical data sheets. 5. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Frame and cover assembly.
b. Support structure, mounting details, and roof flashing.
c. Hardware.
d. Safety accessories.
2. Verified field dimensions for structural support members, and rough-
opening dimensions.
3. PE stamp; signed and dated; certifying compliance with structural design
requirements.
C. Product Certification: Document confirming current approval of specified roof
hatch by Florida Department of Business & Professional Regulation
(DBPR)/Product Approval for compliance with Florida Building Code
(https://floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_srch.aspx), including:
1. Code Version.
2. FL # (State Product Approval No.).
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 7233-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Roof Hatches
3. Manufacturer.
4. Product Category.
5. Product Model, Number or Name.
6. Product Description.
7. Approval for Use Outside HVHZ.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
E. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 5-year limited warranty against defects in
materials, manufacturing, and workmanship of roof hatches, and safety
accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain roof hatches, and safety accessories through single
source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of roof hatches, and safety
accessories required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle roof hatch products in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM ROOF HATCHES
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Babcock-Davis; BA3630 Personnel Roof Hatch; www.babcockdavis.com 2. Bilco; Type S-50 Roof Hatch; www.bilco.com
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Roof hatch with fixed ladder access. 1. Use/Location: Tennis Building (Building 3), Storage 303. 2. Materials:
a. Curb and Cover: Aluminum sheet and plate meeting ASTM B209.
b. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel, meeting ASTM A240.
c. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
3. Type and Size: Single leaf, 30 by 36 in.
4. Curb: 11-gauge aluminum, 12 in. high, formed with mounting flange and
integral counterflashing;.
5. Cover: 11-gauge aluminum with 18-gauge aluminum liner to protect cover insulation;.
6. Insulation: 1 in. thick at curb and cover.
7. Weather-stripping: Vinyl, EPDM, or neoprene around perimeter of cover.
8. Hardware: Heavy-duty pintle hinges, compression spring lifting
mechanism, snap latch with interior and exterior handles, interior
padlock hasp and automatic hold-open arm.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 7233-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Roof Hatches
9. Finish: Factory-finished frame and cover with standard white powder coat. 10. Installation Method: Mechanically attached to structural support members,
and flashed into roof system.
C. Structural Design Requirements: Provide qualified professional engineer registered
in state where Project is located to perform engineering services, including:
1. Design of roof hatch frame members, frame attachments to roof structure,
hatch cover, and safety accessories for required loads, combinations of loads,
and wind speed noted on Drawings.
2. Certification that structural components of roof hatch, and safety accessory
designs, as shown on shop-drawings, meet structural load requirements of
ASCE/SEI 7, Contract Documents, and authorities having jurisdiction;
evidenced by PE stamp, signed and dated.
D. Safety Accessories: Recommended by roof hatch manufacturer for conditions of use and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including.
1. Ladder safety post for positive hand-hold, and safer ladder access through
roof hatch; aluminum; mill finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of roof hatches in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start of
installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
C. Confirm:
1. Locations of structural support members, and rough-opening dimensions.
3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install roof hatches and safety accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, Contract Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation, and weather-stripping for full contact.
C. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot be
restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 8400-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Firestopping
SECTION 07 8400
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Related Work: 1. Concrete. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Rough carpentry.
4. Thermal insulation.
5. Fireproofing.
6. Joint sealants.
7. Gypsum board.
8. Mechanical. 9. Plumbing. 10. Electrical.
1.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Firestopping systems shall provide resistance to spread of fire, and passage of
smoke and other gases according to requirements indicated, including but not
limited to the following:
1. Firestop penetrations passing through fire resistance rated wall and floor
assemblies and other locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Penetration firestopping systems shall have been tested and approved by third party testing agency.
3. Through-penetration firestop systems and devices shall resist spread of
fire, and passage of smoke and other gases according to requirements
indicated, including but not limited to the following:
a. F - rating shall equal or exceed the rating of the fire-resistive
construction assembly through which the penetration is made, as
determined by ASTM E814-08b, but shall be not less than 1-hour.
b. T - rating, in addition to F-rating, at penetrations located outside of a wall cavity, shall equal fire-resistive rating of floor construction, as determined by ASTM E814-08b, but shall be not less than 1-hour.
c. L - rating: In addition to F and T ratings, firestopping shall have
an L - rating, as determined by UL 1479, where indicated by code.
4. Fire-resistive joints shall have fire-resistance ratings indicated, as
determined by UL 2079, but not less than fire-resistance rating of
construction in which the joint occurs. 5. Firestop systems using cementitious fill materials shall not be permitted. 6. Systems shall be free of asbestos and volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 7. Where there is no specific third party tested and classified firestop system
available for a particular firestop configurations, obtain from firestop
manufacturer, an Engineering Judgement (EJ) or Equivalent Fire
Resistance Rated Assembly (EFFRA).
8. Systems used within or adjacent to occupied spaces shall be free of
volatile solvents, noxious fumes and strong odors.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 8400-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Firestopping
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawings: Submit detailed drawings of each type and size penetration
through fire-rated construction, indicating materials, dimensions, assembly
construction and rating. Indicate through-penetration firestop system design
listings, including illustrations from a qualified testing and inspection agency for
each type penetration.
B. Product data: Submit product data and installation instructions for each type of installation. Include installation details and test reports indicating that firestopping materials, systems and devices meet specified requirements and
design criteria. Indicate Classification marking of qualified testing and
inspection agency.
C. Certifications:
1. Submit written certification that firestop materials are asbestos free and that materials comply with local regulations. 2. Submit written certification that firestop materials comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC’s) and
are non-toxic to building occupants.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Applicable standards; standards of the following, as referenced herein:
1. ASTM International (ASTM).
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
B. Fire-test-response characteristics: Provide firestopping system design listing by a
testing and inspection agency in accord with the specified UL standards.
C. Acceptable installer shall be:
1. UL qualified firestop contractor.
2. Licensed by state or local authority, where applicable.
3. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects. D. Single source responsibility: Obtain firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single primary firestop systems
manufacturer.
1. Materials from different manufacturer than allowed by tested and listed
system shall not be intermixed in the same firestop system or opening.
2. Install tested and listed firestop systems before installing an Engineering
Judgement or Equivalent Fire Resistance Rated Assembly (EFFRA). E. Pre-installation meeting: Prior to beginning firestopping work, a pre-installation meeting shall be held to review work to be accomplished.
1. Contractor, Architect, firestopping system manufacturers'
representatives, installer and other subcontractors whose work involves
firestopping shall be present.
2. Contractor shall notify all parties at least seven days prior to time for
meeting. 3. Contractor shall record minutes of meeting and distribute to attending parties. F. Job mock-ups:
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 8400-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Firestopping
1. Install one of each type firestopping assembly for review by Architect prior to commencement of firestopping work. Notify Architect at least 36
hours in advance for observation of mock-up installations, including
check for objectionable or noxious fumes or odors. Should mock-ups be
unacceptable, prepare additional mock-ups until acceptable to Architect.
2. Following Architect's review, identify and preserve mock-ups as a
standard of quality for remaining firestopping work. Acceptable mock-ups may remain as part of the finished work. 1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver firestopping materials in original, unopened containers or packages with
intact and legible manufacturers’ labels identifying product and manufacturer.
B. Store and handle firestopping materials in accord with manufacturer’s product
data. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Coordinate firestopping installation with other work requiring penetrations
through fire-resistive construction. Install penetrating elements prior to
installation of firestopping systems or devices.
B. Secure inspection and approval of firestopping work by building officials prior
to concealment.
C. Support penetrating elements independently of firestopping systems or devices.
D. Do not cover up firestopping installations until Owner’s inspection agency or
Authorities Having Jurisdiction have examined each installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL:
A. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
2.2 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS:
A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1. Grace Construction Products. 2. Hilti USA. 3. 3M Fire Protection Products.
4. Nelson Firestop Products.
5. Rector Seal Corp.
6. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI).
7. Tremco, Inc.
B. System description: Field-constructed firestopping for penetrations through walls and floors composed of specified materials and accessories assembled in accord with Through-Penetration Firestopping System Numbers, listed in UL
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 8400-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Firestopping
Building Materials Directory, current Edition, and tested in accord with ASTM E814-08b.
C. Materials: UL Classified for use in through-penetration firestop systems.
1. Firestop sealant: Single-component, elastomeric silicone or endothermic
latex sealant compound; self-adhering, flexible and watertight; non-sag
and self-leveling types as required. 2. Firestop foam: Two-part, room temperature vulcanizing, silicone elastomer, non-combustible foam void seal. 3. Intumescent sealants and putties: Single-component, synthetic,
organic/inorganic intumescent elastomers.
4. Intumescent wrap strips: One-part, organic/inorganic, intumescent
elastomeric sheet; aluminum foil-faced one side.
5. Intumescent composite sheets: Composite sheets composed of
organic/inorganic intumescent elastomeric core bonded on one side to 28 ga. galvanized steel sheet and other side reinforced with steel wire mesh, covered with aluminum foil. 6. Mineral wool or ceramic fiber safing: Non-combustible fiber tested in
accord with ASTM E136-09, with melting point in excess of 2000 degrees
F.; flame spread of 15 maximum and 0 smoke development when tested
in accord with ASTM E84-09. Thickness and density shall be as required
by Through-Penetration Firestop System designs.
D. Accessories:
1. Primers, adhesives and backer rods: As required by manufacturer's product data and system designs.
2. Forming, damming and packing materials: Types as indicated in
Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.
3. Restricting collars: Manufacturer's standard design as required for
firestop system.
4. Fasteners, anchor clips, sleeves, clamps, spacers, ties, cover plates and
miscellaneous accessories: Provide as required by manufacturer's
product data and in accord with Through-Penetration Firestop System designs. 2.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP DEVICES:
A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements:
1. Grace Construction Products.
2. Hilti USA.
3. Isolatek International, Inc.
4. Nelson Firestop Products. 5. ProSet Systems, Inc. 6. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI). 7. Tremco, Inc.
B. Types: Factory-assembled, self-contained firestopping devices for penetrations
through walls and floors; UL Classified for Through-Penetration Firestop
Devices as listed in UL Building Materials Directory, current Edition, and tested
in accord with ASTM E814-08b. C. Accessories: Provide sealants, adhesives, fasteners, sleeves, clamps, spacers, anchor clips, ties and accessories in accord with manufacturer's product data and
as required for complete installation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 8400-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Firestopping
2.4 FIRESTOP BOARD
A. Acceptable products; subject to compliance with specified requirements:
1. Hilti, Inc.; CP 675T Firestop Board; www.hilti.com .
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Firestop board for use at large openings in floors and walls; meeting ASTM E84, ASTM E 814, and ASTM G21, UL 1479; UL Certified. 1. Material: Polyurethane foam; fungi resistant; color, red.
2. Board width: 26 inches.
3. Board lengths: 28 inches, or 39 inches.
4. Surface burning characteristics:
a. Flame spread index: 5.
b. Smoke developed index: 10. 5. Installation method: Built into floor or wall construction as part of complete firestopping assembly with support members, fasteners, and putty.
2.5 FIRESTOP SEALANTS:
A. Acceptable products; subject to compliance with specified requirements:
1. Grace Construction Products, FlameSafe Silicone Sealant.
2. Hilti USA, CP 601S Firestop Sealant.
3. Nelson Firestop Products, CLK.
4. 3M Fire Protection Products, Fire Barrier Silicone Sealant 2000 N/S. 5. Rector Seal Corp., Metacaulk 835+.
6. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI), SpecSeal Pen 300 Silicone Joint Sealant.
7. Tremco, Inc., Fyre-Sil.
B. Characteristics: Single-component, self-adhering, flexible, watertight,
elastomeric silicone sealant compound; UL Classified. Provide self-leveling type
for horizontal applications, non-sag type for all other applications.
2.6 SAFING: A. Acceptable products; subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1. Thermal Ceramics, Cerablanket F.S.
2. Thermafiber Inc., Thermafiber Safing Insulation.
B. Characteristics:
1. Material: Semi-rigid mineral fiber insulation, meeting ASTM C665-06,
Type 1. 2. Density: 4.0 pcf. 3. Thickness:As required to meet specified requirements. 4. Facing: Unfaced or reinforced foil facing, based on UL Design selected.
5. Fire resistance properties:
a. Melting point: Minimum of 2000̊F. when tested in accord with
ASTM C24-09.
b. Non-combustible: As defined by ASTM E136-09 and NFPA.
c. Fire hazard characteristics: Maximum flame spread of 15 and
smoke development of 5 when tested in accord with ASTM E84-09 (unfaced). PART 3 - EXECUTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 8400-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Firestopping
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine areas to receive firestopping materials prior to beginning work. Verify
that opening areas and dimensions for penetrations to receive firestopping
systems and devices do not exceed design requirements.
B. Remove projections interfering with installation. Prepare surfaces in accord with manufacturer's product data and UL Through-Penetration Firestop Devices Numbers.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer
using that manufacturer’s recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond. Do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed
surfaces. B. Masking tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of the Work.
Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing the firestopping
seal with substrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's product data and UL Classified for
Through-Penetration Firestop Devices Numbers. 2. Install firestopping materials fitted to adjacent construction to fill voids.
3. Firestop penetrations through fire-rated walls, partitions, floors and
floor/ceiling assemblies with tested assemblies in accord with UL 1479 or
with a through-penetration firestop system or device when tested in
accord with ASTM E814-08b.
4. Firestopping shall comply with code requirements.
B. Fire and smoke barrier identification: 1. Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers and smoke partitions or any other rated wall required to have protected openings shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling in
a manner acceptable to the Authority having Jurisdiction.
2. Such identification shall be above any decorative ceiling and in concealed
spaces, and near the top of the wall or barrier in unfinished spaces.
3. Such identification shall be letters a minimum of 2" (51 mm) high on a
contrasting background, spaced at 12'-0" o.c. maximum, with a minimum of one per wall or barrier. Comply with code requirements. 4. Suggested wording for fire and smoke barriers: “_____ HOUR FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER – PROTECT ALL OPENINGS.”
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 8400-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Firestopping
C. Through-penetration firestop systems and devices: 1. Install at penetrations through fire-rated floor and wall construction,
including partitions and floor/ceiling assemblies, in accord with
manufacturer's product data and UL System Numbers. Provide materials
and accessories as required.
2. Install intumescent type firestop systems where plastic piping, cable,
conduit and other combustible items, including insulated metal pipes, penetrate fire-rated construction. 3. At Contractor's option, through-penetration firestop devices of similar function may be installed in lieu of firestop systems.
4. Do not remove forming materials unless specified in system designs.
D. Firestop sealant: Seal perimeters, voids and joints of fire-rated walls and
partitions, including abutment of floor and roof or ceiling structure, and flutes of
metal decking. 1. If required by UL Design, install mineral wool or ceramic fiber in cavities, packed full and tight with allowance for sealant installation. 2. Seal both faces of walls and partitions with firestop sealant. Tool sealant
flush with adjacent finish.
3. In accord with UL Fire Resistance Directory Designs, packed concrete and
masonry joints shall be sealed using firestop sealant or using sealant as
specified in Joint Sealants section.
E. Mineral fiber safing:
1. Install safing in cavities of penetrations through non-rated floor and wall construction, including spaces around piping, conduits, cables and duct
penetrations.
2. Install safing in voids and joints of non-rated walls and partitions
abutting metal decking of floor and roof structures. Pack flutes of metal
decking solid with safing material.
3. Safing shall be installed at joints and penetrations in non-rated
construction not exposed to view and concealed in finish work. Secure
safing by compressing into voids or joints and using manufacturer's standard clips or closure plates as required. F. Seal voids and joints of non-rated walls and partitions abutting concrete floor
and roof construction using sealant as specified in other sections.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Inspection: Independent inspection agency employed and paid by Owner, will
examine penetration firestopping in accord with ASTM E2174 and ASTM E2393. Inspection agency will examine firestopping and will determine, in general, that firestopping has been installed in compliance with tested and listed firestop system, and that installation process conforms to FM 4991 - Standard for
Approval of Firestop Contractors or UL Qualified Firestop Contractor Program.
B. Inspector will advise contractor of deficiencies noted within one working day.
C. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until inspection agency has verified firestop installation complies with requirements of Contract Documents.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 8400-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Firestopping
D. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with requirements of tested and listed system design.
3.5 CLEANING:
A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as
work progresses. Use methods and cleaning materials approved by
manufacturers of firestopping products and or assemblies in which openings and joints occur. B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with
contaminating substances.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 8500-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Duct Wrap Fire Protection System
SECTION 07 8500
DUCT WRAP FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Work of this section includes a duct wrap fire protection system for commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Firestopping.
2. Joint sealants.
3. Kitchen hood exhaust duct. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
A. Wrap shall be mold resistant.
B. Two-layer applications of the fire barrier duct wrap shall meet the criteria of ASTM E 2336 “Standard Test Methods for Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure Systems”.
C. Fire barrier duct wrap as single-layer fire resistant wrap application shall pass
UL 1978 Grease Duct test and ASTM E 119 engulfment. D. Fire barrier duct wrap shall protect combustible constructions at zero clearance throughout the entire enclosure system.
E. Firestop water tight sealants used in combination with fire barrier duct wrap
shall provide an effective firestop when duct penetrates fire rated walls and floors.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Fire Barrier Duct Wrap shall have been tested in accord with the following:
1. ASTM E 2336 Standard Test Methods for Fire Resistive Grease Duct
Enclosure Systems. 2. UL 1978 Grease Ducts (Temperature Test - 500° F (260° C) Flue Gases &
Abnormal Temperature Test).
3. ASTM E 119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials.
4. ASTM E 814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration
Fire Stops.
5. ASTM E 136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Material in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750° C (1382° F). 6. ASTM C 518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
7. ASTM C 411 Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-
Temperature Thermal Insulation.
8. ASTM C 1338 Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings. 9. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 8500-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Duct Wrap Fire Protection System
B. Thermal Conductivity:
Temperature Btu-In. Hr – ft2 – F
1. 500° F (260° C) 0.417
2. 1000° F (537° C) 0.922
3. 1500° F (815° C) 1.69
4. 1800° F (982° C) 2.27
C. R-Value: Single layer of Fire Barrier Duct Wrap (1-1/2”0 at 77° F (25° C): 5.7
1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer’s product data and test data indicating fabrications and installation details.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER: A. Acceptable product: 3M, Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 15A.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Product description: Fire resistant wrap consisting of a patented inorganic blanket encapsulated with a scrim reinforced foil and used to fire rate commercial kitchen grease ducts. Wrap shall be a proven alternative to 1 or 2 hour fire resistant rated shaft enclosures.
B. Size: 1.5” by 24” by 20” or 1.5” by 48” by 20”.
C. Color: Brown/greenish.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install fire resistant wrap in accord with manufacturer’s product data. 3.2 PROTECTION:
A. Protect installed fire resistant wrap from damage. Repair damaged wrap.
B. Fire resistant wrap shall be free of damage at Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 9200-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Joint Sealants
SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Section Includes: 1. Low-modulus silicone sealant. 2. Medium-modulus silicone sealant. 3. Silicone sealant for wet areas
4. Acrylic sealant.
5. Paintable acrylic-latex caulking compound.
6. FDA approved sealants for food service areas.
B. Definitions: 1. Sealant: A weatherproof elastomer used in filling and sealing joints, having properties of adhesion, cohesion, extensibility under tension, compressibility and recovery; designed to make joints air and watertight.
Material is designed generally for application in exterior joints and for
joints subject to movement.
2. Caulking compound: A material used in filling joints and seams, having
properties of adhesion and cohesion; not required to have extensibility
and recovery properties, generally for application in interior joints not
subject to movement.
3. Caulk: The process of filling joints, without regard to type of material. 4. Joint failure: A caulked joint exhibiting one or more of the following
characteristics:
a. Air and/or water leakage.
b. Migration and/or reversion.
c. Loss of adhesion.
d. Loss of cohesion.
e. Failure to cure.
f. Discoloration. g. Staining of adjacent work. h. Development of bubbles, air pockets or voids.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product description, indicating
conformance with specified requirements and installation instructions for each
type of sealant. Indicate preparation and priming requirements for each
substrate condition. B. Color samples: 1. Samples shall be actual materials or literature depicting actual colors of
standard color materials. Architect reserves the right to reject work not in
conformance with selected colors, based upon samples submitted.
2. Submit samples of manufacturer's standard material colors for standard
color sealants.
C. Adhesion compatibility test results: Submit a letter from sealant manufacturer indicating adhesion and compatibility testing has been performed and that materials are compatible and that adhesion is acceptable. Indicate requirements
for primers or special preparation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 9200-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Joint Sealants
D. FDA Certification: Submit letter of certification from sealant manufacturer
indicating that specified FDA Approved Sealant complies with FDA regulations
and certifiable grades.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Applicable standards as referenced herein: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). 2. Food and Drug Administration (FDA).
B. Adhesion compatibility tests: Perform tests on actual samples of aluminum
framing systems and masonry components, to determine that materials are
compatible and that adhesion is acceptable. Identify requirements for primers or
special preparation.
1. Test structural sealants in accord with ASTM C1135-00(2005). C. VOC content of interior sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant primers for nonporous substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant primers for porous substrates: 775 g/L.
D. Mock-up:
1. Prepare, caulk and finish one mock-up sample of each joint condition. 2. Sample joints shall be approved by Architect prior to beginning work.
Approved, undamaged mock-up joints shall serve as a standard of
quality for the remainder of the work.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS:
A. Weather conditions:
1. Install no materials under adverse weather conditions or when
temperatures are below or above those recommended by manufacturer's product data or when substrate moisture content is above manufacturer's recommended level. 2. Proceed with work only when forecasted weather conditions are
favorable for joint cure and development of high early bond strength.
3. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations,
install materials only when temperatures are in lower third of
manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range.
B. Protection of adjacent surfaces: 1. Protect by applying masking material or manipulating application equipment to keep materials in joint. If masking materials are used,
allow no tape to touch cleaned surfaces to receive sealant. Remove tape
immediately after caulking, before surface skin begins to form.
2. Remove misapplied materials from surfaces by using solvents and
methods recommended by manufacturer.
3. At surfaces from which materials have been removed, restore to original condition and appearance. 1.5 WARRANTIES:
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 9200-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Joint Sealants
A. Installer's warranty: Warrant work to be watertight and free from defects in materials and workmanship, including joint failure, for a period of five years.
Form of warranty shall be as included in Division 00.
B. Exterior silicone sealant material warranty: Warrant exterior silicone sealants to
be free from defects in materials and to provide structural adhesion, watertight
weatherseal and non-staining of adjacent materials for a period of twenty years. C. Warranties shall begin at Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LOW MODULUS SILICONE SEALANT:
A. Acceptable products; subject to compliance with specified requirements:
1. Dow Corning Corp., #790. 2. Pecora Corp., #890. 3. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company, SpecTrem 1.
B. Characteristics:
1. Type: One-part, low modulus silicone rubber; meeting ASTM C920-08,
Type S, Grade NS, minimum Class 50.
2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.
2.2 MEDIUM MODULUS SILICONE SEALANT:
A. Acceptable products; subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1. Dow Corning Corp., #795.
2. Pecora Corp., #895.
3. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company, SpecTrem 2.
B. Characteristics:
1. Type: One-part silicone rubber; meeting ASTM C920-08, Type S, Grade
NS, minimum Class 50.
2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect. 2.3 SILICONE SEALANT FOR WET AREAS: A. Acceptable products:
1. Dow Corning Corp., 786 Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant.
2. Franklin International, Titebond Kitchen & Bath Sealant.
3. Pecora Corp., #898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant.
B. Characteristics: 1. Type: One-part silicone rubber, mildew- and stain-resistant. 2. Color: Clear, white or off-white, as selected by Architect.
2.5 ACRYLIC SEALANT:
A. Acceptable products:
1. Bostik, Chem-Calk 600.
2. Franklin International, Titebond Painters Plus Caulk.
3. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company, Mono 555. B. Characteristics: 1. Type: One-part, acrylic polymer sealant.
2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 9200-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Joint Sealants
2.6 PAINTABLE ACRYLIC-LATEX CAULKING COMPOUND:
A. Acceptable products:
1. BASF Building Systems, Sonolastic Sonolac.
2. Bostik, Chem-Calk Painter’s Calk.
3. Franklin International, Titebond Painters Caulk.
4. Pecora Corp., AC-20 Acrylic Latex. 5. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company, Tremflex 834. B. Characteristics: Flexible, paintable, non-staining, non-bleeding acrylic emulsion.
2.7 FDA APPROVED SEALANTS FOR FOOD SERVICE AREAS:
A. Acceptable products:
1. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company, Proglaze Silicone Construction Sealant.
2. Pecora Corp., #863 Silicone. B. Characteristics: 1. Type: One-part, moisture-curing silicone rubber; FDA Approved for use
in indirect food contact areas.
2. Color: Standard colors as selected by Architect, approved by FDA.
2.8 ACCESSORY MATERIALS:
A. Joint cleaner: Type recommended by material manufacturer for substrates
indicated.
B. Joint primer/sealer: Type recommended by material manufacturer for
substrates, conditions and exposures indicated.
C. Bond breaker tape: Plastic tape applied to contact surfaces where bond to
substrate or joint filler must be avoided for material performance.
D. Sealant backer rod: Compressible rod stock as recommended by sealant
manufacturer for compatibility with sealant. Provide size and shape of rod to control joint depth. E. Tooling agent: Agent recommended by material manufacturer to ensure contact
of material with inner joint faces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Clean joints of debris and projections including shims. B. Clean joint surfaces immediately before caulking joints. Remove dirt, insecure
coatings, moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond.
C. Etch masonry joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity, unless material
manufacturer's product data indicates that alkalinity does not interfere with
bond and performance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with dilute ammonia solution; rinse with clean water and allow to dry before caulking.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 9200-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Joint Sealants
D. Roughen joint surfaces of non-porous materials, unless material manufacturer's product data indicates equal bond strength as porous surfaces. Rub with fine
abrasive cloth or wool to produce dull sheen.
3.2 APPLICATION:
A. Comply with caulking material manufacturer's product data and ASTM C1193
except where more stringent requirements are specified. B. Prime joint surfaces where recommended by material manufacturer. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjacent surfaces.
C. Install backer rod for caulking materials, except where recommended by material
manufacturer to be omitted for application indicated.
1. Place backer rod to maintain recommended sealant thickness and profile.
2. Place rod at depth to provide sealant manufacturer’s recommended sealant depth. 3. Do not twist rod during installation. 4. Place rod to minimize possibility of extrusion when joint is compressed.
5. Install bond breaker tape in lieu of backer rod for shallow, closed joints
and as recommended by manufacturer’s product data.
D. Employ installation techniques which will ensure that materials are deposited in
uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete wetting
of joint bond surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface
and a vertical surface, fill joint to form slight cove so that joint will not trap moisture and debris.
E. Do not allow materials to overflow onto adjacent surfaces. Prevent staining of
adjacent surfaces.
F. Remove excess and misplaced materials as work progresses. Clean adjoining
surfaces to remove misplaced materials, without damage to adjacent surfaces or
finishes. G. Interior joints: At interior joints and seams at abutting and adjacent materials, recess caulking compound 3/16" in joints wider than 1/4". At joints 1/4" or less
in width, tool caulking flush.
H. Tool joints of non-sag sealant to concave profile and smooth, uniform surface,
flush with edges of substrate. Maintain sealant depth-to-width ratio in accord
with manufacturer's product data. I. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in accord with manufacturer's product data to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface
durability. Protect uncured surfaces from contamination and physical damage.
3.3 CAULKING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior vertical expansion joints: Low modulus silicone sealant.
B. Exterior joints in masonry, including control joints: Low modulus silicone sealant.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 07 9200-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Joint Sealants
C. Joints in conjunction with exterior insulation and finish systems (EIFS): Low modulus silicone sealant.
D. Exterior and interior joints at perimeter of aluminum framing systems: Medium
modulus silicone sealant.
E. Interior joints at perimeter of hollow metal frames: Medium modulus silicone sealant. F. Exterior joints between wall finish and conduit and pipe penetrations, base plates
of light fixtures, signage supports, and other items applied to exterior wall
surface: Medium modulus silicone sealant.
G. Interior concealed bedding joints and thresholds: Acrylic sealant.
H. Tile expansion and control joint sealant: Refer to Tiling section. I. Firestopped joints: Firestop sealant as specified in Firestopping section.
J. Typical interior joints and seams at abutting and adjacent materials except as
specified herein: Acrylic-latex caulking compound.
K. Interior joints and seams at abutting and adjacent materials in kitchen areas,
including joints around kitchen equipment: FDA Approved Sealant.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1113-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
SECTION 08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hollow metal doors and frames; certified for use on buildings located outside the High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) with Florida Product Approval No. 2. Door lights.
3. Door louvers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 2100 – Allowances for door hardware.
2. Section 07 2100 – Thermal Insulation for mineral-fiber insulation fill
inside hollow metal frames.
3. Section 09 9100 – Painting for shop-finish of factory-primed doors and
frames.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): www.ada.gov
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law.
2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 – Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical
Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors, and Hardware
Reinforcings.
3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 – Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on
Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
4. ANSI/SDI A250.8 – Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
(SDI – 100).
5. ANSI/SDI A250.10 – Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime
Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
6. ANSI/SDI A250.11 – Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel
Frames.
7. ANSI Z97.1 – Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings – Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org
1. Standards ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
C. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1113-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
2. ASTM A1008 – Standard Specification for Steel, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Brake Hardenable.
3. ASTM A1011 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-
Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.
4. ASTM C1036 – Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
5. ASTM C1048 – Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully
Tempered Flat Glass.
6. ASTM C1363 – Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of
Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box
Apparatus.
7. ASTM E283 – Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Skylights, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under
Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
8. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in
Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.
9. ASTM E2190 – Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.
D. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA):
www.buildershardware.com
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and
Frames.
E. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): www.cpsc.gov
1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 – Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
F. Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA): www.fgiaonline.org
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. AAMA 501.2 – Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage
Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped
Glazing Systems.
2. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA):
a. IGCC/IGMA Certification Program for the Harmonized
Insulating Glass Standard (ASTM E2190).
G. Steel Door Institute (SDI): www.steeldoor.org
1. SDI-117 – Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
2. Factory-priming.
3. Technical data sheets.
B. Templates: Door hardware templates submitted by door hardware supplier to
door manufacturer for factory-preparation of doors and frames to receive
hardware items.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1113-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
C. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically prepared for this Project, including: 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details: a. Door number and type, room name, size, thickness, hand, hardware set, frame type, door and frame finish for each door.
Use door numbers and room names shown on Drawings.
b. Elevation of each door type and frame, with locations of blocking,
cutouts, undercuts, hardware reinforcements, mortises, holes and
preparations for hardware installation.
c. Details of door construction, corner fabrication, core types, edge
profiles, metal thickness, glass lights, louvers, and trim.
d. Details of frame construction, corner fabrication, metal thicknesses, profiles, and anchors.
e. Details of glass, glass pocket, glazing materials.
f. Factory-priming.
D. Samples:
1. Color: 8 by 8 in. Shop-finished swatch of custom color and gloss selected
by Architect, prepared on door face material; for final selection and
verification.
2. Door Corner Sections: Sets of 12 by 12 in. or larger samples of door
construction, lights, and louvers fabricated with materials noted on
approved submittals; for verification, showing:
a. Metal faces, vertical-edges, top and bottom, core materials, and
fabrication.
b. Corner construction, and hinge preparation.
c. Glass, glazing materials, and light frame.
d. Louver construction, frame and trim.
e. Factory-primed surfaces.
f. Workmanship.
2. Frame Corner Sections: 12 by 12 in. sample of frame construction,
fabricated with materials noted on approved submittals; for verification,
showing:
a. Profile.
b. Corner construction, and hinge preparation.
c. Floor and wall anchors.
d. Silencers.
e. Factory-primed surfaces.
f. Workmanship.
E. Product Certification: Document confirming current approval of specified hollow
metal doors and frames by Florida Department of Business & Professional
Regulation (DBPR)/Product Approval for compliance with Florida Building
Code (https://floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_srch.aspx ), including:
1. Code Version.
2. FL # (State Product Approval Number).
3. Manufacturer.
4. Product Category.
5. Product Model, No. or Name.
6. Product Description.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1113-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
7. Approval for Use Outside HVHZ.
F. Manufacturer’s Test Reports: Documents prepared by independent testing
agency, confirming identical tested hollow metal assemblies meet design
requirements for hollow metal assemblies specified for this Project.
G. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
H. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through single source
from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of hollow metal doors, frames
and hardware required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle hollow metal doors and frames in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Mark each frame at top hinge and on outside of carton with destination door
mark shown on door schedule.
C. Store doors and frames in temperature and humidity controlled room with temperatures from 50 to 90 degrees F, and relative humidity from 30 to 50 percent.
D. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Ceco Door Products; www.cecodoor.com
2. Curries Steel Doors and Frames; www.curries.com
3. Basis of Design: Steelcraft; www.steelcraft.com
4. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Standard, hollow metal doors and frames; factory-primed and prepared for hardware; meeting ANSI/SDI A250.4, ANSI/SDI A250.6, and
ANSI/SDI A250.8 for doors, frames, frame anchors, and hardware
reinforcements; and ADA Standards, or ANSI A117.1 as applicable to state law.
1. Use/Location: Interior and exterior hollow metal doors and frames, and
frames for wood doors, as shown on Drawings.
2. Design: As shown on Drawings.
3. Classification: Level 3 (Extra Heavy-Duty), and Level A Physical
Performance; Model 2 (Seamless).
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1113-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
4. Finish: Factory-primed in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.10 for shop-
painted finish in accordance with Section 09 9100. 5. Color: As shown on Drawings, or selected by design professional. 6. Doors: a. Construction: Seamless fully welded flush door with 1-piece face
sheets laminated to core, 1/8 in. in 2 in. bevel on both side edges,
and square top and bottom edges with flush mounted steel
channel closures.
b. Face Material:
1) Interior Doors: 16-gauge (0.053 in.) cold-rolled steel
meeting ASTM A1008, CR (Cold Rolled) CS (Commercial
Steel), Type B carbon steel; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
2) Exterior Doors: 16-gauge (0.053 in.) metallic-coated steel
sheet meeting ASTM A653, CS (Commercial Steel), Type B
carbon steel with G60 zinc coating (galvanized) or A60
zinc-iron alloy coating (galvannealed); stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness.
c. Core:
1) Interior Doors: Structural kraft-paper honeycomb. 2) Exterior Doors: Polyurethane. d. Thickness: 1-3/4 in. e. Size: As shown on Drawings.
f. Exterior Door Properties:
1) Thermal Resistance: R-2.67; in accordance with ASTM
C1363.
2) Air Infiltration: 0.34 ft.3/min./ft.2; in accordance with
ASTM E283; for single-swing door with weatherstripping and door bottom seal. 7. Frames: a. Construction: Fully welded.
b. Material: Match face material of door.
c. Size: As shown on Drawings.
d. Profiles:
1) Masonry Frames: Unequal double rabbet with 5/8 in. high
fixed stop soffit, 2 in. wide faces, and 1/2 in. returns without backbends. 2) Drywall Frames: Unequal double rabbet with 2 in. faces, 1/2 in. returns with backbends, and 5/8 in. high fixed
stop soffit.
3) Cased Opening Frames: Flat soffit with 2 in. wide faces,
and 1/2 in. returns with backbends.
4) Casing Ready Frames: Unequal double rabbet with 5/8 in.
high fixed stop soffit, and 2 in. wide faces without wall returns for installation of wood casing. e. Floor Anchors: 18-gauge (0.042 in.) 1) Fixed: L-shaped; welded flush on bottom .
2) Adjustable: 2-piece with mounting bracket welded to
inside bottom of frame, and L-shaped adjustable anchor
fastened to bracket with screws..
f. Jamb Anchors: 18-gauge (0.042 in.)
C. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1113-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
1. Door Edge Closures: Close top and bottom edges with 16-gauge (0.053
in.) steel channels with channel webs installed flush with door edges..
2. Mortar Guards: 27-gauge (0.016 in.) min. thickness, formed steel guards fabricated from same material as frames; spot-weld inside frame.
3. Exposed Fasteners: Countersunk, phillips flat head screws, unless noted
otherwise.
4. Silencers: Rubber.
2.2 INSULATED GLASS DOOR LIGHTS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: Cardinal; Low-E 366; www.cardinalcorp.com 2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Dual pane, insulated glass unit; meeting CPSC 16 CFR 1201,
Category I and II; ANSI Z97.1; ASTM E2190, and ASTM C1048, Condition A and
B (uncoated and coated surfaces), Type I ( transparent), Class I (clear), Quality q3
(glazing select), Kind FT (fully tempered); with removeable plastic protective
film on outside and inside faces.
1. Use/Location: Exterior doors, as shown on Drawings.
2. Certification: IGCC/IGMA certified, listed, and labeled; meeting ASTM E2190. 3. Unit Description: a. Outside Light: 1/4 in., clear tempered glass with low-E coating on Surface No. 2. b. Inside Light: 1/4 in., clear tempered glass.
c. Spacer: 1/4 in., continuous flexible foam, dual sealed, non-metallic
spacer; standard black color.
d. Air Space: Argon filled.
e. Unit Thickness: Nominal 3/4 in.
4. Installation Method: Door light trim kit with glazing materials as noted
on approved shop-drawings.
2.3 SAFETY GLASS DOOR LIGHTS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Vitro Architectural Glass; Herculite Tempered Glass;
www.vitroglazings.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Single pane, clear tempered glass; meeting CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Category I and II; ANSI Z97.1; and ASTM C1048, Condition A (uncoated
surfaces), Type I ( transparent), Class I (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), Kind
FT (fully tempered).
1. Use/Location: Interior doors, as shown on Drawings.
2. Thickness: 3/16 in.
3. Installation Method: Door light trim kit with glazing materials as noted
on approved shop-drawings.
2.4 DOOR LOUVERS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1113-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
1. Basis of Design: Air Louvers; 1400A; www.activarcpg.com
2. Anemostat; SRDL; www.anemostat.com 3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Stationary, weather-proof louver body with fixed mounting flange and removable clamping frame; Z-shaped blades designed to protect ventilation openings in exterior doors with 36 percent free area.
1. Use/Location: 1-3/4 in. thick, exterior doors.
2. Material: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T5, 0.063 in. thick.
3. Size: As shown on Drawings.
4. Finish: Match hollow metal door where installed.
5. Color: As selected by Architect.
6. Installation Method: Fit louver body into pre-cut door opening and
mechanically attach removable clamping frame.
C. Accessories:
1. Bird Screen: 1/2 in. square mesh, 0.063 in. aluminum wire in removable
1/2 in. wide, flattened aluminum frame.
2. Insect Screen: 18/16 mesh, 0.011 in. aluminum wire in removable 1/2 in.
wide, flattened aluminum frame.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal doors and frames without warp, buckle, or other defects; accurately formed to required sizes and profiles, with min. radius for metal
thickness; meeting ANSI A250.8 and SDI-117 tolerance requirements.
B. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Close top and bottom edges with flush closures or channels of same
material as face sheets.
2. Provide weep-holes in bottom edge of exterior doors, and seal top edges
to prevent water intrusion.
3. Factory cut openings for doors lights and louvers, and reinforce cut edges
with flush closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
C. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Welded Frames: a. Fabricate with mitered, fully welded corners and seamless face
joints, with all joints, including face, flange and throat aligned,
dressed, and ground smooth; no mechanical interlocking.
b. Tack-weld, temporary spreader bars across bottom of jambs and
mullions for shipping and handling.
1. Mortar Guards: Spot-weld mortar guards to frame over backs of hardware mortises at frames in masonry walls receiving solid mortar fill. 2. Floor Anchors: Spot-weld floor anchors to bottom of door jambs with 4 welds min. at each anchor.
3. Jamb Anchors: See Part 3, Installation.
4. Silencers: Drill stops of non-weather-stripped doors, and ship door
silencers loose for installation following shop-painted finish, as follows:
a. Single Door Frames: 3 silencers at strike stop.
b. Double Door Frames: 2 silencers at head stop.
D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware, including: cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping in accordance with Contract Documents, approved submittals, templates, ANSI/SDI A250.6, and ANSI/BHMA A156.115.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1113-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
1. Locate hardware in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.8, or as shown on
Drawings. 2. Reinforce hollow metal doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted hardware.
E. Trim: Provide trim around door lights with mitered corners and hairline joints,
as shown on Drawings.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
hollow metal doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove temporary shipping spreaders, and install installation spreaders
provided by installer in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.11
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-
mounted door hardware.
C. Shop-paint factory-primed doors and frames in accordance with Section 09
09100, before delivery to Project site.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install hollow metal doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, approved submittals, and ANSI/SDI A250.11.
B. Hollow Metal Frames:
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced until
permanent anchors are set. Remove installation spreaders and braces, after completion of wall construction, and restore damage to frames from spreader attachments. a. Place welded frames before construction of enclosing walls at new
construction.
2. Floor Anchors: Install floor anchor at each jamb and mullion extended to
floor. At locations where wall conditions prevent installation of floor
anchors; install 1-additional wall anchor at each jamb located 6 in. max.
from bottom of frame. 3. Jamb Anchors: a. Locate anchors on hinge jamb at top of hinge reinforcement, at corresponding heights on strike jamb, and as follows:
1) 2 anchors each jamb up to 60 in. height.
2) 3 anchors each jamb from 60 to 90 in. height.
3) 4 anchors each jamb from 90 to 120 in. height.
4) Install 1-additional anchor at each jamb for each 24 in. or
less above 120 in. height.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1113-9
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
b. Locate post-installed anchors 6 in. max. from top and bottom of
frame and spaced equally on-center. 4. Frame Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal frames, as follows: a. Square: Plus or minus 1/16 in., measured at door rabbet on line 90 degrees from jamb, perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 in., measured at jambs on
horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 in., measured at opposite face corners
of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumb: Plus or minus 1/16 in., measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Hang swinging doors, with narrow face of door against
stops in closed position; and shim hinges as necessary to align doors with frames; meeting required clearances, as follows:
1. Non-Fire-Rated Doors:
a. Gap Between Door and Frame: 1/8 in. plus or minus 1/32 in.
b. Gap Between Meeting Edges of Double Doors: 3/16 in. plus or
minus 1/16 in.
c. Gap Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 to 3/32 in. plus or minus
1/32 in.
d. Gap Between Door Bottom and Top of Threshold: 3/8 in. plus or
minus 1/32 in. e. Undercut Between Bottoms of Door and Frame: 3/4 in. plus or minus 1/32 in.
D. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
E. Touchup Painting: Repair and sand smooth any damaged areas and apply paint
system touchup in accordance with Section 09 9100.
3.4 FIELD TESTING
A. Exterior Door and Frame Testing: Provide independent testing agency meeting
ASTM E329, and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to perform tests,
and submit reports to Architect.
B. Water-Spray Test: Before start of interior finish work at exterior door and frame
openings, and covering with subsequent construction, perform water-spray tests
at doors and frames in accordance with AAMA 501.2
1. Notify Owner, Architect, and installer 7-days before date and time of
tests.
2. Perform minimum of 2-tests for leaks at each door and frame.
3. Submit test reports to Architect within 3-days of performing services.
C. Repair, or remove and replace components of door, frame and flashing systems,
at no cost to Owner, where tests show water penetration and non-compliance
with test requirements.
D. Perform testing and remedial door and frame work until watertight installation is confirmed and approved, at no cost to Owner.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
1. Provide temporary covering at doors and frames to protect from painting, and other wet-work.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1113-10
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
2. Provide temporary covers at door sills, and thresholds to protect from
construction traffic, and other damage.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1433-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Stile and Rail Wood Doors
SECTION 08 1433
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior stile and rail wood doors.
2. Wood frames.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 2100 – Allowances for door hardware.
2. Section 06 1053 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry for rough-buck frames.
3. Section 09 9100 – Painting for shop-painted finish of factory-primed doors
and frames.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): www.ada.gov
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law.
C. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA): www.wdma.com
1. ANSI/WDMA I.S.6A – Industry Standard for Interior Architectural
Wood Stile & Rail Doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Sample warranty form.
B. Templates: Door hardware templates submitted by door hardware supplier to
door manufacturer for factory-preparation of doors and frames to receive
hardware items.
C. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Door number and type, room name, size, thickness, hand, swing,
hardware set, frame type, door and frame finish, for each opening.
Use door numbers and room names shown on Drawings.
b. Elevation of each door with locations of cutouts, undercuts,
mortises; hardware preparations, and holes for hardware
installation.
c. Elevation of each door frame with hardware preparations, and
holes for hardware installation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1433-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Stile and Rail Wood Doors
d. Details of door construction, core types, edge profiles, panels, and
panel molding.
e. Details of frame construction, stops, silencers, casing; clearances
and interface with rough-buck frame, fastener type and spacing,
partition thickness and construction.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with Project door and
frame elevations, and construction details.
3. Verified field dimensions for wall thicknesses and rough-buck frames,
with recommended clearances for door and frame installation.
D. Samples:
1. Door Corner Sections: Sets of 12 by 12 in. samples for door construction,
stiles and rails, and panels fabricated with materials noted on approved
submittals; for verification, showing:
a. Veneer species and grain, solid wood edges, and core.
b. Corner construction and joinery.
c. Panel construction and molding.
d. Factory-primed wood surfaces.
e. Workmanship.
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Installation.
4. Maintenance.
F. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited life time warranty against defects in
materials and workmanship.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors and frames through single
source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of wood doors, frames and
hardware required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle wood doors and frames in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1433-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Stile and Rail Wood Doors
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install wood doors and frames until building is enclosed with
HVAC and lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner
occupancy, and wet work is complete and dry.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Karona Door; www.karonadoor.com
2. Oshkosh Door Company; www.oshkoshdoor.com
3. VT Industries; Eggers Collection; www.vtindustries.com
4. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Custom fabricated, interior stile and rail wood doors, and frames;
factory-primed and prepared for hardware; shop-finished; meeting
ANSI/WDMA I.S.6A, and ADA Standards, or ANSI A117.1 as applicable to state
law.
1. Design: Match existing, as shown on Drawings.
2. Type: Stile and rail.
3. Door Sizes: As shown on Drawings.
a. Stile Width: 6 in., unless noted otherwise.
b. Top Rail Width: 6 in., unless noted otherwise.
c. Mullion Width: 5 in., unless noted otherwise.
d. Intermediate Rail Width: 5 in., unless noted otherwise.
e. Bottom Rail Width: 10 in., unless noted otherwise.
4. Fabrication:
a. Frames: Rabbeted corner joints and T-stops; shipped loose;
assembled on-site with adhesive and mechanical fasteners.
b. Stiles and Rails: Assembled with mortised and tenoned joints, and
adhesive. 5. Finishes: a. Doors, and Frames: Factory-primed.
6. Properties:
a. Performance Duty Level: Extra Heavy Duty; in accordance with
ANSI/WDMA I.S.6A.
b. Aesthetic Grade: Custom; in accordance with ANSI/WDMA
I.S.6A.
7. Installation Method: Frames centered in rough-opening, shimmed, and
anchored with screws through heads, jambs, and shims into structural
framing.
C. Components:
1. Stiles, Rails, and Panels: Specified veneer bonded over core, with solid
hardwood edges matching face veneer on exposed stile edges.
a. Standard Core: Structural composite lumber.
b. Veneer Thickness: 1/32 in., minimum.
c. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 in.
d. Panel Type: Match existing.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1433-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Stile and Rail Wood Doors
e. Panel Thickness: Match existing.
f. Door Edge Profile: 1/8 in. bevel on strike edge; other edges
square.
2. Veneer for Painted Doors: Manufacturer’s standard close grained
hardwood for painted finish, plain sliced.
3. Frames, Stops, Casing, and Door Panel Molding: Solid close grained
hardwood for painted finish; match veneer.
a. Frame Thickness: 1-1/8 in.
b. Jamb Width: Match wall thickness
c. Casing: Match size and profile of casing sample submitted by
design professional.
d. Other Trim: Size and profile; as selected by design professional.
4. Door Hardware: Provide in accordance with Section 01 2100.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of stile
and rail wood doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
ANSI/WDMA I.S.6A, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Clearances at rough openings for door frame installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Shop-paint factory-primed wood doors and frames in accordance with Section 09
9100; match custom color and gloss sample submitted by design professional.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
ANSI/WDMA I.S.6A, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Center door frames in rough-openings, shim jambs straight and vertical;
set units plumb, level, and square without twist or distortion. 2. Fasten door frames with screws through heads and jambs into wall framing. 3. Fit and align doors; install hardware.
4. Lubricate, test, and adjust door hardware for smooth operation without
binding, or distortion.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install rough-opening widths and heights with clearances
3/4 in. larger than unit widths and heights with tolerances, as follow:
1. Plumb: 1/8 in.
2. Level: 1/8 in.
3. Twist: 1/8 in.
4. Square: 1/8 in. for units up to 20 ft.2; and 1/4 in. for units over 20 ft.2
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1433-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Stile and Rail Wood Doors
C. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1443-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Stile and Rail Wood Doors
SECTION 08 1443
ALUMINUM-CLAD STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum-clad stile and rail wood doors, sidelights, and transoms;
certified for use on buildings located outside the High Velocity Hurricane
Zone (HVHZ) with Florida Product Approval No.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 2100 – Allowances for door hardware.
2. Section 06 1053 – Millwork for door casing, and as shown on ID
Drawings.
3. Section 09 9100 – Painting for shop-painted or stained interior surfaces of
wood door and frame components.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): www.ada.gov
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law.
2. ANSI Z97.1 – Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings – Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
C. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C834 – Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
2. ASTM C1036 – Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
3. ASTM C1048 – Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully
Tempered Flat Glass.
4. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in
Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.
5. ASTM E2112 – Standard Practice for Installation of Exterior Windows,
Doors and Skylights.
6. ASTM E2190 – Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit
Performance and Evaluation.
D. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): www.cpsc.gov
1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 – Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
E. Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA): www.fgiaonline.org
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 – North American
Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and
Skylights (NAFS).
b. AAMA 501.2 – Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage
Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped
Glazing Systems.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1443-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Stile and Rail Wood Doors
c. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance
Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing
Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
2. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA):
a. IGCC/IGMA Certification Program for the Harmonized
Insulating Glass Standard (ASTM E2190).
F. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): www.nfrc.org
1. NFRC Certified Products Directory.
2. NFRC 100 – Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors.
3. NFRC 200 – Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat
Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence.
G. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA): www.wdma.com
1. WDMA Hallmark Certification Program.
2. WDMA I.S.4 – Industry Specification for Preservative Treatment for
Millwork.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
2. Factory-priming.
3. Cladding colors.
4. Technical data sheets.
5. Standard details applicable to this Project.
6. Sample warranty forms.
B. Templates: Door hardware templates with template reference numbers, or
physical hardware items submitted by hardware supplier to door manufacturer
for factory-preparation of doors and frames to receive hardware items.
C. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Door number and type, room name, size, thickness, hand, swing,
hardware set, frame type, door and frame finish for each opening.
Use door numbers and room names shown on Drawings.
b. Elevation of each door with divided light patterns, locations of
blocking, cutouts, undercuts, hardware reinforcements, mortises,
and holes for hardware installation.
c. Elevation of each door frame with sidelights, transoms, divided
light patterns, hardware preparations, and holes for hardware
installation.
d. Wood species, finish, and color.
e. Cladding, finish, and color.
f. Details of door construction, corner fabrication, cladding, core
types, edge profiles, door panels, and door lights.
g. Details of frame construction, corner fabrication, cladding, mull
caps, jamb extensions, casing, sills, weatherstripping, fastener
types and spacing, wall depths, and sill pan with end dams.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1443-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Stile and Rail Wood Doors
h. Details of glass, glass pocket, glazing materials, stops, and
simulated divided lights.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with door and frame
elevations, and construction details shown on Drawings.
3. Verified field dimensions for wall depths, and recommended tolerances
for door and frame installation.
D. Samples:
1. Interior Wood Color: 8 by 8 in. shop-finished swatch of custom color and
gloss matching sample submitted by Architect, prepared on rigid
backing; for verification.
2. Exterior Cladding Colors: 3 by 3 in. sets of available colors, prepared on
cladding material; for selection, and verification.
3. Door Corner Sections: Sets of minimum 12 by 12 in. samples of door
construction, stiles and rails, door panels, and glass panels fabricated
with materials noted on approved submittals; for verification, showing:
a. Veneer species and grain, stiles and rails, solid wood edges, and
core.
b. Cladding.
c. Corner construction and joinery.
d. Door panel construction and profile.
e. Glass panel construction, glass pocket, glazing materials, and
stops.
f. Simulated divided lights.
g. Factory-primed surfaces.
h. Workmanship.
E. Product Certification: Document confirming current approval of specified
aluminum-clad stile and rail wood doors by Florida Department of Business
& Professional Regulation (DBPR)/Product Approval for compliance with
Florida Building Code (https://floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_srch.aspx),
including:
1. Code Version.
2. FL # (State Product Approval No.).
3. Manufacturer.
4. Product Category.
5. Product Model, Number or Name.
6. Product Description.
7. Approval for Use Outside HVHZ.
F. WDMA Hallmark Certification: WDMA label on each unit confirming
fenestration products meet design requirements.
G. Manufacturer’s Test Reports: Documents prepared by independent testing
laboratory confirming aluminum-clad stile and rail wood door compliance with
specified requirements.
H. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1443-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Stile and Rail Wood Doors
3. Installation.
4. Maintenance.
I. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited warranty against defects in materials
and workmanship, including:
1. Door, Sidelight, and Transom Units: 20-years.
2. Cladding Finish: 20-years.
3. Preservative Treatment of Wood Components: 20-years.
4. Insulated Glass Units: 20-years.
J. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum-clad stile and rail wood doors, sidelights,
and transoms through single source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of aluminum-clad stile and rail
wood doors, sidelights, and transoms required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle door, sidelight, and transom units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Mark each door at top hinge and outside of carton with door number shown on
door schedule.
C. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Store and install door, sidelight, and transom units under conditions with temperatures from 50 to 90 degrees F, and relative humidity from 30 to 50 percent.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM-CLAD STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products:
1. Basis of Design: Andersen; E Series; www.andersenwindows.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Custom fabricated, aluminum-clad stile and rail wood door,
sidelight, and transom units; factory-prepared for hardware; meeting ADA
Standards, or ANSI A117.1 as applicable to state law; approved for NFRC
Certified Products Directory, and WDMA Hallmark Certification Program.
1. Use/Location: Exterior door, sidelight, and transom units.
2. Design: Match existing. 3. Type: Stile and rail, out-swinging.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1443-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Stile and Rail Wood Doors
4. Grade: Custom, in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA
101/I.S.2/A440.
5. Sizes: As shown on Drawings.
a. Stile Width: Match existing.
b. Top Rail Width: Match existing.
c. Intermediate Rail Width: Match existing.
d. Bottom Rail Width: Match existing.
6. Fabrication:
a. Frames: Match existing.
b. Sills: Match existing.
c. Stiles and Rails: Match existing. d. Panels: Match existing. e. Glass: Match existing. f. Glazing: Match existing. g. Simulated Divided Lights: Match existing.
h. Exterior Cladding: Mitered corner joints; silicone sealed.
7. Finishes:
a. Interior Painted Wood: Factory-primed for shop-painted finish in
accordance with Section 09 9100; match color and gloss sample
submitted by design professional.
b. Interior Stained Wood: Unfinished for shop-stained finish in
accordance with Section 09 9100; match color and gloss sample
submitted by design professional.
c. Exterior Cladding: 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer coating;
meeting AAMA 2605; match existing cladding color.
8. Design Requirements:
a. Performance Duty Level: Architectural (AW); in accordance with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1) Performance Grade: 70, min.
2) Design Pressure: 70 lb./ft.2, min.
3) Structural Test Pressure: 60 lb./ft.2, min.
4) Water Resistance Test Pressure: 8 lb./ft.2, min.
b. Fenestration U-Value: 0.35; in accordance with NFRC 100.
c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.30; in accordance with NFRC 200.
9. Installation Method: Frames centered in rough openings, shimmed, and
anchored with screws through heads and jambs into wall framing; and
doors hinged to frames.
C. Components:
1. Stiles, Rails, and Panels: Specified veneer bonded over water-repellent,
kiln-dried, engineered lumber core with solid hardwood edges matching
face veneer; preservative treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.4.
a. Veneer Thickness: 1/32 in., minimum.
b. Door Thickness: 2-1/4 in.
c. Panel Type: As selected by Architect.
d. Panel Thickness: 2-1/4 in., unless noted otherwise.
e. Door Edge Profile: 1/8 in. bevel on strike edge; other edges square.
2. Veneer for Painted Doors: Match esisting.
3. Frames, Jamb Extensions, Mull Caps, Panel Molding, and Glass Stops:
Match existing solid wood.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1443-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Stile and Rail Wood Doors
a. Frame Thickness: 1-1/16 in.
b. Jamb Width: 4-9/16 in.
c. Casing: Size and profile; as selected by Architect.
d. Other Trim: Size and profile; as selected by Architect.
4. Sill: Dark bronze anodized aluminum with interior oak trim and
adjustable oak threshold in combination with vinyl fin-and-bulb door
sweep; meeting ADA Standards.
5. Casing: Match existing, or as shown on ID Drawings.
6. Glass: Match existing thickness, dual pane, tempered, insulated glass
units; meeting ANSI Z97.1 or CPSC 16 CFR 1201 as required, ASTM
C1036, ASTM C1048, and IGCC/IGMA Certification Program. Provide
removeable plastic protective film on interior and exterior faces.
a. Spacer Color: Match existing. b. Glass Coating: Low-E (Surface No. 2).
c. Air Space: Argon filled.
d. Glazing Material: Match existing.
7. Simulated Divided Lights:
a. Exterior Muntins:
1) Material: Extruded aluminum, adhered to exterior (Surface
No. 1) of insulated glass unit.
2) Width: Match existing.
3) Profile: Match existing.
4) Pattern: Match existing.
b. Internal Shadow Bar: Match existing insulated glass spacer.
c. Interior Muntins:.
1) Material: Match existing wood, adhered to interior
(Surface No. 4) of insulate glass unit.
2) Width: Match exterior.
3) Profile: Match exterior.
4) Pattern: Match exterior.
8. Weatherstripping: Continuous dual foam filled bulb seal compressed
between exterior of door and all four sides of frame.
D. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws.
2. Interior Joint Sealants: Paintable, siliconized acrylic-latex sealant; meeting
ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade -18° C.
a. Pecora; AC-20 + Silicone.
b. Tremco; Tremflex 834 Siliconized Acrylic-Latex Sealant.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
aluminum-clad wood doors, frames, sidelights, and transoms in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1443-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Stile and Rail Wood Doors
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Clearances at rough openings for door frame, sidelight, and transom
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum-clad wood doors, frames, sidelights, and transoms in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, approved
submittals, and ASTM E2112.
1. Install sill pans with end dams at rough opening sills.
2. Center door and sidelight units, in rough openings, over sill pans with end dams; flush with outside face of sheathing; shim jambs straight; set units plumb, level, and square without twist or distortion.
NOTE: Do not install sill pans at door openings.
3. Fasten door, sidelight, and transom frames with screws through heads,
jambs, and shims into wall framing.
4. Set door thresholds in full bed of sealant, and seal gaps at ends of
thresholds.
5. Fill interior and exterior gaps between rough openings and door,
sidelight, and transom frames, at heads and jambs only, with backer-rod and sealant.
NOTE: Do not use expansive foam fillers.
6. Seal interior joint between sill pan, and sidelight sills.
NOTE: Do not seal exterior gap between sill pan, and sidelight sills to
allow drainage to outside.
7. Install jamb extensions.
8. Fit and align doors; install hardware.
9. Lubricate, test and adjust doors and hardware for acceptable clearances,
operation, and full contact with weatherstripping.
10. Remove protective film, labels, and adhesive residue from glass. 11. Install jamb extensions, and casing.
12. Install interior joint sealant for sealing casing to wall surface, and small
gaps between interior wood components to receive painted finish.
13. Flash window units to composite wood sheathing with materials
specified in Section 06 1639.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install rough-opening widths and heights with clearances
3/4 in. larger than unit widths and heights, plus additional thickness for sill pan
or other barriers with tolerances, as follow:
1. Plumb: 1/8 in.
2. Level: 1/8 in.
3. Twist: 1/8 in.
4. Square: 1/8 in. for units up to 20 ft.2, and 1/4 in. for units over 20 ft.2
C. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 1443-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Stile and Rail Wood Doors
3.3 FIELD TESTING
A. Door and Frame Testing: Provide independent testing agency meeting
ASTM E329, and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to perform tests,
and submit reports to Architect.
B. Water-Spray Test: Before start of interior finish work at door and frame
openings, and covering with subsequent construction, perform water-spray tests
at doors and frames in accordance with AAMA 501.2.
1. Notify Owner, Architect, and installer 7-days before date and time of
tests.
2. Perform minimum of 2-tests for leaks at each door and frame.
3. Submit test reports to Architect within 3-days of performing services.
C. Repair, or remove and replace components of door, frame and flashing systems,
at no cost to Owner, where tests show water penetration and non-compliance
with test requirements.
D. Perform testing and remedial door and frame work until watertight installation
is confirmed and approved, at no cost to Owner.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project. 1. Provide temporary covering at doors and frames to protect from painting,
and other wet work.
2. Provide temporary covers at door sills, and thresholds to protect from
construction traffic, and other damage.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3100-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Access Doors and Panels
SECTION 08 3100
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-rated access doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 9100 – Painting for on-site paint finish.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM A1008 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy
with Improved Formability, Required Hardness, Solution Hardened, and
Brake Hardenable.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
B. Product List: Indicate each access panel type, size, product description, location in room, and item to be accessed. Use room names and numbers shown on Drawings.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
3. Operation, and Maintenance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain access doors through single source from same
manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of access doors required for
this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle access doors in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3100-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Access Doors and Panels
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-RATED ACCESS DOORS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: Babcock-Davis; Recessed Access Door BRW; www.babcockdavis.com
2. Nystrom; Recessed Access Door RW; www.nystrom.com
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Door and frame unit with door face recessed 5/8 inch for gypsum
board infill to match surrounding gypsum board surfaces; concealed drywall
bead flanges, and welded construction.
1. Use/Location: Interior; non-rated gypsum board walls and ceilings.
2. Door Size: As required for access, but not less than 12 by 12 in.
3. Door: 16 gauge (0.062 in.), cold-rolled steel meeting ASTM A1008; with recessed face; 100 degree opening.
4. Frame: 2-5/8 in. depth, 16 gauge (0.062 inch) cold-rolled steel meeting
ASTM A1008; L-shaped with concealed flanges, and 1/4 in. diameter
mounting holes.
5. Hardware:
a. Concealed hinge.
b. Allen wrench operated cam latch with extension tube through
gypsum board infill. 6. Finish: Powder coat; standard white color. 7. Installation Method: Mechanically fasten to wall or ceiling support members.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of access
doors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Rough-opening sizes for access door frames, installation tolerances, and
location of blocking at fastener locations for secure installation.
2. Access panels sized for full, unobstructed access.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install access doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, Contract
Documents, approved submittals.
1. Install access doors plumb, level, true to line and location with fasteners
of type and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3100-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Access Doors and Panels
2. Paint exposed access panel surfaces on-site to match surrounding wall or
ceiling color in accordance with Section 09 9100.
B. Lubricate, test, and adjust access doors for ease of operation without binding, or
distortion.
C. Clean access doors, immediately following installation and testing, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3313-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Coiling Counter Doors
SECTION 08 3313
COILING COUNTER DOORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Coiling counter doors; manually operated.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 2100 – Allowances for cylinder locks.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1. AAMA 611 – Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural
Aluminum.
2. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and
Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum
Extrusions and Panels.
B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. ASCE/SEI 7-10, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process.
2. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Sheet and Plate.
3. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Color charts.
3. Technical data sheets.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Door design; metal thicknesses; hardware locations, preparations,
and reinforcements.
b. Components and accessories.
c. Attachments to supporting construction.
2. Verified field dimensions for openings to receive coiling counter doors.
3. PE stamp; signed and dated.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3313-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Coiling Counter Doors
C. Samples:
1. Color: 3 by 3 in. set of available colors, textures, and finishes; prepared
with materials specified for this Project; for verification.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
3. Maintenance.
E. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and manufacturing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain coiling counter doors, and accessories through single
source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of coiling counter doors
required for this Project; approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer.
B. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle coiling counter doors in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to avoid damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 COILING COUNTER DOORS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Cookson; Model ESC10; www.cooksondoor.com
2. Basis of Design: Overhead Door; Model 652; www.overheaddoor.com
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Custom fabricated door assembly with hood concealed above
ceiling.
1. Door Opening Size: As shown on Drawings.
2. Aluminum Finish: Anodized; meeting AAMA 611, Class I.
3. Steel Finish: Powder-coat enamel; meeting AAMA 2603.
4. Color: Dark bronze.
5. Operation: Manual push-up.
6. Installation Method: Mounted between jambs; mechanically attached to
building structure.
C. Design Requirements: Provide qualified professional engineer registered to
practice in state where Project is located to perform engineering services,
including:
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3313-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Coiling Counter Doors
1. Design of mounting brackets, guides and fasteners to support curtain,
counterbalance, and hood; for required loads and combinations of loads.
2. Certification that structural elements of door design, as shown on shop-
drawings, meet structural load requirements of ASCE/SEI 7-10, Contract
Documents, and authorities having jurisdiction; evidenced by PE stamp,
signed and dated.
D. Components:
1. Curtain: 1-1/2 in. high by 1/2 in. wide, aluminum, interlocking Type F-
158 slats with endlocks on alternate slats for curtain alignment, and
lateral stability.
2. Bottom Bar: Extruded aluminum tubular shape with continuous lift
handle, vinyl astragal, and
3. Guides: 2-3/8 in. wide by 2-1/8 in. deep, 2-piece, extruded aluminum.
4. Mounting Brackets: Steel plate.
5. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type with steel tube or pipe barrel.
6. Hood: 13-1/2 in. high by 11-1/2 in. deep, aluminum with intermediate
support brackets as required.
7. Door Locks: Slide bolt mechanisms, in bottom bar, at each jamb prepared
for keyed cylinder locks specified in Section 08 7100.
E. Accessories: Recommended by door manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review and compliance
with specified requirements.
1. Fasteners: Stainless or corrosion-resistant steel.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installer present, that conditions of work previously installed under
other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of coiling counter doors
in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, and
approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions are
corrected.
B. Confirm:
1. Door opening size, and support locations.
2. Overhead clearance for concealed hood, and required upset dimension
between top of door opening and bottom of hood.
3. Access to concealed hood for maintenance and repair.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install coiling counter doors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean installed doors with cleaning methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3313-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Coiling Counter Doors
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3323-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Overhead Coiling Doors
SECTION 08 3323
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Overhead coiling security shutters.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 2100 – Allowances for cylinder locks.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Color charts.
3. Technical data sheets.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Door design; metal thicknesses; hardware locations, preparations,
and reinforcements.
b. Components and accessories.
c. Attachments to supporting construction.
2. Verified field dimensions for wall openings to receive coiling security
shutters.
C. Samples:
1. Color: 8 by 8 in. factory-finished swatch of custom color and gloss
matching sample submitted by design professional; prepared on material
specified for this Project; for verification.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Preparation, and installation.
3. Operation, maintenance:
a. Owner manuals.
b. Parts list of authorized replacement parts and supplies.
E. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and workmanship.
F. Finish Warranty: Manufacturer’s 4-year limited warranty against defects in
factory-applied powder coat finish with zinc base coat.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3323-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Overhead Coiling Doors
G. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 5-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain coiling security shutters, and accessories through
single source from same manufacturer, or from other manufacturers acceptable
to security shutter manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of coiling security shutters
required for this Project; approved, authorized, or licensed by security shutter
manufacturer.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle coiling security shutters in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to avoid damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 OVERHEAD COILING SECURITY SHUTTERS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Overhead Door; Allura Shutter Model 653;
www.overheaddoor.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Custom fabricated, interior, light duty coiling security shutter
assembly with overhead operating mechanism; factory finished and prepared for
cylinder lock.
1. Design: As shown on Drawings.
2. Material: Aluminum meeting ASTM B221.
3. Sizes: As shown on Drawings.
4. Finish: Power Guard Premium powder coat.
a. Base Coat: Power Guard Zinc Base Coat for guides, bottom bar,
and headplates.
b. Top Coat: Power Guard Premium for curtain, guides, bottom bar,
and headplates.
1. Color: Match custom color and gloss sample submitted by design
professional. Use same color for powder coat finished components.
5. Operation: Manual.
6. Installation Method: Mounted face-of-wall with jamb guide channels and
overhead support brackets; mechanically attached to structural wall
framing.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3323-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Overhead Coiling Doors
C. Components:
1. Curtain: Interlocking, 16 gauge (0.050 in.) extruded aluminum standard
slats with nickel plated steel screws and end locks to retain curtain within
guides and prevent lateral movement.
2. Bottom Bar: Extruded aluminum tube with weatherstripping; prepared
for cylinder locks on side opposite hood. Provide 1-1/2 by 3 in.
aluminum wall tubes for face-of-wall mounting.
3. Guides: Aluminum channels with continuous PVC wear strips.
4. Brackets: Steel plate fabrications to support counterbalance, curtain, and
hood.
5. Counterbalance: Aluminum barrel housing spring assembly.
6. Hood: Aluminum, 2-piece square hood with headplates and intermediate
brackets, as required; hood size based on shutter height.
D. Accessories: Recommended by security shutter manufacturer for conditions of
use and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review and
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Fasteners: Type, size, material and finish.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
coiling security shutters in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Shutter opening size, and support locations.
2. Overhead clearance for hood, and required upset dimension between top
of shutter opening and bottom of hood.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install coiling security shutters in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Lubricate, test, and adjust shutters for ease of operation without warp, twist, or
distortion.
C. Clean installed shutter assemblies with cleaning methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide factory-authorized service representative to instruct Owner's personnel
in proper use, operation, and daily maintenance of security shutters.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3323-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Overhead Coiling Doors
B. Check coiling security shutters, with Owner's personnel present, before Final
Inspection; and again 30-days before end of warranty period to confirm proper
operation.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3819-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Rigid Traffic Doors
SECTION 08 3819
RIGID TRAFFIC DOORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Traffic doors and frames.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 2200 – Millwork for wood casing installed over metal door
frame faces; and as shown on ID Drawings.
2. Section 09 9100 – Painting for on-site painted finish for factory-primed
door frames.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C834 – Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Door number and type, room name, size, hand, swing; frame type;
door and frame finish. Use door numbers and room names shown
on Drawings.
b. Elevation of each door type and frame, with locations of cutouts, undercuts, hardware reinforcements, holes and preparations for
hardware installation.
c. Details of door construction, edge profiles, and glazing.
d. Details of frame construction, metal thicknesses, profile, and
fasteners.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
3. Maintenance.
D. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and workmanship.
E. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3819-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Rigid Traffic Doors
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain traffic door and frames through single source from
same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of traffic doors required for
this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle traffic door products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 TRAFFIC DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Eliason; Model SCP-15 Restaurant Door;
www.eliasoncorp.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Double-acting, food service traffic door and frame units; factory-
reinforced and prepared for hardware.
1. Use/Location: Food service doors between main kitchen and dining
room.
2. Design: As shown on Drawings.
3. Size: As shown on Drawings.
4. Doors: 0.032 in. thick, full-height, high-pressure laminate (HPL)
laminated on both sides of ¾ in. thick, exterior grade, composite wood
core with black PVC drive-in T-moulding on all 4-edges.
a. Door Thickness: 1 in.
b. HPL Color: As selected by Architect.
c. Hardware:
1) Hidden Hinge System: Eliason; double-acting pivot
hinges, with mounting brackets, and cover plates.
2) Kick Plate: 8 in. high, black ABS plastic, both sides.
d. Door Lights: 9 by 14 in. with clear acrylic glazing installed in black
rubber gaskets.
5. Frames: 12-gauge (0.097 in.) factory-primed steel, knocked-down, C-
channel frames with pre-drilled flanges for floor anchors, and 1/4 in. pre-
drilled, countersunk holes for head and jamb attachment screws.
C. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3819-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Rigid Traffic Doors
2. Joint Sealants: Paintable, siliconized acrylic-latex sealant; meeting ASTM
C834, Type OP, Grade -18° C. Use for sealing door frames to wall surface.
a. Pecora; AC-20 + Silicone.
b. Tremco; Tremflex 834 Siliconized Acrylic-Latex Sealant.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of traffic
doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Minimum, full-height double-stud rough-opening jamb construction
between floor slab and overhead structure.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install traffic doors, frames, and hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Frames:
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and aligned, over in-place
wall construction.
2. Floor Anchors: Install floor fastener at each jamb; shim jambs at uneven floor conditions.
3. Wall Anchors: Install head and jamb fasteners through pre-drilled,
countersunk holes into rough-opening framework.
4. Install joint sealant between door frames, casing and wall surface after
installation and adjustments.
5. Apply on-site painted finish to factory-primed frames as specified in
Section 09 9100.
6. Frame Installation Tolerances: Adjust frames, as follows:
a. Square: Plus or minus 1/16 in., measured on line 90 degrees from jamb, perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 in., measured at jambs on
horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 in., measured at opposite face corners
of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumb: Plus or minus 1/16 in., measured at jambs at floor.
C. Doors:
1. Hang doors and hardware in frames; shim hinges as necessary to align
doors.
2. Door Installation Tolerances: a. Gap Between Door and Head: 3/4 in. plus or minus 1/32 in.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 3819-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Rigid Traffic Doors
b. Gap Between Door and Jambs: 3/8 in. plus or minus 1/32 in.
c. Gap Between Meeting Edges of Double Doors: 1/2 in. plus or
minus 1/16 in.
d. Undercut Between Bottoms of Door and Frame: 1 in. plus or
minus 1/32 in.
3. Lubricate, test, and adjust doors for smooth operation without binding, or
distortion.
D. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products to new condition with no remaining evidence of
damage. Replace damaged products that cannot be restored to acceptable
condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 4113-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
SECTION 08 4113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts; certified for use on
buildings located outside the High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ)
with Florida Product Approval No.
2. Insulated glass.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 2100 – Alternates for balance of door hardware.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): www.ada.gov
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law.
2. ANSI Z97.1 – Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings – Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org
1. Standards ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
D. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
3. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
4. ASTM C1048 – Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully
Tempered Flat Glass.
5. ASTM C1330 – Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for
Use with Cold Liquid-Applied Sealants.
6. ASTM E283 – Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Skylights, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under
Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
7. ASTM E 329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in
Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.
8. ASTM E2190 – Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit
Performance and Evaluation.
E. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): www.cpsc.gov
1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 – Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
F. Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA): www.fgiaonline.org
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 4113-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. AAMA SFM – Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual.
b. AAMA CW – Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum
from Shop to Site.
c. AAMA 501.1 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure.
d. AAMA 501.2 – Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage
Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped
Glazing Systems.
e. AAMA 507 – Standard Practice for Determining the Thermal
Performance Characteristics of Fenestration Systems in
Commercial Buildings.
f. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance
Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing
Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels..
2. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA):
a. IGCC/IGMA Certification Program for the Harmonized
Insulating Glass Standard (ASTM E2190).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Color charts for metal and joint sealants.
3. Technical data sheets.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Templates: Door hardware templates with template reference numbers, or
physical hardware items submitted by hardware supplier to entrance door
manufacturer for factory-preparation of doors and frames to receive hardware
items.
C. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details, with:
a. Framing design and layouts; reinforcements and metal
thicknesses; construction at each vertical-to-horizontal
intersection; glazing conditions; expansion details; attachments to
adjoining work; flashing and drainage; hardware locations,
preparations, and reinforcements.
b. Door design; reinforcements and metal thicknesses, corner
construction; edge and glazing conditions; hardware locations,
preparations, and reinforcements.
c. Clearances.
d. Components and accessories.
e. Alignment, offsets, and joint conditions at enclosing construction.
2. Verified field dimensions for rough-openings to receive storefront
framing.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 4113-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
3. PE stamp; signed and dated; certifying compliance with structural design
requirements..
D. Samples:
1. Storefront intersections at vertical-to-horizontal conditions, fabricated
with min. 12 in. long framing members, showing:
a. Joinery.
b. Anchorage.
c. Expansion details.
d. Glass and glazing.
e. Flashing and drainage.
f. Selected color, gloss, and type of finish.
g. Workmanship.
2. Entrance door corner, fabricated with min. 12 in. long stile, and rail
members, showing:
a. Joinery.
c. Glass and glazing.
d. Selected color, gloss, and type of finish.
e. Workmanship.
E. Product Certification: Document confirming current approval of specified
storefront by Florida Department of Business & Professional Regulation
(DBPR)/Product Approval for compliance with Florida Building Code
(https://floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_srch.aspx ), including:
1. Code Version.
2. FL # (State Product Approval No.).
3. Manufacturer.
4. Product Category.
5. Product Model, Number or Name.
6. Product Description.
7. Approval for Use Outside HVHZ.
F. Manufacturer’s Test Reports: Documents prepared by independent testing
laboratory confirming glazed storefront compliance with specified requirements.
G. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Preparation, and installation.
3. Maintenance.
H. Product Warranties: Manufacturer’s standard limited warranties against defects
in materials, manufacturing, and workmanship
1. Storefront Framing: 2 years.
2. Entrance Doors : Life-of-Door, for welded corner construction of stile and
rail doors.
3. Factory Finish: 10 years.
4. Insulated Glass Seal: 10 years.
I. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2 year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 4113-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain storefront products, and accessories through single
source from same manufacturer, or other manufacturers acceptable to storefront
fabricator; subject to Architect’s review, and compliance with specified
requirements.
B. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Specialized in custom fabrication and
installation of entrance and storefront work required for this Project; approved,
authorized, or licensed by storefront manufacturer.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent inspection, testing, or special
inspection agency meeting ASTM E 329; with experience and capability to
conduct required services and submit specified reports.
D. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting after receipt of approved
submittals, and 2-weeks before start of installation to review storefront
requirements.
1. Attendance: Owner’s representative, Contractor, storefront foreman,
glazing foreman, storefront manufacturer’s technical representative,
Architect; and others installing work interfaced with storefront
installation.
a. Confirm attendance of foreman, manufacturer’s technical
representative, and Architect before scheduling meeting.
b. Notify attendees 7 days before scheduled meeting date and time.
c. Submit meeting report to Architect, and copy attendees within 3
days after meeting.
2. Agenda:
a. Warranty requirements.
b. Contract Documents, storefront design and materials, and
submittal requirements.
c. Manufacturer’s installation instructions, standard details, and
recommendations.
d. Interface and coordination with other work.
e. Review samples.
f. Observe installation areas and working conditions.
g. Availability of materials.
h. Schedule.
i. Acceptable field conditions, for scheduled installation period.
j. Other items required for successful completion of work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle storefront products in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, and AAMA CW.
B. Handle products with care to avoid damage. Do not install damaged products.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 4113-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install storefront products until adjoining construction,
painting and other wet work are complete and dry.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements.
1. Basis of Design: Kawneer; 350 Standard Entrance with Trifab VersaGlaze
451 Framing System; www.kawneer.com
2. Tubelite; www.tubeliteinc.com
3. YKK; www.ykkap.com
4. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. System Description: Custom fabricated, extruded aluminum doors and framing;
factory-finished, reinforced and prepared for hardware, gasket glazed; meeting
ADA Standards, or ANSI A117.1 as applicable to state law.
1. Use/Location: Exterior doors and framing at Building 4, Pete’s Turn.
2. Material: Extruded or formed aluminum, non-thermal members meeting
ASTM B209 and B221.
3. Finish: 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer coating meeting AAMA 2605.
4. Color: As selected by Architect.
5. Properties:
a. Air Infiltration: Max. 0.06 ft.3/min./ft.2 at static air pressure
differential of 6.2 lb./ft.2 with weatherstripping and door bottom
seal; in accordance with ASTM E283.
b. Water Resistance: No leaks at min. static air pressure differential
of 8 lb./ft.2; in accordance with AAMA 501.1 and ASTM E331.
c. Uniform Load: As tested with static air design load of 35 lb./ft.2
applied in positive and negative direction; in accordance with
ASTM E330.
1) No deflection greater than L/175 of any framing member
span.
2) No glass breakage or permanent set in any framing
member span greater than 2 percent with test load of 1.5
times design load.
d. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Not greater than 0.44, as tested
to AAMA 1503 with center glazed insulated glass specified for
this Project; in accordance with AAMA 507.
6. Doors:
a. Design: Match existing; as shown on Drawings.
b. Type: Stile and rail, medium stile, out-swinging door, with
mechanically fastened and welded corners.
c. Thickness: 1-3/4 in. with 1/4 in. to 1 in. infill thickness.
d. Size: As shown on Drawings.
1) Vertical Stile Width: 3-1/2 in.
2) Top Rail Width: 3-1/2 in.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 4113-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
3) Bottom Rail Width: 6-1/2 in.
e. Installation Method: Pivot mounted.
7. Hardware:
a. Handle Set: As selected by Architect.
b. Pivots: Standard.
c. Sill: Standard aluminum; meeting ADA Accessibility Standards.
d. Weatherstripping: Standard.
e. Balance of Hardware: Covered by allowance in Section 01 2100.
8. Framing:
a. Design: Match existing; as shown on Drawings.
b. Type: Center glazed from inside building.
c. Layout: As shown on Drawings.
d. Member Size: 2 in. wide by 4-1/2 in. deep with up to 1-1/8 in.
infill thickness.
e. Installation Method: Field assembled framing system;
mechanically fastened and anchored into rough-openings.
C. Structural Design Requirements: Provide qualified professional engineer
registered in state where Project is located to perform engineering services,
including:
1. Design of glazed entrance doors and framing, reinforcements, metal
thicknesses, connections, fasteners, fastener spacing, glass and glazing for
required loads, combination of loads, and wind speed noted on
Drawings.
2. Certification that structural components of storefront design, as shown on
shop-drawings, meet load requirements of ASCE/SEI 7, Contract
Documents, and authorities having jurisdiction; evidenced by PE stamp,
signed and dated on shop-drawings.
D. Accessories:
1. Backer Plates: Manufacturer’s standard, continuous closures, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
2. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer’s standard high-strength
aluminum with non-staining, non-ferrous shims for aligning system
components.
3. Sill Receiver: Extruded aluminum with formed aluminum end dams;
match framing color.
4. Backer Rod: Open cell polyurethane; meeting ASTM C1330, Type O.
a. Backer Rod Manufacturing; Denver Foam.
5. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws.
6. Exterior Sealant: Non-paintable, silicone sealant; meeting ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50; color as selected by Architect. Use for
setting aluminum sill receiver and end dams on floor, and for sealing
joints at heads and jambs to adjoining wall materials.
a. Dow; Dowsil 790 Silicone Building Sealant.
b. Pecora; 890NST.
c. Tremco; Spectrem 1.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 4113-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
7. Interior Sealant: Paintable, elastomeric, polyurethane sealant; meeting
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35; color as selected by Architect.
Use for sealing joints at heads, jambs and sills to adjoining floor and wall
materials.
a. Master Builders; MasterSeal NP 1.
b. Sika; Sikaflex – 1A.
c. Tremco: Vulkem 116.
2.2 INSULATED GLASS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Cardinal; Low-E 366; www.cardinalcorp.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Dual pane, insulated glass unit; meeting CPSC 16 CFR 1201,
Category I and II; ANSI Z97.1; ASTM E2190, and ASTM C1048, Condition A and
B (uncoated and coated surfaces), Type I ( transparent), Class I (clear), Quality q3
(glazing select), Kind FT (fully tempered); with removeable plastic protective
film on outside and inside faces.
1. Use/Location: Exterior aluminum doors and framing at Building 4, Pete’s
Turn
2. Certification: IGCC/IGMA certified, listed, and labeled; meeting ASTM
E2190.
3. Unit Description:
a. Outside Light: 1/4 in., clear tempered glass with low-E coating on
Surface No. 2.
b. Inside Light: 1/4 in., clear tempered glass.
c. Spacer: 1/2 in., continuous flexible foam, dual sealed, non-metallic
spacer; standard black color.
d. Air Space: Argon filled.
e. Unit Thickness: Nominal 1-1/16 in.
4. Installation Method: Door light trim kit with glazing materials as noted
on approved shop-drawings.
C. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded thermoplastic elastomer.
2. Setting Blocks, Edge Blocks and Spacers: Extruded thermoplastic
elastomer.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 4113-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Dimensions and conditions of rough-openings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, warranty requirements, Contract Documents,
approved submittals, AAMA SFM, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Lubricate, test, and adjust entrance doors for smooth operation without binding,
or distortion.
C. Clean installed products immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer, and AAMA CW.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
A. Provide qualified independent testing agency, meeting ASTM E329, to perform
tests and submit test reports to Architect.
1. Provide testing agency with Construction Progress Schedule, at start of
Project, for coordination and scheduling purposes.
2. Cooperate with testing agency in performance of its services.
3. Notify Architect 7 days before date and time of testing.
4. Submit testing report to Architect within 3 days after testing.
B. Water-Spray Test: Before start of interior finish work adjacent to storefront
locations, perform water-spray tests, as directed by Architect, in accordance with
AAMA 501.2; perform 2 tests min. at each storefront location.
1. Repair, or remove and replace components of storefront system where
tests show water penetration and non-compliance with test requirements.
2. Perform remedial work, and additional testing until approved, at no cost
to Owner.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 5213-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows
SECTION 08 5213
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum-clad wood windows; certified for use on buildings located
outside the High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) with Florida Product Approval No.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 2200 – Millwork for window casing, and as shown on
Drawings.
2. Section 09 9100 – Painting for shop-painted or stained interior surfaces of
wood window components.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI Z97.1 – Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings – Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C834 – Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
2. ASTM C1036 – Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
3. ASTM C1048 – Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully
Tempered Flat Glass.
4. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in
Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.
5. ASTM E2112 – Standard Practice for Installation of Exterior Windows,
Doors and Skylights.
6. ASTM E2190 – Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit
Performance and Evaluation.
C. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): www.cpsc.gov
1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 – Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
D. Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA): www.fgiaonline.org
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 – North American
Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and
Skylights (NAFS).
b. AAMA 501.2 – Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage
Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped
Glazing Systems.
c. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance
Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing
Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
2. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA):
a. IGCC/IGMA Certification Program for the Harmonized
Insulating Glass Standard (ASTM E2190).
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 5213-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows
E. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): www.nfrc.org
1. NFRC Certified Products Directory.
2. NFRC 100 – Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors.
3. NFRC 200 – Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat
Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence.
F. Window & Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA): www.wdma.com
1. WDMA Hallmark Certification Program.
2. WDMA I.S.4 – Industry Specification for Preservative Treatment for
Millwork.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
2. Factory-priming.
3. Cladding colors.
4. Technical data sheets.
5. Standard details applicable to this Project.
6. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Window number and type, size, and hardware for each window.
Use window numbers shown on Drawings.
b. Elevation of each window with divided light patterns.
c. Wood species, finish, and color.
d. Cladding, finish, and color.
e. Details of frame and sash construction, corner fabrication,
cladding, mull caps, jamb extensions, casing, sill nosings, fastener
type and spacing, wall depths, and sill pan with end dams.
f. Details of glass, glass pocket, glazing materials, stops, and
simulated divided lights.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with window
elevations, and construction details shown on Drawings.
3. Verified field dimensions for wall thicknesses, rough opening sizes, and
recommended clearances for window installation.
C. Samples:
1. Interior Wood Color: 8 by 8 in. shop-finished swatch of custom color and
gloss matching sample submitted by design professional; prepared on
wood material; for verification.
2. Exterior Cladding Colors: 3 by 3 in. sets of available colors; prepared on
cladding material; for final selection, and verification.
3. Window Corner Sections: 12 by 12 in. sample for each window type
fabricated with materials and colors noted on approved submittals; for
verification; showing:
a. Frame and sash.
b. Corner construction and joinery.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 5213-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows
c. Cladding.
d. Glass, glazing materials, and simulated divided lights.
e. Wood species and grain.
f. Painted and stained finishes.
D. Product Certification: Document confirming current approval of specified
aluminum-clad wood windows by Florida Department of Business &
Professional Regulation (DBPR)/Product Approval for compliance with Florida
Building Code (https://floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_srch.aspx), including:
1. Code Version.
2. FL # (State Product Approval No.).
3. Manufacturer.
4. Product Category.
5. Product Model, Number or Name.
6. Product Description.
7. Approval for Use Outside HVHZ.
E. WDMA Hallmark Certification: WDMA label on each unit confirming
fenestration products meet design requirements.
F. Manufacturer’s Test Reports: Documents prepared by independent testing
laboratory confirming product compliance with specified requirements.
G. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Field conditions.
3. Installation.
4. Maintenance.
H. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited warranty against defects in materials
and workmanship, including:
1. Window Units: 20-years.
2. Cladding Finish: 20-years.
3. Preservative Treatment of Wood Components: 20-years.
4. Insulated Glass Units: 20-years.
I. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum-clad wood windows through single source
from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of aluminum-clad wood
windows required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle window units in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 5213-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Store and install window units under conditions with temperatures from 50 to 90
degrees F, and relative humidity from 30 to 50 percent.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products:
1. Basis of Design: Andersen; E Series; www.andersenwindows.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Custom fabricated, aluminum-clad wood window units; approved
for NFRC Certified Products Directory, and WDMA Hallmark Certification
Program.
1. Design: Match existing.
2. Type: Fixed in-sash, and double-hung windows.
3. Sizes: As shown on Drawings.
4. Fabrication:
a. Frames: Match existing.
b. Sills: Match existing.
c. Sash: Match existing.
d. Glass: Match existing.
e. Simulated Divided Lights: Match existing.
f. Exterior Cladding: Mitered corner joints; silicone sealed. 5. Finishes: a. Interior Painted Wood: Factory-primed for shop-painted finish in accordance with Section 09 9100; match color and gloss sample submitted by design professional. b. Interior Stained Wood: Unfinished for shop-stained finish in
accordance with Section 09 9100; match color and gloss sample
submitted by design professional.
c. Exterior Cladding: 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer coating;
meeting AAMA 2605; match existing cladding color.
6. Properties:
a. Performance Duty Level: Architectural (AW); in accordance with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1) Performance Grade: 70., min.
2) Design Pressure: 70 lb./ft.2, min.
3) Structural Test Pressure: 60 lb./ft.2, min.
4) Water Resistance Test Pressure: 8 lb./ft.2, min.
b. Aesthetic Grade: Custom; in accordance with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
c. Fenestration U-Value: 0.35; in accordance with NFRC 100.
d. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.30; in accordance with NFRC 200.
7. Installation Method: Frames centered in rough openings, shimmed and
anchored with screws through heads and jambs into wall framing.
C. Components:
1. Sash, Glass Stops, Frames, Mull Caps, Jamb Extensions, and Sill Nosings:
Match existing solid wood.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 5213-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows
a. Sash Thickness: Match existing.
b. Frame Thickness: Match existing.
c. Jamb Width: Match existing.
d. Profiles: Match existing.
2. Casing: Match existing, or as shown on ID Drawings.
3. Glass: Match existing thickness, dual pane, tempered, insulated glass units; meeting ANSI Z97.1 or CPSC 16 CFR 1201 as required, ASTM C1036, ASTM C1048, and IGCC/IGMA Certification Program. Provide removeable plastic protective film on interior and exterior faces.
a. Spacer Color: Match existing.
b. Glass Coating: Low-E (Surface No. 2).
c. Air Space: Argon filled.
d. Glazing Material: Match existing.
4. Simulated Divided Lights:
a. Exterior Muntins:
1) Material: Extruded aluminum, adhered to exterior (Surface
No. 1) of insulated glass unit.
2) Width: Match existing.
3) Profile: Match existing.
4) Pattern: Match existing.
b. Internal Shadow Bar: Match existing insulated glass spacer.
c. Interior Muntins:
1) Material: Match existing wood, adhered to interior
(Surface No. 4) of insulated glass unit.
2) Width: Match exterior.
3) Profile: Match exterior.
4) Pattern: Match exterior.
5. Hardware: Match existing.
D. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws.
2. Interior Joint Sealants: Paintable, siliconized acrylic-latex sealant; meeting
ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade -18° C.
a. Pecora; AC-20 + Silicone.
b. Tremco; Tremflex 834 Siliconized Acrylic-Latex Sealant.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of aluminum-clad wood windows in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 5213-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows
B. Confirm:
1. Clearances at rough openings for window installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum-clad wood windows in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, approved submittals, and ASTM E2112.
1. Install sill pans with end dams at rough opening sills.
2. Center window units, in rough openings, over sill pans with end dams; shim jambs straight; set units plumb, level, and square without twist or distortion. 3. Fasten window units with screws through heads, and jambs into wall
framing.
4. Fill interior and exterior gaps between rough openings and window
frames, at heads and jambs only, with backer-rod and sealant.
NOTE: Do not use expansive foam fillers.
5. Seal interior joint between sill pan and window sills.
NOTE: Do not seal exterior gap between sill pan and window sills to allow drainage to outside.
6. Install jamb extensions, and casing.
7. Install interior joint sealant for sealing casing to wall surface, and small
gaps between interior wood components to receive painted finish.
8. Flash window units to composite wood sheathing with materials
specified in Section 06 1639.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install rough opening widths and heights with clearances
3/4 in. larger than unit widths and heights, plus additional thickness for sill pan
or other barriers, as follows:
1. Plumb: 1/8 in.
2. Level: 1/8 in.
3. Twist: 1/8 in.
4. Square: 1/8 in. for units up to 20 ft.2, and 1/4 in. for units over 20 ft.2
C. Remove protective film, labels, and adhesive residue from glass.
D. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
A. Window Testing: Provide independent testing agency meeting ASTM E329, and
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to perform tests, and submit reports
to Architect.
B. Water-Spray Test: Before start of interior finish work at window openings, and
covering with subsequent construction, perform water-spray tests at windows in
accordance with AAMA 501.2.
1. Notify Owner, Architect, and installer 7-days before date and time of
tests.
2. Perform 2-tests min. for leaks at each window.
3. Submit test reports to Architect within 3-days of performing services.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 5213-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows
C. Repair, or remove and replace components of window and flashing systems, at
no cost to Owner, where tests show water penetration and non-compliance
with test requirements.
D. Perform testing and remedial window work until watertight installation is
confirmed and approved, at no cost to Owner.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project. 1. Provide temporary covering at windows to protect from painting, and other wet work.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 9123-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Fixed Louvers
SECTION 08 9123
ALUMINUM FIXED LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum fixed louvers; certified for use on buildings located outside
the High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) with Florida Product Approval No.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
2. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
B. Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA): www.fgiaonline.org
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance
Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing
Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature for each product and accessory, including:
1. Color charts.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Standard details applicable to this Project.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Design and materials.
b. Fabrication and installation.
c. Finish and color.
d. Component details with dimensions, profiles, metal thicknesses,
and fabrication.
e. Fasteners and attachment to supporting construction.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with louver elevations,
and construction details shown on Drawings.
3. Verified field dimensions for openings to receive louvers.
C. Product Certification: Document confirming current approval of specified
louvers by Florida Department of Business & Professional Regulation
(DBPR)/Product Approval for compliance with Florida Building Code
(https://floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_srch.aspx), including:
1. Code Version.
2. FL # (State Product Approval No.).
3. Manufacturer.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 9123-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Fixed Louvers
4. Product Category.
5. Product Model, Number or Name.
6. Product Description.
7. Approval for Use Outside HVHZ.
D. Finish Warranty: Manufacturer’s 10-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and performance properties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers, and accessories through single source from
same manufacturer, or from other manufacturers acceptable to louver
manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of louvers required for this
Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM FIXED LOUVERS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Airolite; www.airolite.com
2. Basis of Design: Greenheck; ESD-635; www.greenheck.com
3. Industrial Louvers; www.industriallouvers.com
4. Ruskin; www.ruskin.com
5. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Stationary louver with drainable blades designed to protect air
intake and exhaust openings in exterior building walls.
1. Material: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T5, 0.081 in. thick; meeting ASTM
B221.
2. Louver Size: As shown on Drawings.
3. Finish: 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer coating meeting AAMA 2605.
4. Color: As selected by Architect.
5. Installation Method: Mechanically attach louver mounting flange to wall
opening framework.
C. Components:
1. Frame: 6 in. deep channel frame with 1-1/2 in. perimeter mounting
flange.
2. Blades: 4 in. on-center spacing, and 37-degree angle.
3. Bird Screen: 3/4 in. by 0.051 in. flattened expanded aluminum in
removable frame, inside mount; mill finish.
D. Accessories: Recommended by louver manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Bird Screen, unless noted otherwise.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 08 9123-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Aluminum Fixed Louvers
2. Insect Screen, unless noted otherwise.
3. Extended Sill.
4. Fasteners.
5. Joint Sealants: Non-paintable, ultra-low modulus, silicone sealant;
meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50.
a. Dow; Dowsil 790 Silicone Building Sealant.
b. Pecora; 890NST.
c. Tremco; Spectrem 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
louvers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install louvers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals. 1. Attach mounting flanges with stainless steel fasteners at 12 in. on-center spacing at head, jambs, and sill.
2. Install joint sealant between louver frame and adjoining materials.
B. Clean installed louvers, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2219-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing
SECTION 09 2219
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Shaft wall framing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board for hoistway liner panels and board
materials.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): www.steel.org
1. AISI S220 – North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Nonstructural Framing.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM A1003 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic-
and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.
2. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip
Process.
3. ASTM C754 – Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing
Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
C. UL (UL): www.ul.com
1. UL Design U499; 1-hour fire-rated shaft wall construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including: 1. Catalog cut-sheets. 2. Technical data sheets. 3. Building code evaluation reports.
B. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain non-structural metal framing through single source
from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of non-structural metal
framing work required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Maintain copies of manufacturer’s installation
instructions, approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm
installation requirements.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2219-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle non-structural metal framing products in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR METAL STUD FRAMING
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Clark Dietrich; www.clarkdietrich.com
2. Basis of Design: Marino\Ware; www.marinoware.com
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Cold-formed interior framing with standard thickness steel stud and track members meeting AISI S220. 1. Materials:
a. Steel: Meeting ASTM A1003.
b. Coating: ASTM A653, G40 min., with zinc coating of 0.4 oz./ft.2
2. Markings: Product identification marks at max. 8 ft. on-center with
manufacturer’s name, min. steel thickness, min. yield strength, and min.
coating designation.
3. Installation Method: Mechanically attached to floor tracks and head-of-
wall tracks.
NOTE: Equivalent thickness studs and equivalent coatings are not
allowed.
C. Shaft Wall Components: 1. Studs:
a. Use/Location: Fire-rated hoistway for dumbwaiter at Pete’s Turn
(Building 4).
b. Type: CT, or CH.
c. Spacing: 24 in. on-center.
d. Size: 2-1/2 in. web.
e. Gauge: 25 (0.018 in.)
1) Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 in.
2) Design Thickness: 0.0188 in.
3) Yield Strength: 40,000 lb./in.2
f. Design Requirements:
1) Maximum Height: 4 ft. – 8 in., unless noted otherwise. 2) Horizontal Deflection Limit: L/360 at 5 lb./ft.2 horizontal loading. 2. Head and Floor Track: J-shaped, tabbed track with 1 in. short flange and
2-1/4 in. long flange, by web width to receive studs; match stud gauge.
3. Jamb Track: J-shaped track with 1 in. short flange and 3 in. long flange, by
web width to receive studs; match stud gauge.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Recommended by metal stud manufacturer for conditions of use and application,
unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and compliance with
specified requirements.
B. Fasteners: for metal framing, corrosion-resistant:
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2219-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing
1. Metal to Concrete: Corrosion-resistant, powder-actuated drive pins or
threaded studs.
2. Metal to Metal: Type S, pan head screws, in size, material and finish recommended by metal stud manufacturer.
C. Acoustical Sealant: Paintable, siliconized acrylic-latex sealant; meeting ASTM
C834, Type OP, Grade -18° C. Use for sealing perimeters and penetrations at
sound-rated, fire-rated, and smoke-rated assemblies.
a. Master Builders; Master Seal NP 520.
b. Pecora; AC-20 FTR.
c. USG; Acoustical Sealant.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of interior
metal stud framing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start of
installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.2 SHAFTWALL INSTALLATION A. Install shaft wall framing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, approved submittals, ASTM C754, UL Design U499, and authorities
having jurisdiction. 1. Install shaft wall framing plumb, square, and securely fastened.
2. Install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall where studs are
installed directly against exterior masonry walls, or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls.
3. Install studs with flanges pointing in same direction. 4. Install 2 layers of regular, fire-resistant gypsum board (GB-1) at hoistway
ceiling.
B. Install tabbed track perimeter framing at enclosing horizontal and vertical
construction, intersections, and corners with short flanges on finished side of walls.
1. Mechanically attach track at both ends and max. 24 in. on-center. 2. Apply continuous bead of non-hardening, flexible fire-stop sealant around
perimeter.
C. Install gypsum board liner panels, cut 3/4 in. less than total wall height. Align first
panel tight against web of tabbed track, and secure with 1-5/8 in. Type S screws at 24
in. on-center, or bend out tabs in tabbed track.
D. Install studs at 24 in. on-center, cut 3/4 in. less than total wall height, between panels
with panels securely engaged. Adjust spacing at ends to allow minimum space of 8
in. between end studs and tabbed track perimeter framing; secure end panels with 1-5/8 in. Type S screws at 24 in. on-center, or bend out tabs in tabbed track.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2900-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Gypsum Board
SECTION 09 2900
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Regular, fire-resistant gypsum board (GB-1).
2. Regular, moisture and fire-resistant gypsum board (GB-2).
3. Glass mat, moisture and fire-resistant gypsum board (GB-3).
4. Coated glass mat, moisture and fire-resistant gypsum backer board
(GB-4).
5. Gypsum board shaft wall liner (SW-1).
6. Plastic trim.
7. Gypsum board schedule.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 3000 – Tiling for alkali-resistant fiberglass mesh tape and thin-
set mortar for taping gypsum backer board joints for ceramic tile
installation.
2. Section 09 5113 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings for drywall suspension
systems.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org
1. ASCE/SEI 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C1178 – Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-
Resistant Gypsum Backing Panels.
2. ASTM C1396 – Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
3. ASTM C1658 – Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels.
4. ASTM D3273 – Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold
on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
5. ASTM D4216 – Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) and Related PVC and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Building Products Compounds.
6. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
C. Gypsum Association (GA): www.gypsum.org
1. GA 214 – Recommended Levels of Finish for Gypsum Board, Glass Mat &
Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panels.
2. GA 216 – Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.
3. GA 600 – Fire Resistance and Sound Control Design Manual.
4. GA 801 – Handling Gypsum Panel Products.
D. UL (UL): ): www.ul.com
1. UL Design U419.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2900-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Gypsum Board
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Technical data sheets.
2. Building code evaluation reports.
A. Samples:
1. Plastic Trim: 12 in. lengths; each profile.
B. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain each type of gypsum board and finishing product through single
source from same manufacturer.
2. Obtain each type of trim product through single source from gypsum
board manufacturer, or other manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board
manufacturer.
3. Obtain each type of accessory product through single source from
gypsum board manufacturer, or other manufacturer acceptable to
gypsum board manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of gypsum board work
required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle gypsum board products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, and GA 801.
B. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original packaging with identification labels
intact.
C. Store products inside protected from exposure to harmful temperature and
weather conditions, including: direct sunlight, and condensation.
1. Keep gypsum products dry.
2. Support gypsum panels and accessories on risers 4 in. above level floor
surface.
3. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging or damage to edges,
ends and surfaces.
D. Handle products with care to avoid damage. Do not install products that are
damaged, or aged beyond shelf life.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Provide field conditions for installation and finishing of gypsum board in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and GA 216.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2900-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Gypsum Board
B. Installation Temperatures:
1. Mechanical Attachment to Framing: 40 degrees F, minimum.
2. Joint Treatment and Decoration: 50 degrees F, minimum; beginning 48
hours before application, and continuing until dry.
3. Temporary Heat Sources: 95 degrees F, maximum.
C. Provide adequate ventilation in storage and work areas during installation, and
drying period.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 REGULAR, FIRE-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD (GB-1)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X; www.buildgp.com
2. Basis of Design: National Gypsum; Gold Bond Fire-Shield;
www.nationalgypsum.com
3. United States Gypsum; Sheetrock Firecode X; www.usg.com
4. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Gypsum panels composed of fire-resistant Type X gypsum core
encased in 100 percent recycled paper on face, back, and long edges with
GridMarX fastener location marks printed on face; meeting ASTM C1396. Use for
regular or regular Type X gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 5/8 in.
2. Width: 48 and 54 in.
3. Length: 8 to 12 ft.
4. Long Edge Profile: Tapered.
5. Weight: 2.2 lb./ft.2
6. Properties:
a. Thermal Resistance: R-0.56
b. Combustibility: Non-combustible core.
c. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 15, smoke
developed 0; in accordance with ASTM E84.
7. Installation Method: Screw attached to framing.
2.2 REGULAR, MOISTURE AND FIRE-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD (GB-2)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard;
www.buildgp.com
2. Basis of Design: National Gypsum; Gold Bond XP Fire-Shield;
www.nationalgypsum.com
3. United States Gypsum; Sheetrock EcoSmart Mold Tough Firecode X;
www.usg.com
4. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2900-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Gypsum Board
B. Description: Gypsum panels composed of mold, mildew, moisture, and fire-resistant
Type X gypsum core encased in 100 percent recycled, mold, mildew, and moisture
resistant paper on face, back, and long edges with GridMarX fastener location marks
printed on face; meeting ASTM C1396. Use for MR or MR Type X gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 5/8 in.
2. Width: 48 and 54 in.
3. Length: 8 to 12 ft.
4. Long Edge Profile: Tapered.
5. Weight: 2.2 lb./ft.2
6. Properties:
a. Thermal Resistance: R-0.56
b. Moisture Vapor Permeance: 37 perms; greater than 10 perms
considered permeable.
c. Water Absorption: Less than 5 percent by weight.
d. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, best possible in accordance with
ASTM D3273.
e. Combustibility: Non-combustible core.
f. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 15, smoke
developed 0; in accordance with ASTM E84.
7. Installation Method: Screw attached to framing.
2.3 GLASS MAT, MOISTURE AND FIRE-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD (GB-3)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products manufactured by one of the following:
1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus Interior Panels;
www.buildgp.com
2. Basis of Design: National Gypsum; Gold Bond EXP Interior Extreme Type
X; www.nationalgypsum.com
3. United States Gypsum; Sheetrock Glass-Mat Mold Tough Firecode X;
www.usg.com
4. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Gypsum panels composed of mold, mildew, moisture, and fire-
resistant Type X gypsum core encased in coated fiberglass mat on face, back, and
long edges with GridMarX fastener location marks printed on face; meeting
ASTM C1658.
1. Thickness: 5/8 in.
2. Width: 4 ft.
3. Length: 8 to 12 ft.
4. Long Edge Profile: Tapered.
5. Weight: 2.5 lb./ft.2
6. Properties:
a. Thermal Resistance: R-0.50
b. Moisture Vapor Permeance: 19 perms; greater than 10 perms
considered permeable.
c. Water Absorption: Less than or equal to 5-percent by weight.
d. Surface Water Absorption: Less than or equal to 1.6 grams.
e. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, best possible in accordance with
ASTM D3273.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2900-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Gypsum Board
f. Combustibility: Non-combustible.
g. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A material; with flame
spread of 0, and smoke developed of 0; in accordance with ASTM
E84.
7. Installation Method: Screw attached to framing.
2.4 COATED GLASS MAT, MOISTURE AND FIRE-RESISTANT GYPSUM BACKER
BOARD (GB-4)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products manufactured by one of the following:
1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer; www.buildgp.com
2. Basis of Design: National Gypsum; EXP Fire-Shield Tile Backer;
www.nationalgypsum.com
3. United States Gypsum; Durock Glass-Mat Tile Backerboard;
www.usg.com
4. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Gypsum panels composed of mold, mildew, moisture, and fire-
resistant Type X gypsum core encased in coated fiberglass mat on face, back, and
long edges with GridMarX fastener location marks printed on face; meeting
ASTM C1178.
1. Thickness: 5/8 in.
2. Width: 48 in.
3. Length: 8 ft.
4. Edge Profile: Square.
5. Weight: 2.5 lb./ft.2
6. Properties:
a. Thermal Resistance: R-0.50
b. Moisture Vapor Permeance: 2 perms; between 1 and 10 perms
considered semi-permeable.
c. Water Absorption: Less than or equal to 5-percent by weight.
d. Surface Water Absorption: Less than or equal to 0.5 gram.
e. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, best possible in accordance with
ASTM D3273.
f. Combustibility: Non-combustible.
g. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A material; with flame
spread of 0, and smoke developed of 0; in accordance with ASTM
E84.
7. Installation Method: Screw attached to framing.
2.5 GLASS MAT, MOISTURE AND FIRE-RESISTANT SHAFTLINER (SL-1)
B. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensGlass Shaftliner; www.buildgp.com
2. Basis of Design: National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond EXP Shaftliner;
www.nationalgypsum.com
3. United States Gypsum Company; Sheetrock Glass-Mat Liner Panels Mold
Tough; www.usg.com
4. Substitutions: Not allowed.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2900-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Gypsum Board
C. Description: Gypsum panels composed of mold, mildew, moisture, and fire-
resistant Type X gypsum core encased in coated fiberglass mat on face, back, and
long edges; meeting ASTM C1658.
1. Thickness: 1 in.
2. Width: 24 in.
3. Length: 8, 10, and 12 ft.
4. Long Edge Profile: Double-beveled.
5. Weight: 3.75 lb./ft.2
6. Properties:
a. Thermal Resistance: R-0.65
b. Water Absorption: Less than or equal to 5-percent by weight.
c. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, best possible in accordance with
ASTM D3273.
d. Combustibility: Non-combustible.
e. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 0; smoke
developed 0; in accordance with ASTM E84.
7. Installation Method: Screw attached to framing.
2.6 PLASTIC TRIM
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
products by one of the following:
1. Plastic Components; www.plasticcomponents.com
2. Trim-Tex; www.trim-tex.com
3. Vinyl Corporation; www.vinylcorp.com
4. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: PVC drywall trim meeting ASTM D4216; type recommended by
gypsum board manufacturer for conditions of use and application, unless noted
otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and compliance with specified
requirements, including:
1. Corner Bead.
2. Casing Bead.
3. Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve
stress of movement.
2.7 GYPSUM BOARD ACCESSORIES
A. Recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Fasteners.
2. Joint Tape.
3. Joint Compound.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2900-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Gypsum Board
gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Control and expansion joint locations.
2. Spacing and alignment of framing members for walls, partitions, shaft
walls, and suspended drywall ceilings.
3. Environmental conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, approved submittals, GA 214 and GA 216.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize number of abutting end joints
and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting
end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together with light contact at edges
and ends and not more than 1/16 in. gaps between panels. Do not force into
place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end
joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical
joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints
at corners of framed openings
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining
gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces,
and above ceilings, except inside chases with internal cross-bracing.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air,
or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scrap pieces not
less than 8 ft.2
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits..
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below
underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile
formed by structural members; allow 1/4 to 3/8 in. wide joints to install
sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at
structural abutments. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 in. wide spaces at these locations and
trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel
is attached to open unsupported edges of stud flanges first.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2900-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Gypsum Board
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
3.4 GYPSUM BOARD SCHEDULE
A. Regular, Fire-Resistant Gypsum Board (GB-1).
1. Use for interior ceilings and partitions in dry areas not subject to moist,
humid, or wet conditions.
B. Regular, Moisture and Fire-Resistant Gypsum Board (GB-2).
1. Use for interior side of exterior walls.
2. Use for interior ceilings and partitions subject to moist or humid
conditions.
C. Glass Mat, Moisture and Fire-Resistant Gypsum Board (GB-3).
1. Use for substrate behind FRP wall panels in kitchen dish washing areas.
D. Coated Glass Mat, Moisture and Fire-Resistant Gypsum Backer Board (GB-4).
1. Use for substrate behind ceramic tile in toilet and shower areas.
E. Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Liner (SW-1).
1. Use for fire-rated shaft construction.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2913-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Gypsum Board
SECTION 09 2913
ACOUSTICAL GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Acoustical gypsum board ceiling system.
2. Trim.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 5113 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings for gypsum board suspension
system.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C423 – Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound
Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
2. ASTM C1396 – Standard Specification for gypsum Board.
3. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
4. ASTM E136 – Standard Test Method for Assessing Combustibility of
Materials Using a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750°C.
5. ASTM E1414 – Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation
Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum.
B. Gypsum Association (GA): www.gypsum.org
1. GA 216 – Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Color charts for custom colors.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Standard details recommended for this Project.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Reflected ceiling plan, suspension system, and control joint
layouts.
b. Ceiling heights and changes in heights above floor.
c. Alignment, size, and center-line dimensions for light fixtures,
diffusers, grilles, sprinkler heads, exit signs, speakers, access
panels, and other items installed in ceiling.
d. Details at suspension system, and control joints.
e. Details at perimeter edges, penetrations, and special conditions.
f. Ceiling components.
g. Trim.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2913-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Gypsum Board
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with reflected ceiling
plans, and construction details shown on Drawings.
3. Verified field dimensions for ceiling suspension system.
C. Samples:
1. Acoustical Gypsum Board Ceiling System: 12 by 12 in. prepared with
specified materials; showing texture and color expected in finished
installation.
2. Trim: 12 in. lengths; each profile.
D. Installer Certification: Document prepared by acoustical gypsum board
manufacturer confirming approval, authorization, or licensing of acoustical
gypsum board installer selected for this Project.
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
4. Maintenance.
F. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain acoustical gypsum board components through single source from
same manufacturer.
2. Obtain trim products through single source from acoustical gypsum
board manufacturer; or other manufacturer acceptable to acoustical
gypsum board manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of acoustical gypsum board
work required for this Project; approved, authorized, or licensed by acoustical
gypsum board manufacturer.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockups:
1. At location directed by design professional; install 50 ft.2 sample ceiling
area on as-built suspension system, showing:
a. Suspension system, sound absorbing backer panel, gypsum board
face panels, seamless joint, and spray-applied finish installation.
b. Detail at control joint.
c. Details at perimeter edges, penetrations, and special conditions.
d. Finish texture and color.
e. Workmanship.
f. Aesthetic effects.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2913-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Gypsum Board
2. Prepare mockup, for design professional’s approval, after receipt of
approved submittals, and 3-weeks before start of installation. Prepare
additional mockups, if required by design professional, until approved.
3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockup, unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by design professional.
4. Maintain approved mockup during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Approved mockup may remain as part of finished
work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle acoustical gypsum board products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install products that are
damaged, or aged beyond shelf life.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install acoustical gypsum board until building is enclosed with HVAC
and lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner occupancy, with
wet-work complete, dry, and residual moisture dissipated.
1. Maintain continuous temperature of 55 degrees F, or above in installation
areas 48-hours before, during, and after installation.
2. Provide adequate ventilation during installation and curing.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL GYPSUM BOARD CEILING SYSTEM
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products.
1. Basis of Design: United States Gypsum; Ensemble Acoustical Drywall
Ceiling – Suspended System; www.usg.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Seamless, sound absorbing acoustical drywall system composed of
sound absorbing backer panels, perforated gypsum board face panels, and
acoustically transparent spray-applied finish.
1. Weight: 3.2 lb./ft.2
2. Texture: Smooth.
3. Finish Color: Standard flat white, or custom color as noted on Drawings,
or selected by design professional.
4. Installation Method: Mechanically fastened backer panels and face panels
on ceiling suspension system with seamless joints, and spray-applied
finish.
NOTE: Do not install ceiling in areas greater than 1,800 ft.2 without
control joints.
C. Components:
1. Sound Absorbing Panels: USG Ensemble High-NRC Backer Panels; un-
faced acoustical panels.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2913-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Gypsum Board
a. Thickness: 1 in.
b. Sizes: 47-3/4 by 23-1/2 in., and 47-3/4 by 15-1/2 in.
c. Edges: Square.
d. Properties:
1) Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.80 minimum, in accordance
with ASTM C423.
2) Ceiling Attenuation Class: 40 minimum, in accordance
with ASTM E1414.
2. Gypsum Board Face Panels: USG Ensemble Four-Sided Taper Panels;
perforated non-fire rated gypsum panel with acoustically transparent
scrim; meeting ASTM C1396 Non-Type X (before modification).
a. Thickness: 5/8 in.
b. Sizes: 4 by 8 ft., and 4 by 10 ft.
c. Weight: 1.65 to 1.8 lb./ft.2
d. Edges: Tapered.
e. Properties:
1) Non-combustibility: Meeting ASTM C136.
2) Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 15;
smoke developed 0; in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Joint Tape: USG Paper Joint Tape.
4. Joint Compound: USG All Purpose Joint Compound.
5. Ceiling Compound: USG Ensemble Ceiling Compound.
6. Finish: USG Ensemble Spray-Applied Finish.
D. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Fasteners: Screws, non-corrosive.
2.2 PLASTIC TRIM
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products.
1. Basis of Design: Trim-Tex; www.trim-tex.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Adhesive: Trim-Tex 847 Spray Adhesive for installation of plastic trim.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
acoustical gypsum board ceilings in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 2913-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Gypsum Board
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Ceiling substrate level to 1/32 in. in 4 ft.
2. Rough-in installation for items located in or above ceiling.
3. Manufacturer’s required field conditions for scheduled installation time.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, approved submittals, and GA 216.
NOTE: Do not fill perforations in face panel with joint or ceiling compound.
B. Clean fall-out material, spills, and soiling from other construction using cleaning
methods and materials recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged work that cannot be
restored to acceptable condition, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 3000-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Tiling
SECTION 09 3000
TILING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Tile.
2. Installation products.
3. Metal edge trim.
4. Installation schedule.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board for coated glass-mat water-resistant
gypsum backer board.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): www.ada.gov
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law for
slip-resistance.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A108 – Installation Specifications Series for Ceramic, Glass, and
Stone Tile.
2. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law for slip-resistance.
3. ANSI A118 – Material Specifications Series for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone
Tile.
4. ANSI A137.1 – Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
C. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C373 – Standard Test Methods for Determination of Water
Absorption and Associated Properties by Vacuum Method for Pressed
Ceramic Tiles and Glass Tiles and Boil Method for Extruded Ceramic
Tiles and Non-tile Fired Ceramic Whiteware Products.
2. ASTM C1028 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Static
Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the
Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.
3. ASTM C1193 – Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
4. ASTM D4258 – Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for
Coating.
5. ASTM F3311 – Standard Practice for Mat Bond Evaluation of Performance
and Compatibility for Resilient Flooring System Components Prior to
Installation.
D. Porcelain Tile Certification Agency (PTCA): www.ptcaonline.org
1. Porcelain Certification Program.
E. Tile Council of North America (TCNA): www.tcnatile.com
1. Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 3000-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Tiling
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
2. Color charts.
3. Technical data sheets.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Substrate joint locations.
b. Tile and joint layouts, patterns, trim, and special shapes.
c. Grout joint width.
d. Sealant joint types, and widths.
e. Details at sealant joints.
f. Details at base, corners, perimeter edges, field-of-tile penetrations,
and special conditions.
g. Metal edge trim.
C. Samples:
1. Tile: Full-size tiles, trim and special shapes showing color and appearance
characteristics of tile specified or selected for this Project.
2. Grout and Sealant: Color sample sets with 1/4 in. wide strips of available
colors; for verification.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
4. Maintenance.
E. Installation Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 25-year limited system warranty
against defects in materials and manufacturing.
F. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
G. Maintenance Materials: Extra stock materials for Owners use; deliver and store
on-site as directed by Owner. Furnish extra materials from same production run
as installed products, packaged with protective covering for storage, and
identified with appropriate labels, including:
1. Tile and Trim: 5-percent of each type, color, and finish of installed
products.
2. Installation Materials: Recommended quantity of installation materials
and color required to install extra stock materials.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 3000-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Tiling
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain each type of tile and trim through single source from same
manufacturer.
2. Obtain installation materials through single source from same
manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of tile work required for this
Project and certified by one of the following:
1. Ceramic Tile Education Foundation; Certified Installer.
2. National Tile Contractors Association; 5-Star Member.
3. Tile Contractors Association of America; Trowel of Excellence Member.
4. US Department of Labor; Journeyman Tile Layer.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockups:
1. At locations directed by Architect; install minimum 50 ft.2 sample tile
floor area, for each type of tile, on as-built construction for specified
TCNA installation methods with materials noted on approved submittals,
showing:
a. Substrate preparation.
b. Installation materials.
c. Tile pattern, color variations, and texture.
d. Tile trim.
e. Grout joint size and color.
f. Movement joint size and sealant color.
g. Metal edge trim.
h. Workmanship.
i. Aesthetic effects.
2. Prepare mockups, for design professional’s approval, after receipt of
approved submittals, and 3-weeks before start of installation. Repair or
replace mockups, if required by Architect, until approved.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by Architect.
4. Maintain approved mockups during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Approved mockups may remain as part of
finished work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle tile and installation products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original packaging with identification labels
intact, and PTCA Certified Porcelain Tile logo on cartons of porcelain tile
meeting ANSI A137.1
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 3000-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Tiling
C. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install products that are
damaged, or aged beyond shelf life.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: As noted on Drawings.
2. American Olean; www.americanolean.com
3. Crossville; www.crossvilleinc.com
4. Daltile; www.daltile.com
5. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures..
NOTE: Final selection and approval of tile products, based on aesthetic
effects, is judged solely by design professional.
B. Description: Natural clay ceramic or porcelain tile; meeting ANSI A137.1
1. Certification: Porcelain tile certified by PTCA.
2. Size: As shown on Drawings.
3. Thickness: As selected by design professional.
4. Edge Profile: As selected by design professional.
5. Color, Pattern, and Finish: As selected by design professional.
6. Joint Size: As shown on Drawings.
7. Properties:
a. Water Absorption:
1) Ceramic Tile: Equal to or greater than 0.5 percent in
accordance with ASTM C373.
2) Porcelain Tile: Less than 0.5 percent in accordance with
ASTM C373.
b. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42 in accordance
with ASTM C1028.
c. Slip Resistance: Meeting ADA Standards, or ANSI A117.1 as
applicable to state law.
8. Installation Methods: As shown on Part 3, Installation Schedule.
C. Trim Units: Match adjoining field tile color, size, and coursing unless noted
otherwise. Provide shapes selected from manufacturer's standard units,
including:
1. Cove base.
2. Base cap.
3. Inside corners.
4. Outside corners.
5. Wainscot cap.
D. Special Shapes: Provide special tile shapes with color and texture to match field
tile as shown on Drawings, and as follows:
1. Where field tile units cannot accommodate special conditions, including
movement joints, and custom shapes.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 3000-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Tiling
2. Where special shapes requiring tile of matching size, color, and texture on
exposed surfaces cannot be fabricated by sawing.
3. Where shapes fabricated by sawing would result in sawn surfaces being
exposed to view.
2.2 INSTALLATION PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: As shown on Part 3, Installation Schedule.
2. Custom Building Products; www.custombuildingproducts.com
3. Laticrete; www.laticrete.com
4. Mapei; www.mapei.com
5. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
NOTE: Final selection and approval of grout and sealant colors, based on
aesthetic effects, is judged solely by design professional.
B. Description: Recommended by installation products manufacturer for TCNA
conditions of use and application, unless noted otherwise; meeting applicable
standards of ANSI A118 Series of material specifications.
1. Grout and Sealant Colors: Standard or color matched as selected by
design professional.
2. Installation Methods: TCNA and applicable standards of ANSI A108
Series of installation specifications, as shown on Part 3, Installation
Schedule.
C. Compatibility: Provide installation products for substrate preparation, setting,
grouting, care and maintenance that are compatible with one another, and with
specified substrates; based on testing and manufacturer’s field experience.
2.3 METAL EDGE TRIM
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Schluter Systems; www.schluter.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Edge trim, protection, and transition profiles for exposed edges of
finished flooring materials; meeting ADA Standards.
1. Type: As shown on Drawings.
a. Schluter, Reno-T.
b. Schluter, Reno-TK.
c. Schluter, Reno-U.
2. Material: Extruded aluminum.
3. Size: As shown on Drawings.
4. Finish: As shown on Drawings.
5. Installation Method: Mechanically attached to floor substrate.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 3000-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Tiling
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of tile in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, and
approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Levelness of floor slabs to 1/4 inch in 10 ft. or sloped to drain as required.
2. Minimum curing time of 28 days for concrete substrates.
3. Concrete substrates comply with surface finish requirements of
ANSI A108.01:
a. Thin-Set Applications: Steel trowel with light broom finish, or
mechanically scarified.
4. Substrate Surface Level Variation:
a. Tile size less than 15 by 15 in.: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. from required
plane, with maximum variation of 1/16 inch in 1 ft. measured
from high points on surface.
b. Tile size with one or more edges greater than 15 in.: 1/8 inch in 10
ft. from required plane, with maximum variation of 1/16 inch in 2
ft. measured from high points on surface.
6. Installation of items located in or behind tile, including backing plates,
blocking, floor drains, electrical device boxes, and other built-in items.
7. Joints in stone substrates aligned with stone joint locations or relocated
with crack isolation membrane as directed by Architect.
8. Control Joint Locations:
a. Interior Areas with Floor Drains: Not more than 12 ft. apart in
each direction with maximum area of 144 ft.2
b. Interior Areas without Floor Drains: Not more than 25 ft. apart in
each direction with maximum area of 625 ft.2
C. Pre-Installation Floor Slab Moisture Testing:
2. Test new and existing floor slabs, on clean bare concrete, using a Tramex
CMEX5 moisture meter; www.tramexmeters.com; in accordance with
ASTM F3311. Perform 8 tests for first 1,000 ft.2, and 5-tests for each
additional 1,000 ft.2; testing each area in clockwise format taking highest
reading.
a. Test results with water content less than or equal to 4 percent;
generally acceptable for flooring installation, unless noted
otherwise in flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
b. Test results with water content more than 4 percent; generally
unacceptable for flooring installation, unless noted otherwise in
flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 3000-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Tiling
NOTE: Check for high readings resulting from dew point issues
by comparing slab surface temperature to ambient dew point.
Acceptable surface test temperature is 10 degrees above dew
point. Mitigate such issues with HVAC, dehumidifiers, or fans to
move moisture out of slab surface before start of installation.
3. Contact flooring manufacturer for remedial moisture mitigation methods
and materials, if test readings are unacceptable for installation.
4. Provide testing before, at start of, and during flooring installation for best
results.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare concrete substrates to receive tile flooring in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, and ANSI A108.01
1. Remove fins, projections, and other irregularities.
2. Clean substrates to remove dust, dirt, debris, laitance, grease, oil, curing
compound, and other substances harmful to proper adhesion of tile
installation products; in accordance with ASTM D4258.
3. Fill voids, and depressions with trowel applied leveling and patching
compound recommended by tile installation product manufacturer to
provide smooth, uniform surface.
B. Blend individual tiles to match approved samples and mockup with color
variations expected in finished installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install tile in accordance with TCNA instructions, Contract Documents,
approved submittals, and Part 3, Installation Schedule.
1. Relocate movement joints in concrete slab substrates to nearest tile grout
joint, in accordance with TCNA F125; or extend straight up through tile
and install movement joint in accordance with TCNA EJ171 and ASTM
C1193.
2. Tie waterproofing membranes into floor drain flanges, and flash up
perimeter walls, and vertical construction to provide continuous
watertight pan in case of flooding.
3. Apply thin set mortar to back of each tile to ensure full coverage.
4. Use grout bag to fill joints between large stones.
5. Protect tile surfaces from grout stains with grout release agent as
necessary.
B. Clean tile and grout as installation progresses, and immediately following
installation, using methods and materials recommended by NSI.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Replace damaged work that cannot be restored to acceptable condition, as
directed by design professional.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 3000-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Tiling
3.5 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floors Over Concrete – TCNA F122A
1. Use: Thin-set floor tile and base over above-grade concrete slab with
waterproofing and crack isolation membrane.
2. Installation Products:
a. Waterproof Membrane: Custom; RedGard Waterproofing and
Crack Prevention Membrane; liquid-applied, elastomeric
waterproofing membrane.
b. Bond Coat: Custom; ProLite Premium Large Format Tile Mortar;
latex-modified dry-set mortar for interior installations.
c. Tile: As specified and noted on Drawings.
d. Grout Release: Custom; Aqua Mix Grout Release.
e. Grout: Custom; CEG-IG 100% Solids Industrial Grade Epoxy
Grout.
f. Joint Sealant: Custom; Commercial 100% Silicone Sealant.
B. Interior Wall Tile – TCNA W245
1. Use: Thin-set wall tile over stud walls with coated glass mat water-
resistant gypsum backer board.
2. Installation Products:
a. Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backer Board:
Specified in Section 09 2900.
NOTE: Install with alkali-resistant fiberglass mesh tape and thin-
set mortar for taping joints.
b. Bond Coat: Custom; ProLite Premium Large Format Tile Mortar;
latex-modified dry-set mortar for interior installations.
c. Tile: As shown on Drawings.
d. Grout Release: Custom; Aqua Mix Grout Release.
e. Grout: Custom; Prism Ultimate Performance Grout.
f. Joint Sealant: Custom; Commercial 100% Silicone Sealant.
C. Shower Receptors – TCNA B421
1. Use: Thin-set floor tile over sloped bonded mortar bed, and wall tile over
stud walls with coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backer board;
waterproof membrane continuous over shower floors and walls up to
ceiling.
2. Installation Products:
a. Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backer Board:
Specified in Section 09 2900; for solid backing on surrounding
walls, full-height from floor slab to top of walls.
NOTE: Install with alkali-resistant fiberglass mesh tape and thin-
set mortar for taping joints.
b. Sloped Mortar Bed: Custom; Jamo Floor Mud mixed with Jamo
StarSet 1000 Latex Additive for sloped mortar bed bonded directly
to concrete floor slab.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 3000-9
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Tiling
NOTE: Ramp mortar bed from level bathroom floor up to raised
curbless shower entrance at 1:12 slope, and down 1/4 :12 slope to
shower drain flange.
c. Waterproof Membrane: Custom; RedGard Waterproofing and
Crack Prevention Membrane; for waterproofing sloped mortar
bed and cementitious backer board.
d. Bond Coat: Custom; ProLite Premium Large Format Tile Mortar;
latex-modified dry-set mortar for interior installations.
NOTE: Use bond coat (thin-set mortar) for bonded mortar bed
and tile installation.
e. Tile: As shown on Drawings.
f. Grout Release: Custom; Aqua Mix Grout Release.
g. Grout: Custom; Prism Ultimate Performance Grout.
h. Joint Sealant: Custom; Commercial 100% Silicone Sealant.
i. Sealer: Custom; Aqua Mix Sealer’s Choice Gold.
D. Movement Joints: TCNA EJ171 – Movement Joint Guidelines, and ASTM C1193.
1. Use: Expansion, contraction/control, construction, and isolation joints.
2. Installation Products:
a. Backer Rod: Recommended by sealant manufacturer.
b. Bond Breaker Tape: Recommended by sealant manufacturer.
c. Joint Sealant: Custom; Commercial 100% Silicone Sealant; Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25; meeting ASTM C920.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 5113-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Panel Ceilings
SECTION 09 5113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Acoustical panels.
2. Acoustical panel suspension systems.
3. Drywall suspension system.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 2100 – Thermal Insulation for sound attenuation batts.
2. Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board for drywall ceiling materials and
drywall suspension system.
3. Section 09 8436 – Sound Absorbing Ceiling Panels (ACT-4).
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org
1. Standards ASCE/SEI 7-10, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C834 – Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
2. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process.
3. ASTM C635 – Standard Specification for Manufacture, Performance, and
Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel
Ceilings.
4. ASTM C636 – Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.
5. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
6. ASTM E1264 – Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Color charts.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Building code evaluation reports.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Ceiling grid layout with ceiling heights, and location, size and
orientation of light fixtures, speakers, diffusers, sprinkler heads,
access panels, and other items penetrating through ceiling.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 5113-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Panel Ceilings
b. Ceiling support design with hanger wire spacing and connections.
c. Additional support requirements for ceiling supported items.
d. Expansion and control joint layout and details.
e. Details for bracing, change in level, connections, fabrication,
splicing, and other conditions required for this Project.
f. Component, accessory, and fastener types, materials, sizes, metal
thicknesses, and finishes.
2. PE stamp; signed and dated.
C. Samples:
1. Acoustical Panels: 12 by 12 in.; flat white.
2. Suspension System Components: 12 in. lengths of main beam, cross tee,
and wall angle; flat white.
3. Suspension System Accessories: Each piece.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Field conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
F. System Warranty: Manufacturer’s 30-year limited commercial ceiling systems
warranty against sag, mold, and mildew.
G. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 10-year limited commercial suspension
system warranty against defects in materials and manufacturing.
H. Maintenance Materials: Extra stock materials for Owners use, furnished from
same production run as installed products, packaged with protective covering
for storage, and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver and store on-
site as directed by Owner, including:
1. Acoustical Panels: 2-percent of quantity installed for each type.
2. Suspension System Components: 2-percent of quantity installed for each
type of system.
3. Suspension System Accessories: 2-percent of quantity installed for each
type of system.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain acoustical panels, acoustical panel suspension system,
and drywall suspension system through single source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of ceiling work required for
this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle acoustical panel and suspension system products in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to avoid damage. Do not install damaged products.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 5113-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Panel Ceilings
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install acoustical panels until building is enclosed with HVAC
and lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner occupancy, and
wet work is complete and dry.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT-3)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong; Calla; www.armstrongceilings.com
2. CertainTeed; Symphony M; www.certainteed.com
3. Basis of Design: USG; Mars 86785; www.usg.com
4. Substitutions: Not allowed.
NOTE: Final selection and approval of acoustical panel products, based
on aesthetic effects, is judged solely by design professional.
B. Description: Washable, scratch-resistant, soil-resistant panel with smooth
drywall-like appearance; HumiGuard Plus humidity and sag resistance; and
BioBlock mold and mildew protection; meeting ASTM E1264, Type IV, Form 1
and 2, Pattern E, G; Fire Class A.
1. Material: Wet-formed mineral fiber.
2. Thickness: 3/4 in.
3. Size: 24 by 24 in.
4. Edge Profile: 15/16 in. angled tegular.
5. Weight: 1.03 lb./ft.2
6. Finish: Smooth acoustically transparent membrane with factory-applied
latex paint.
7. Color: White.
8. Properties:
a. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.75
b. Light Reflectance: 0.90
c. Thermal Resistance: R-2.2
d. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 25; smoke
developed 50; in accordance with ASTM E84.
9. Installation Method: Lay-in at Acoustical Panel Suspension System
(APSS-1).
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT-1) and (ACT-2)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. CertainTeed; Vinylrock; www.certainteed.com
2. Basis of Design: USG; Lay-In Gypsum Ceiling Panels; www.usg.com
3. Substitutions: Not allowed.
NOTE: Final selection and approval of acoustical panel products, based
on aesthetic effects, is judged solely by design professional.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 5113-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Panel Ceilings
B. Description: Vinyl-faced gypsum panels with sealed back and edges; washable,
scrubbable, soil, impact, and scratch resistant finish; directional appearance;
ClimaPlus mold, mildew, and sag resistant; meeting ASTM E1264, Type XX,
Form N/A, Pattern G, Fire Class A.
1. Material: Gypsum panel substrate with vinyl-laminated face.
2. Size: 24 by 48 in. (ACT-1) and 24 by 24 in. (ACT-2).
3. Thickness: 1/2 in.
4. Edge Profile: Square.
5. Weight: 2.0 lb./ft.2
6. Finish: Factory-applied latex paint.
7. Color: Manufacturer’s standard white.
8. Properties:
e. Noise Reduction Coefficient: N/A.
f. Light Reflectance: 0.77
g. Thermal Resistance: R-0.45 for 1/2 in. thickness.
h. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 25; smoke
developed 50; in accordance with ASTM E84.
9. Installation Method: Lay-in at Acoustical Panel Suspension System
(APSS-2).
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANEL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (APSS-1)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong; Prelude XL; www.armstrongceilings.com
2. CertainTeed; 15/16” EZ Stab Classic System; www.certainteed.com
3. Basis of Design: USG; Donn Brand DX Acoustical Suspension System;
www.usg.com
4. Substitutions: Not allowed.
NOTE: Final selection and approval of acoustical ceiling products, based
on aesthetic effects, is judged solely by design professional.
B. Description: Double-web, intermediate-duty, exposed tee system with integrated
main beams and cross tees for interior use; in accordance with ASTM C635.
1. Material and Finish: Roll-formed, G60 hot-dipped galvanized steel beams
and cross tees meeting ASTM A653; with pre-finished white aluminum
cap.
2. Exposed Face Width: 15/16 in.
3. Profile Height: 1-11/16 in.
4. Grid Module: 24 by 24 in., with main beams at 48 in. on-center.
5. Deflection Rating: L/360.
6. Installation Method: Direct-hung from overhead structural members.
C. Design Requirements: Provide qualified professional engineer registered in state
where Project is located to perform engineering services, including:
1. Design of ceiling suspension system members; hanger wire spacings,
connections to building structure; bracing, retaining clips, and fasteners;
for required loads and combination of loads.
2. Certification that structural components of suspended ceiling system, as
shown on shop-drawings, meet structural load requirements of
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 5113-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Panel Ceilings
ASCE/SEI 7-10, Contract Documents, and authorities having jurisdiction;
evidenced by PE stamp, signed, and dated.
D. Accessories: Recommended by ceiling manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Wall Angle: 9/16 in. wide, by 15/16 in. high; hemmed edges with pre-
finished exposed flanges.
2. Outside Corner Covers.
3. Inside Corner Covers.
4. Beam End Retaining Clips.
5. Hanger Wire.
6. Fasteners.
7. Acoustical Sealant: Paintable, siliconized acrylic-latex sealant; meeting
ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade -18° C. Use for sealing perimeters and
penetrations at sound-rated, fire-rated, and smoke-rated assemblies.
a. Master Builders; Master Seal NP 520.
b. Pecora; AC-20 FTR.
c. USG; Acoustical Sealant.
8. Sound Attenuation Batts: Specified in Section 07 2100 – Thermal
Insulation.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANEL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (APSS-2)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. CertainTeed; 15/16” EZ Stab Classic Environmental System;
www.certainteed.com
2. Basis of Design: USG; DONN Brand ZXLA Acoustical Suspension
System; www.usg.com
3. Substitutions: Not allowed.
NOTE: Final selection and approval of acoustical panel products, based
on aesthetic effects, is judged solely by design professional.
B. Description: Double-web, heavy-duty, exposed tee system with integrated main
beams and cross tees for interior use, and severe environmental conditions; in
accordance with ASTM C635.
1. Material and Finish: Roll-formed, G60 hot-dipped galvanized steel main
beams and cross tees meeting ASTM A653; with pre-finished white
aluminum cap.
2. Exposed Face Width: 15/16 inch.
3. Profile Height: 1-11/16 inch.
4. Grid Module: 24 by 24 in., with main beams at 48 in. on-center.
5. Deflection Rating: L/360.
6. Installation Method: Direct-hung from overhead structural members.
C. Design Requirements: Provide qualified professional engineer registered in state
where Project is located to perform engineering services, including:
1. Design of ceiling suspension system members; hanger wire spacings,
connections to building structure; bracing, retaining clips, and fasteners;
for required loads and combination of loads.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 5113-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Panel Ceilings
2. Certification that structural components of suspended ceiling system, as
shown on shop-drawings, meet structural load requirements of
ASCE/SEI 7-10, Contract Documents, and authorities having jurisdiction;
evidenced by PE stamp, signed and dated.
D. Accessories: Recommended by ceiling manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Wall Angle: 9/16 in. wide, by 15/16 in. high; hemmed edges with pre-
finished exposed flanges.
2. Outside Corner Covers.
3. Inside Corner Covers.
4. Beam End Retaining Clips.
5. Hanger Wire.
6. Fasteners.
7. Acoustical Sealant: Paintable, siliconized acrylic-latex sealant; meeting
ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade -18° C. Use for sealing perimeters and
penetrations at sound-rated, fire-rated, and smoke-rated assemblies.
d. Master Builders; Master Seal NP 520.
e. Pecora; AC-20 FTR.
f. USG; Acoustical Sealant.
8. Sound Attenuation Batts: Specified in Section 07 2100 – Thermal
Insulation.
2.5 DRYWALL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (DWSS-1)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong; Drywall/Stucco/Plaster – Flat Ceilings Suspension Systems;
www.armstrongceilings.com
2. CertainTeed; 1-1/2” Drywall System; www.certainteed.com
3. Basis of Design: USG; Drywall Suspension System; www.usg.com
4. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Double-web, heavy-duty, screw grid system with integrated main
beams and cross tees for interior use, and normal environmental conditions; in
accordance with ASTM C635.
1. Material and Finish: Roll-formed, G40 hot-dipped galvanized steel beams
and cross tees meeting ASTM A653.
2. Metal Thickness: Not less than 0.18 in.
3. Grid Face Width: 1-1/2 in.
4. Profile Height: 1-5/8 in.
5. Grid Module: 16 by 48 in., with main beams at 48 in. on-center, unless
noted otherwise.
6. Deflection Rating: L/360.
7. Installation Method: Direct hung from overhead structural members.
C. Design Requirements: Provide qualified professional engineer registered in state
where Project is located to perform engineering services, including:
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 5113-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Panel Ceilings
1. Design of ceiling suspension system members; hanger wire spacings,
connections to building structure; bracing, retaining clips, and fasteners;
for required loads and combination of loads.
2. Certification that structural components of suspended ceiling system, as
shown on shop-drawings, meet structural load requirements of
ASCE/SEI 7-10, Contract Documents, and authorities having jurisdiction;
evidenced by PE stamp, signed, and dated.
D. Accessories: Recommended by ceiling manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Wall Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 in.; reverse hem screw stop edges; knurled
flanges.
2. Beam End Retaining Clips.
3. Hanger Wire.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
suspension systems, and acoustical panel ceilings in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Acceptability of overhead structural framing and wall substrates for
attachment of suspension systems.
2. Rough-in installation for items located in or above ceiling.
3. Acceptable field conditions, for scheduled installation period,
recommended by manufacturer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance
border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-
width panels at borders unless noted otherwise; and comply with layout shown
on reflected ceiling plans.
B. Layout openings for light fixtures, speakers, diffusers, sprinkler heads, and other
items centered on acoustical panels.
3.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install suspension systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, approved submittals, and ASTM C636.
1. Install main beams, cross tees, and wall angles in level ceiling plane to
tolerance of 1/4 in. in 10 ft.; non-cumulative.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 5113-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Panel Ceilings
2. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely
interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or
kinked members.
B. Install ceiling hangers from overhead structural framing members, as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other
objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or
of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective
means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum
produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at
spacings required to support standard suspension-system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports
above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to
structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail
due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Do not attach hangers
form permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.
5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at
spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support
for attachment of hanger wires.
6. Space hangers 48 in. on-center along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless noted otherwise; provide hangers not more than 8
inches from ends of each member. Do not support ceiling grid members
on wall angles.
7. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling
loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a
minimum of three tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural
members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms,
steel deck, or steel deck tabs.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling
area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of
vertical legs of moldings before they are installed in rooms with walls
and partitions insulated for sound absorption.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at 16 in. on-center, and not more than
3 in. from ends. Miter corners accurately and provide flush, tight, and
secure connections.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and
trim.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 5113-9
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Acoustical Panel Ceilings
3.4 ACOUSTICAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Place acoustical panels fully seated into suspension grid. Scribe and cut
panels to fit accurately at borders and penetrations.
2. Paint cut edges of panels; using coating recommended by acoustical
panel manufacturer; match panel color.
3. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated; space according to panel
manufacturer's instructions unless noted otherwise.
B. Restore wall finishes damaged during ceiling installation to new condition with
no remaining evidence of damage, or refinishing work.
C. Clean installed ceilings with cleaning methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6413-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Engineered Wood Flooring
SECTION 09 6413
ENGINEERED WOOD FLOORING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Engineered wood flooring.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM D4258 – Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for
Coating.
2. ASTM F3311 – Standard Practice for Mat Bond Evaluation of Performance
and Compatibility for Resilient Flooring System Components Prior to
Installation.
B. National Wood Flooring Association (NWFA): www.nwfa.org
1. Wood Flooring Installation Guidelines & Methods.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Technical data sheets.
2. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, and construction details:
a. Wood flooring layouts and patterns.
b. Details at perimeters, penetrations, and other terminations.
c. Provisions for expansion, contraction, and ventilation.
d. Trim details for thresholds, reducers, and other trim profiles.
e. Accessories.
2. Verified field dimensions for wood flooring layouts and patterns for
matching purposes.
B. Samples:
1. Wood Flooring Boards: 24 in. lengths; match existing wood flooring.
2. Wood Trim: 12 in. lengths; each profile; match existing wood trim.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Field conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
4. Maintenance.
E. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited lifetime warranty against defects in
materials and workmanship of wood flooring boards, and trim.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6413-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Engineered Wood Flooring
F. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 3-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
G. Maintenance Materials: Extra stock materials for Owners use; furnished from
same production run as installed products, packaged with protective covering
for storage, and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver and store on-
site as directed by Owner, including:
1. Wood Flooring: 2-packages for each 1,000 ft.2 of installed floor area.
2. Wood Trim: 10 ft. length of each profile.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wood flooring, and accessories through single source
from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of wood flooring work
required for this Project; approved, authorized, or licensed by wood flooring
manufacturer.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockups:
1. At location directed by design professional; install minimum 100 ft.2
sample floor area on as-built construction for each type of wood flooring
with materials noted on approved submittals, showing:
a. Substrate preparation.
b. Glue-down flooring installation.
c. Flooring pattern, color, and texture.
d. Trim details.
e. Workmanship.
f. Aesthetic effects.
2. Prepare mockup for design professional’s approval, after receipt of
approved submittals, and 3-weeks before start of installation. Prepare
additional mockups, if required by design professional, until approved.
3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockup unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by design professional.
4. Maintain approved mockup during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Approved mockup may remain as part of finished
work.
E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting, after receipt of approved
submittals, installation of mockup, and 2-weeks before start of installation to
review wood flooring requirements.
1. Attendance: Owner’s representative, Contractor, wood flooring foreman,
wood flooring manufacturer’s technical representative, design
professional; and others installing work interfaced with wood flooring
installation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6413-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Engineered Wood Flooring
a. Confirm attendance of wood flooring foreman, manufacturer’s
technical representative, and design professional before
scheduling meeting.
b. Notify attendees 7-days before scheduled meeting date and time.
c. Submit report to design professional and copy attendees within 3-
days after meeting.
2. Agenda:
a. Warranty requirements.
b. Contract Documents, flooring design and materials, and submittal
requirements.
c. Manufacturer’s installation instructions, standard details, and
recommendations.
d. Pre-installation floor slab moisture testing.
e. Acceptable floor slab moisture conditions.
f. Substrate preparation.
g. Interface, and coordination with other work.
h. Review samples, and mockups.
i. Observe installation areas and working conditions.
j. Availability of materials.
k. Schedule.
l. Acceptable field conditions, for scheduled installation period.
m. Other items concerning successful completion of work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle wood flooring products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install products that are
damaged or aged beyond manufacturer’s stated shelf life.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install wood flooring products until building is enclosed with
HVAC and lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner
occupancy, and wet work is complete and dry.
B. Maintain controlled conditions with temperatures from 60 to 80 degrees F, and
relative humidity from 35 to 55 percent before, during, and after installation until
completion of Project, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Provide ventilation to remove fumes during application of adhesive.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ENGINEERED WOOD FLOORING
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products:
1. Basis of Design: Match existing.
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Engineered wood flooring.
1. Use/Location: Fill-in and addition to existing wood floors at new
construction areas as shown on ID Drawings.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6413-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Engineered Wood Flooring
2. Design: Match existing.
3. Type: Plank.
4. Materials:
a. Face: Match existing.
b. Back: Match existing.
5. Total Thickness: Match existing.
6. Size: Match existing.
7. Edge Profile: Match existing.
8. Pattern: Match existing.
9. Finish: Match existing.
10. Color: Match existing.
11. Installation Method: Match existing.
C. Accessories: Recommended by wood flooring manufacturer for conditions of use
and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to design professional’s review,
and compliance with specified requirements.
1. Wood Trim: Matching thresholds, reducers, and other trim profiles as
shown on ID Drawings.
2. Wood Flooring Adhesive.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of wood
flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, NWFA Guidelines,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Installation of below-grade vapor retarder under concrete slabs on-grade
to prevent vapor transmission through slab.
2. Floor slabs level to 1/4 in. in 10 ft.
3. Floor slab curing time of 28 days, or as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
4. Acceptable floor slab moisture conditions recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
5. Acceptable field conditions, for scheduled installation period,
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
C. Pre-Installation Floor Slab Moisture Testing:
1. Test new and existing floor slabs, on clean bare concrete, using a Tramex
CMEX5 moisture meter; www.tramexmeters.com; in accordance with
ASTM F3311. Perform 8 tests for first 1,000 ft.2, and 5-tests for each
additional 1,000 ft.2; testing each area in clockwise format taking highest
reading.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6413-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Engineered Wood Flooring
a. Test results with water content less than or equal to 4 percent;
generally acceptable for flooring installation, unless noted
otherwise in flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
b. Test results with water content more than 4 percent; generally
unacceptable for flooring installation, unless noted otherwise in
flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
NOTE: Check for high readings resulting from dew point issues
by comparing slab surface temperature to ambient dew point.
Acceptable surface test temperature is 10 degrees above dew
point. Mitigate such issues with HVAC, dehumidifiers, or fans to
move moisture out of slab surface before start of installation.
2. Contact flooring manufacturer for remedial moisture mitigation methods
and materials, if test readings are unacceptable for installation.
3. Provide testing before, at start of, and during flooring installation for best
results.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates to receive wood flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, NWFA Guidelines, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean concrete substrate to remove dust, dirt, debris, moisture, and other
substances detrimental to flooring installation; remove sharp projections, and
vacuum before start of installation in accordance with ASTM D4258.
C. Protect other construction from damage by flooring work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, NWFA
Guidelines, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean installed flooring, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged work that cannot be
restored to acceptable condition, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6513-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Base and Accessories
SECTION 09 6513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rubber base.
2. Rubber stair tread.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 6523 – Luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C834 – Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
2. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
3. ASTM F1861 – Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.
4. ASTM F2169 – Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads.
5. ASTM D2047 – Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of
Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Color charts.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Sample warranty forms.
B. Samples:
1. 3 by 3 in. set of available colors and finishes; for initial selection.
2. Rubber Wall Base: 4 in. height by 12 in. long, in colors shown on
Drawings, or selected by design professional; for verification.
3. Rubber Tread: Full width by 12 in. long, in colors shown on Drawings, or
selected by design professional; for verification.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
4. Maintenance.
D. Rubber Base Warranty: Manufacturer’s 5-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and manufacturing.
E. Rubber Tread Warranty: Manufacturer’s 5-year limited warranty against defects
in materials and manufacturing.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6513-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Base and Accessories
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain rubber base, and stair tread through single source
from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of rubber base and stair tread
required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle rubber base and stair tread in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install products that are
damaged, or aged beyond shelf life.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install rubber base and stair tread until building is enclosed
with HVAC and lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner
occupancy, and wet work complete, dry, and residual moisture dissipated.
Maintain required temperature and humidity conditions beginning 48 hours
before installation, during installation, and for remainder of construction period.
1. Temperature: 65 to 85 degrees F.
2. Humidity: 40 to 60 percent.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 RUBBER BASE
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Roppe; 700 Series Rubber Wall Base; www.roppe.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Flexible, styrene butadiene rubber wall base; meeting ASTM F1861,
Type TP, Group 2.
1. Style: Cove with standard 5/8 in. toe.
2. Thickness: 1/8 in.
3. Height: 4 in.
4. Length: 120 ft. rolls.
5. Color: As selected by design professional.
6. Properties:
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 10, smoke
developed 60; in accordance with ASTM E84.
7. Installation Method: Adhered to wall surface.
C. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to design professional’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Outside Corners: Factory-formed.
2. Inside Corners: Formed on-site with mitered wall base.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6513-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Base and Accessories
3. Adhesive: Roppe; Excelsior WB-600 Acrylic Wall Base Adhesive for
porous substrates.
4. Adhesive: Roppe; Excelsior C-630 Water Based Contact Adhesive for non-
porous substrates.
5. Colored Caulk: Roppe; Color Rite Sealant and Adhesive Caulk; 100
percent acrylic sealant; meeting ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade -18° C;
match wall base color.
6. Cleaner: Roppe; Excelsior NC-900 All Purpose Neutral Cleaner.
2.2 RUBBER STAIR TREAD
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Roppe; Rubber Stair Tread; www.roppe.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Vulcanized rubber stair tread; meeting ASTM F2169, Type TS, Class
2, Grade 1.
1. Style: No. 96 Vantage Raised Circular One-Piece Tread/Riser Design.
2. Nose: Square, adjustable.
3. Thickness: 3/64 in. base thickness, and 5/64 in. at raised circles.
4. Size: 1-9/16 by 20-7/16 in.
5. Length: Match stair width.
6. Color: As selected by design professional.
7. Properties:
a. Static Coefficient Of Friction: Greater than or equal to 0.50
b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class C; flame spread 115, smoke
developed 275; in accordance with ASTM E84.
8. Installation Method: Adhered to stair tread and riser surfaces.
C. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to design professional’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Nose Filler: Roppe; Excelsior EN-610, Epoxy Nose Filler.
2. Tape: Roppe; Excelsior TP-620, Pressure Sensitive Tread Tape.
3. Adhesive: Roppe; Excelsior AW-510, Wet-Set Acrylic.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
rubber base and stair tread in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6513-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Base and Accessories
B. Confirm:
1. Maximum gaps of 1/2 in. or less between finished floor surface and bottom
of wall substrate when installing rubber base with toe.
2. Installation of movement joints; sealed and finished. Do not install rubber
base over joints in substrate.
3. Environmental conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates to receive rubber base and stair tread in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Acclimate rubber base and stair tread to installation areas for 48-hours before
installation.
C. Clean substrate surfaces to remove dust, dirt, debris, moisture, and other substances
detrimental to rubber base and stair tread installation; remove sharp projections.
3.3 RUBBER BASE INSTALLATION
A. Install rubber base and stair tread in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Apply rubber base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe
spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is
required.
2. Install rubber base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and
with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
3. Tightly adhere base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base
in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top
edge of base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
B. Corners:
1. Factory-Formed: Install factory-formed outside corners on 90 degree corners,
and secure to wall before installing wall base.
NOTE: Do not install factory-formed outside corners on corners less than, or
greater than 90 degrees.
2. Formed On-Site: Install inside corners with straight pieces of max. lengths,
and miter to minimize open joints.
C. Clean rubber base and stair tread, immediately following installation, using methods
and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot be
restored to acceptable condition, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6516-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Sheet Flooring
SECTION 09 6516
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. PVC sheet flooring for bar areas.
2. Integral PVC cove base.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): www.ada.gov
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM D695 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics.
2. ASTM D751 – Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics.
3. ASTM D2047 – Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of
Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.
4. ASTM D2240 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Property–Durometer
Hardness.
5. ASTM D4258 – Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for
Coating.
6. ASTM F3311 – Standard Practice for Mat Bond Evaluation of Performance
and Compatibility for Resilient Flooring System Components Prior to
Installation.
7. ASTM G21 – Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic
Polymeric Materials to Fungi.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Color charts.
3. Technical data sheets.
4. Standard product details recommended for this Project.
5. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, and construction details:
a. Substrate joint, and floor drain locations.
b. Sheet flooring layouts.
c. Details at floor drains, transition strips, and corner guards.
d. Details at perimeters, penetrations, and special conditions.
e. Detail at integral cove base and cap.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with floor plans, and
construction details shown on Drawings.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6516-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Sheet Flooring
3. Verified field dimensions of floor areas, substrate joint locations, floor
drain locations, and special conditions.
C. Samples:
1. Colors: 3 by 3 in. set of available colors, textures, and finishes; for initial
selection.
2. Sheet Flooring: 12 by 12 in. piece of each color, texture, and finish
combination selected by design professional, and expected in finished
installation; for verification.
D. Installer Certification: Document prepared by sheet flooring manufacturer
confirming approval, authorization, or licensing of sheet flooring installer
selected for this Project.
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
4. Maintenance.
F. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 10-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and manufacturing.
G. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain sheet flooring and accessories through single source
from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of sheet flooring required for
this Project; approved, authorized, or licensed by sheet flooring manufacturer.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockup:
1. At location directed by design professional, install minimum 15 ft.2
movable, freestanding sample floor panel for sheet flooring with
materials noted on approved submittals, showing:
a. Substrate surface and joint preparation.
b. Sheet flooring installation.
c. Cove base and cap installation.
d. Chemically welded floor sheet and cove base joints.
e. Floor drain, transition strip, and corner guard installation.
f. Workmanship.
2. Prepare mockup for design professional’s approval, after receipt of
approved submittals, and 3-weeks before start of installation. Prepare
additional mockups, if required by design professional, until approved.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6516-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Sheet Flooring
3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockup, unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by design professional.
4. Maintain approved mockup during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Do not remove approved mockup until directed
by design professional.
E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting after receipt of approved
submittals, installation of mockup, and 2-weeks before start of installation to
review sheet flooring requirements.
1. Attendance: Owner’s representative, Contractor, sheet flooring foreman,
flooring manufacturer’s technical representative, design professional, and
others installing work interfaced with sheet flooring installation.
a. Confirm attendance of foreman, manufacturer’s technical
representative, and design professional before scheduling
meeting.
b. Notify attendees 7-days before scheduled meeting date and time.
c. Submit report to design professional, and copy attendees within 3-
days after meeting.
2. Agenda:
a. Warranty requirements.
b. Contract Documents, flooring design and materials, and submittal
requirements.
c. Manufacturer’s installation instructions, standard details, and
recommendations.
d. Pre-installation testing.
e. Substrates preparation.
f. Interface, and coordination with other work.
g. Review samples, and mockups.
h. Observe installation areas, and working conditions.
i. Availability of materials.
j. Schedule.
k. Environmental conditions.
l. Other items required for successful completion of work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle sheet flooring products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install products that are
damaged, or aged beyond shelf life.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Install sheet flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended
environmental conditions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6516-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Sheet Flooring
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PVC SHEET FLOORING
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Oscoda Plastics; Protect-All Flooring; www.protect-
allflooring.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Resilient sheet flooring and cove base material composed of
recycled PVC with fabric-strand reinforcement, and microtextured slip-resistant
finish.
1. Application: Bar areas.
2. Thickness: 1/4 in.
3. Sheet Size: 5 by 8 ft.
4. Base Size: 6 in. high by 1/4 in. thickness, by 30 ft. roll length.
5. Weight: 25 oz./ft.2
6. Finish: Matte.
7. Color: As selected by design professional.
8. Properties:
a. Coefficient of Friction: 0.88 dry, in accordance with ASTM D2047.
b. Slip Resistance: Meets ADA, Chapter 3, Section 302.1.
c. Elongation: 76.5 machine direction/88.5 cross machine direction
in accordance with ASTM D751.
d. Compressive Strength: 641 lb./in.² in accordance with ASTM
D695.
e. Hardness (Shore A): 80-85 in accordance with ASTM D2240.
f. Mold Resistance: Pass; in accordance with ASTM G21.
9. Installation Method: Fully-adhered flooring with Protect-All Rapid Weld
chemically welded flooring sheets and cove base seams.
C. Accessories: Recommended by sheet flooring manufacturer for conditions of use
and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to design professional review,
and compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Floor Adhesive: Protect-All; PA127 or PA139, 2-part epoxy for bonding
flooring to substrate.
2. Floor Drain Rings: Protect-All; stainless-steel rings for protection of floor
penetrations, and mechanical attachment of flooring to substrate.
3. Transition Strips: Protect-All; stainless-steel strips for edge protection at
elevation changes, and mechanical attachment of flooring to substrate.
4. Corner Guards: Protect-All; stainless-steel profile for protection of outside
corners of cove base.
5. Base Cap: Protect-All; PVC, Z-shaped profile for top edge protection of
cove base, and mechanical attachment of base to wall substrate.
6. Fasteners: Protect-All; stainless-steel fasteners and anchors for drain
rings, transition strips, and corner guards.
7. Sealant: Protect-All; E-6100.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6516-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Sheet Flooring
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of sheet
flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, warranty requirements,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Coordination and scheduling of pre-installation, and installation
inspection and testing services by independent Testing Agency.
2. Floor slabs cured 28-day minimum, or as recommended by sheet flooring
manufacturer, with surfaces visibly dry, clean, and structurally sound.
3. Floor slabs level to 5/16 in. in 10 ft.
4. Floor drains, and other floor penetrations installed level and 3/16 in.
above substrate surface.
5. Minimum 1/8 to 1/4 in./ft. floor slope to floor drains.
6. Minimum 36 in. diameter floor drain areas, with maximum 3/8 in. depth.
7. Minimum 8 in. clear height of wall penetrations above floor surface.
8. Moving substrate joints sealed with joint filler, and fully cured sealant as
required.
9. Manufacturer’s required environmental conditions for scheduled
installation time.
C. Pre-Installation Floor Slab Moisture Testing:
a. Test new and existing floor slabs, on clean bare concrete, using a Tramex
CMEX5 moisture meter; www.tramexmeters.com; in accordance with
ASTM F3311. Perform 8 tests for first 1,000 ft.2, and 5-tests for each
additional 1,000 ft.2; testing each area in clockwise format taking highest
reading.
a. Test results with water content less than or equal to 4 percent;
generally acceptable for flooring installation, unless noted
otherwise in flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
b. Test results with water content more than 4 percent; generally
unacceptable for flooring installation, unless noted otherwise in
flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
NOTE: Check for high readings resulting from dew point issues
by comparing slab surface temperature to ambient dew point.
Acceptable surface test temperature is 10 degrees above dew
point. Mitigate such issues with HVAC, dehumidifiers, or fans to
move moisture out of slab surface before start of installation.
b. Contact flooring manufacturer for remedial moisture mitigation methods
and materials, if test readings are unacceptable for installation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6516-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Sheet Flooring
c. Provide testing before, at start of, and during flooring installation for best
results.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare concrete substrates to receive flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, and ASTM D4258. Provide structurally sound, smooth, clean, dry,
and dust-free surfaces to receive flooring.
1. Clean substrates to remove form release agents, curing compound,
grease, oil, dust, dirt, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental
to flooring installation.
2. Remove sharp projections, loose material, laitance, and other
irregularities. Vacuum before start of installation.
3. Fill holes, voids, cracks, and non-moving joints with minimum 3,500
lb./ft ² cementitious repair material.
B. Protect other construction from damage by flooring work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Cut flooring tight to perimeters and penetrations.
2. Install flooring with proper adhesive for conditions of use and
application; trowel applied.
3. Roll flooring into adhesive with 100 lb. roller, immediately after
installation, and again 1-hour later.
4. Install stainless steel drain rings around floor drains, and other
penetrations with stainless steel fasteners. Route drain rings into
substrate surface and mount flush with floor surface. Seal exposed edges
with sealant.
5. Install cove base with proper adhesive. Seal top edges with sealant.
6. Install stainless steel cove base cap with stainless steel fasteners at 8 in.
on-center.
7. Chemically weld sheet flooring, and cove base seams.
8. Install stainless steel transitions with stainless steel fasteners at elevation
changes, and doorways. Seal exposed edges with sealant.
B. Clean installed flooring, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
C. Clean spills and soiling from other construction using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed flooring from damage until completion of Project.
B. Replace damaged flooring, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6523 -1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring
SECTION 09 6523
LUXURY VINYL TILE FLOORING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Luxury vinyl tile.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 6513 – Resilient Base and Accessories for rubber base and stair
treads installed at LVT floors.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): www.astm.org
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law for
slip-resistance.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law for slip-resistance.
C. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM D4258 – Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for
Coating.
2. ASTM E648 – Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-
Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
3. ASTM E662 – Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of
Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.
4. ASTM F1700 – Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile.
5. ASTM F3311 – Standard Practice for Mat Bond Evaluation of Performance
and Compatibility for Resilient Flooring System Components Prior to
Installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Color charts.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Sample warranty forms.
B. Samples:
1. 3 by 3 in. tile set of available colors and patterns; for initial selection.
2. Full-size floor tile of each color and pattern shown on Drawings, or as
selected by design professional for verification.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Field conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
4. Maintenance.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6523 -2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring
D. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 20-year limited commercial warranty against
defects in materials and manufacturing.
E. Maintenance Materials: Extra stock materials for Owners use, furnished from
same production run as installed products, packaged with protective covering
for storage, and identified with appropriate labels. Deliver and store on-site as
directed by Owner, including:
1. LVT: 5-percent of each color, and pattern of installed products.
2. Installation Materials: Unopened containers of each installation material,
in recommended or greater quantity, required to install extra stock
materials.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain luxury vinyl tile, and accessories through single
source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of luxury vinyl tile required
for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockups:
1. At location directed by design professional; install minimum 25 ft.2
sample floor area on as-built construction for luxury vinyl tile, and
accessories with materials noted on approved submittals, showing:
a. Substrate preparation.
b. Isolation of floor tile from joints and cracks in subfloor.
c. Installation method.
d. Pattern, color variations, and texture.
e. Rubber wall base with field-formed inside and outside corners.
f. Trim details.
g. Workmanship.
h. Aesthetic effects.
2. Prepare mockup, for design professional’s approval, after receipt of
approved submittals, and 3-weeks before start of installation. Prepare
additional mockups, if required by design professional, until approved.
3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockup, unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by design professional.
4. Maintain approved mockups during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Approved mockup may remain as part of finished
installation.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle luxury vinyl tile products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install products that are
damaged or aged beyond manufacturer’s stated shelf life.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6523 -3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install luxury vinyl tile until building is enclosed with HVAC
and lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner occupancy, and
wet work is complete and dry.
B. Maintain controlled conditions with temperatures from 65 to 85 degrees F, and
relative humidity from 40 to 60 percent before, during, and after installation until
completion of Project, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Provide ventilation to remove fumes during application of adhesive.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 LUXURY VINYL TILE
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products:
1. Basis of Design: As noted on Drawings or selected by design professional.
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
NOTE: Final selection and approval of LVT products, based on aesthetic effects,
is judged solely by design professional.
B. Description: Commercial luxury vinyl tile meeting ASTM F1700, Class III, Type
B embossed surface.
1. Size: As shown on Drawings or selected by design professional.
2. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.020 in.
3. Overall Thickness: 0.125 in.
4. Edge Profile: Square.
5. Color and Pattern: As selected by design professional.
6. Properties:
a. Critical Radiant Flux: Class I, 0.45 W/cm2 or greater, in
accordance with ASTM E648.
b. Electrostatic Resistance Rating: Between 1.0 x 105 ohms (100,000)
and 1.0 x 108 ohms (100,000,000).
c. Smoke Density: 0-450, in accordance with ASTM E662.
d. Slip Resistance: Meeting ADA Standards, or ANSI A117.1 as
applicable to state law.
7. Installation Method: Adhered to concrete floor slab.
C. Accessories: Recommended by LVT flooring manufacturer for conditions of use
and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to design professional’s review,
and compliance with specified requirements.
1. Subfloor preparation products.
2. Flooring adhesive.
3. Trim: Matching reducers, and other trim profiles as shown on Drawings.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6523 -4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
luxury vinyl tile flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify design professional of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Installation of below-grade vapor retarder under concrete slabs on-grade
to prevent vapor transmission through slab.
2. Floor slabs level to 1/4 in. in 10 ft.
3. Floor slab curing time of 28 days, or as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
4. Acceptable floor slab moisture conditions recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
5. Acceptable field conditions, for scheduled installation period,
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
C. Pre-Installation Floor Slab Moisture Testing:
1. Test new and existing floor slabs, on clean bare concrete, using a Tramex
CMEX5 moisture meter; www.tramexmeters.com; in accordance with
ASTM F3311. Perform 8 tests for first 1,000 ft.2, and 5-tests for each
additional 1,000 ft.2; testing each area in clockwise format taking highest
reading.
a. Test results with water content less than or equal to 4 percent;
generally acceptable for flooring installation, unless noted
otherwise in flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
b. Test results with water content more than 4 percent; generally
unacceptable for flooring installation, unless noted otherwise in
flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
NOTE: Check for high readings resulting from dew point issues
by comparing slab surface temperature to ambient dew point.
Acceptable surface test temperature is 10 degrees above dew
point. Mitigate such issues with HVAC, dehumidifiers, or fans to
move moisture out of slab surface before start of installation.
2. Contact flooring manufacturer for remedial moisture mitigation methods
and materials, if test readings are unacceptable for installation.
3. Provide testing before, at start of, and during flooring installation for best
results.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6523 -5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates to receive flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean substrates to remove dust, dirt, debris, moisture, and other substances
detrimental to flooring installation; remove sharp projections, and vacuum
before start of installation in accordance with ASTM D4258.
C. Protect other construction from damage by flooring work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install LVT flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean installed LVT flooring and trim, immediately following installation, using
methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
C. Clean spills and soiling from other construction using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6566-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Athletic Flooring
SECTION 09 6566
RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient athletic flooring.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA):
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law for
slip-resistance.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law for slip-resistance.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM D412 – Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension.
2. ASTM D2047 – Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of
Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.
3. ASTM F710 – Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive
Resilient Flooring.
4. ASTM F3311 – Standard Practice for Mat Bond Evaluation of Performance
and Compatibility for Resilient Flooring System Components Prior to Installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Color charts.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Sample warranty forms.
A. Samples:
1. Athletic Flooring: 12 by 12 in. piece in color noted on Drawings, or
selected by design professional; for verification.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
4. Maintenance.
D. Product Warranties: Manufacturer’s 5-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and manufacturing.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6566-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Athletic Flooring
E. Maintenance Materials: Extra stock materials for Owners use, furnished from
same production run as installed products, packaged with protective covering
for storage, and identified with appropriate labels. Deliver and store on-site as
directed by Owner, including:
1. Athletic Flooring: 5-percent of each color of installed products.
2. Installation Materials: Unopened containers of each installation material,
in recommended or greater quantity, required to install extra stock
materials.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain athletic flooring, and accessories through single
source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of athletic flooring required for
this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle athletic flooring products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install athletic flooring until building is enclosed with HVAC
and lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner occupancy, and
wet work is complete and dry.
B. Maintain controlled conditions with temperatures from 65 to 85 degrees F, and
relative humidity from 40 to 60 percent before, during, and after installation until
completion of Project, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Provide ventilation to remove fumes during application of adhesive.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products:
1. Basis of Design: Ultimate RB; Ultimate-Tough Recycled Rubber Flooring;
www.ultimaterb.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Multipurpose, engineered sports flooring composed of recycled
rubber, EPDM color granules, and polyurethane binder; slip-resistant, impact-
resistant, and sound absorbent.
1. Roll Size: 4 ft. by 25 ft., 4 ft. by 50 ft.; or custom lengths.
2. Total Thickness: 8 mm (0.32 in.)
3. Edge Profile: Square.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6566-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Athletic Flooring
4. Weight: 2.16 lb./ft.2
5. Finish: Smooth.
6. Color: As noted on Drawings, or selected by design professional.
7. Properties:
a. Tensile Strength: 285 lb./in.2, or greater in accordance with ASTM
D412.
b. Coefficient of Friction: 0.8, or greater in accordance with ASTM
D2047.
c. Slip Resistance: Meeting ADA Standards, or ANSI A117.1 as
applicable to state law
8. Installation Method: Adhered to concrete floor slab.
C. Accessories: Recommended by athletic flooring manufacturer for conditions of
use and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Transition Strips:
2. Flooring Adhesive: Ecore; E-Grip III One-Component Urethane Adhesive;
moisture cured, non-sag, permanently elastic. Use for adhering athletic
flooring to concrete slab substrate.
3. Cleaner: Ecore; E-Cleaner. Use for damp mopping, scrubbing, spray and
wipe cleaning, or with hand bucket and cloth.
4. Disinfectant: Ecore; Enviro Care Neutral Disinfectant. Use as floor
cleaner, and multipurpose disinfectant.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
athletic flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Installation of below-grade vapor retarder under concrete slabs on-grade
to prevent vapor transmission through slab.
2. Floor slabs level to 1/4 in. in 10 ft.
3. Floor slab curing time of 28 days, or as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
4. Acceptable floor slab moisture conditions recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
5. Acceptable field conditions, for scheduled installation period,
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6566-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resilient Athletic Flooring
C. Pre-Installation Floor Slab Moisture Testing:
1. Test new and existing floor slabs, on clean bare concrete, using a Tramex
CMEX5 moisture meter; www.tramexmeters.com; in accordance with
ASTM F3311. Perform 8 tests for first 1,000 ft.2, and 5-tests for each
additional 1,000 ft.2; testing each area in clockwise format taking highest
reading.
a. Test results with water content less than or equal to 4 percent;
generally acceptable for flooring installation, unless noted
otherwise in flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
b. Test results with water content more than 4 percent; generally
unacceptable for flooring installation, unless noted otherwise in
flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
NOTE: Check for high readings resulting from dew point issues
by comparing slab surface temperature to ambient dew point.
Acceptable surface test temperature is 10 degrees above dew
point. Mitigate such issues with HVAC, dehumidifiers, or fans to
move moisture out of slab surface before start of installation.
2. Contact flooring manufacturer for remedial moisture mitigation methods
and materials, if test readings are unacceptable for installation.
3. Provide testing before, at start of, and during flooring installation for best
results.
3.2 PREPARATION.
A. Prepare substrates to receive flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, approved submittals, and ASTM F710.
B. Clean substrates to remove dust, dirt, debris, moisture, oil, and other substances
detrimental to flooring installation; remove sharp projections, and vacuum
before start of installation.
C. Protect other construction from damage by flooring work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install athletic flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean installed flooring, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
C. Clean spills and soiling from other construction using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6723-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resinous Flooring
SECTION 09 6723
RESINOUS FLOORING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cementitious-urethane flooring.
2. Integral cove base.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): www.ada.gov
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law for
slip-resistance.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law for slip-resistance.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C579 – Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of
Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer
Concretes.
2. ASTM D570 – Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
3. ASTM D635 – Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent
and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
4. ASTM D638 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
5. ASTM D790 – Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of
Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
6. ASTM D1709 – Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic
Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method.
7. ASTM D2047 – Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of
Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.
8. ASTM F3311 – Standard Practice for Mat Bond Evaluation of Performance
and Compatibility for Resilient Flooring System Components Prior to
Installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Color charts.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Standard details applicable to this Project.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, and construction details:
a. Floor area layouts with substrate joints.
b. Floor drain locations.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6723-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resinous Flooring
c. Perimeters, penetrations, terminations, and special conditions.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with floor plans, and
construction details shown on Drawings.
3. Verified field dimensions.
C. Samples:
1. Colors: 3 by 3 in. set of available colors, textures, and finishes; prepared
with material specified for this Project; for final selection, and verification.
D. Installer Certification: Document prepared by resinous flooring manufacturer
confirming approval, certification, or licensing of resinous flooring installer
selected for this Project.
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Field conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
4. Maintenance.
F. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain resinous flooring and accessories through single
source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of resinous flooring required
for this Project; approved, certified, or licensed by resinous flooring
manufacturer.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle resinous flooring products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install products that are
damaged, or aged beyond shelf life.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install resinous flooring until building is enclosed with HVAC
and lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner occupancy, and
wet work is complete and dry.
B. Maintain controlled conditions with temperatures from 60 to 85 degrees F,
relative humidity below 85 percent, and substrate surface temperature 5 degrees
F min. above dew point during installation, in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6723-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resinous Flooring
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 RESINOUS FLOORING
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Dur-A-Flex; Poly-Crete MDB; www.dur-a-flex.com
2. Dex-O-Tex; Tek-Crete SL; www.dexotex.com
3. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Cementitious-urethane based, self-leveling, seamless flooring
system with natural quartz aggregate broadcast; slip-resistant, cementitious-
urethane topcoat; and integral cove base.
1. Use/Location: Food service areas, as shown on Drawings.
2. Thickness: 1/4 in., nominal.
3. Base: 6 in. high by 1/8 in. thickness with 3/4 in. radius cove, and 45
degree angled top edge.
4. Topcoat and Base Color: As selected by design professional from
manufacturer’s available colors.
5. Properties:
a. Compressive Strength: 7,800 lb./in.2; meeting ASTM C579.
b. Water Absorption: 0.04 percent; meeting ASTM D570.
c. Flammability: Self-extinguishing; meeting ASTM D635.
d. Tensile Strength: 4,200 lb./in.2; meeting ASTM D638.
e. Flexural Strength: 5,076 lb./in.2; meeting ASTM D790.
f. Impact Resistance: Greater than 160 in.-lb.; meeting ASTM D1709.
g. Coefficient of Friction: Greater than 0.6; meeting ASTM D2047.
h. Slip-Resistance: Meeting ADA Standards, or ANSI A117.1 as
applicable to state law.
6. Installation Method: Trowel applied.
C. Components:
1. Topping: Dur-A-Flex; Poly-Crete MD, 3-part cementitious-urethane; 100
percent solids.
2. Aggregate: Dur-A-Flex; natural quartz.
3. Topcoat: Dur-A-Flex; Poly-Crete Color-Fast, pigmented, 3-part
cementitious-urethane with semi-gloss finish; 100 percent solids.
4. Base: Dur-A-Flex HF; pigmented, 3-part cementitious-urethane; 100
percent solids.
D. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Shallow Fill and Patching Material: Dur-A-Flex; Poly-Crete MD. Use for
substrate repair thicknesses less than 1/4 in.
2. Deep Fill and Sloping Material: Dur-A-Flex; Poly-Crete WR. Use for
substrate repair thicknesses greater than 1/4 in.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6723-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resinous Flooring
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
resinous flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Installation of below-grade vapor retarder under slabs-on-grade to
protect flooring from vapor transmission and delamination.
2. Floor slabs level to 1/4 in. in 10 ft. except where floor slope is required.
3. Floor slab curing time of 28 days, or as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
4. Acceptable floor slab moisture conditions recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
5. Acceptable field conditions, for scheduled installation period,
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
C. Pre-Installation Floor Slab Moisture Testing:
2. Test new and existing floor slabs, on clean bare concrete, using a Tramex
CMEX5 moisture meter; www.tramexmeters.com; in accordance with
ASTM F3311. Perform 8 tests for first 1,000 ft.2, and 5-tests for each
additional 1,000 ft.2; testing each area in clockwise format taking highest
reading.
a. Test results with water content less than or equal to 4 percent;
generally acceptable for flooring installation, unless noted
otherwise in flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
b. Test results with water content more than 4 percent; generally
unacceptable for flooring installation, unless noted otherwise in
flooring manufacturer’s installation instructions.
NOTE: Check for high readings resulting from dew point issues
by comparing slab surface temperature to ambient dew point.
Acceptable surface test temperature is 10 degrees above dew
point. Mitigate such issues with HVAC, dehumidifiers, or fans to
move moisture out of slab surface before start of installation.
3. Contact flooring manufacturer for remedial moisture mitigation methods
and materials, if test readings are unacceptable for installation.
4. Provide testing before, at start of, and during flooring installation for best
results.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6723-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Resinous Flooring
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates to receive flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Clean substrate surfaces to remove dust, dirt, debris, moisture, and other
substances detrimental to flooring installation; remove sharp projections, and
vacuum before start of installation.
C. Protect other construction from damage by flooring work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install resinous flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean resinous flooring, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
C. Clean spills and soiling from other construction using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Replace damaged flooring, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6800-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Carpeting
SECTION 09 6800
CARPETING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Broadloom carpet. 2. Carpet cushion.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Submit layout and seaming drawings.
B. Product data: Submit for carpet, and installation accessories. Include test reports
verifying that carpet meets specified design criteria. Include manufacturer's
specification data and installation procedures. Indicate primers, adhesives and
seaming methods proposed for use. Should carpet manufacturer not publish
detailed installation data, installer shall submit detailed proposed procedures for
Architect's approval.
C. Maintenance data: Submit as part of Contract closeout documents. Include
recommendations for various traffic conditions, cleaning procedures and
intervals.
D. Samples; identify carpet samples by name, number and manufacturer's lot number: 1. Custom carpet strike-offs: Submit minimum 1’-6” by 1’-6” strike-off samples for each custom carpet color or design for approval of color and
pattern by Architect prior to manufacturing carpet. Approved sample
shall be basis of comparison with finished products.
2. Carpet: Submit minimum of two 1’-0” by 1’-0” samples of each type,
color and pattern selected.
3. Carpet cushion: Submit minimum 1’-0” by 1’-0” sample of each type
specified.
4. Accessories: Submit 1’-0” length of carpet edge strip.
E. Certificates: Carpet shall be certified for compliance with specification
requirements. Submit certificates from carpet manufacturer at time of carpet
delivery to project site. Each certificate shall be signed by authorized officer of
carpet manufacturing company and shall contain the name and address of the
Contractor, the project location and the quantities and date or dates of shipment
or delivery to which certificates apply.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicable standards; standards of the following, as referenced herein:
1. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC).
2. ASTM International (ASTM).
3. Department of Commerce (DOC).
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 5. The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI).
B. Design criteria; carpet and carpet tile shall meet the following:
1. Smoke development: Less than 450 when tested in accord with NFPA
258.
2. Critical radiant flux: Class I, 0.45 watts/cm2 when tested in accord with
ASTM E648.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6800-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Carpeting
3. Electrostatic propensity: Less than 3000 volts when tested in accord with
AATCC 134.
4. Flammability of carpet: Pass methanamine pill test when tested in accord
with ASTM D2859.
C. Emissions compliance:
1. Carpet: Emissions shall not exceed the following limits when tested in accord with ASTM D5116 and shall be in compliance with CRI Indoor Air Testing Program and shall bear CRI Label. a. Total volatile organic compounds (VOCs): Maximum 0.5 mg per
square meter per hour.
b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg per square meter per hour.
c. 4-PC (4-Phenylcychlohexane): 0.05 mg per square meter per hour.
d. Styrene: 0.4 mg per square meter per hour.
2. Adhesive: Emissions shall not exceed the following limits when tested in accord with ASTM D5116 and shall be in compliance with CRI Indoor Air Testing Program and shall bear CRI Label.
a. Total organic compounds (VOCs): Maximum 10.0 mg per square
meter per hour.
b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg per square meter per hour.
c. 2-Ethyl-I-Hexanol: 3.0 mg per square meter per hour.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original mill wrappings, with carpet having
register tag number attached. Deliver only after building is enclosed and spaces
have controlled temperature and humidity.
B. Store materials under cover, off floor, in ventilated space. Protect from damage,
staining and moisture. Stand no roll material on end.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Provide fresh air ventilation during entire installation process and for 72 hours
afterwards.
1.6 WARRANTIES
A. Carpet warranty:
1. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for each type of carpet stating
that carpet will remain dimensionally stable, colorfast and static-resistant
and will not lose more than 10% by weight of face yarn, will not edge ravel or separate. 2. Warranty period shall be 15 years, beginning at Date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Extra materials:
1. Provide 6% excess of each type, pattern and color of broadloom carpet for
Owner's use. Salvage scraps from installation over three sq. ft. in area
and over 1'-0" in width for Owner's use. 2. Provide two cartons of each type, pattern and color of carpet tile for Owner's use. 3. Store maintenance material where directed by Owner.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6800-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Carpeting
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 BROADLOOM CARPET
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products:
1. Basis of Design: As shown on Drawings, or selected by design
professional.
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description:
1. Material: As shown on Drawings.
2. Roll Size: 12 ft. wide. 3. Weight: As shown on Drawings. 4. Pattern and Color: As shown on Drawings. 5. Installation Method: Glue-down.
2.2 CARPET CUSHION A. Acceptable Product: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide Basis of Design products:
1. Basis of Design: As shown on Drawings, or selected by design
professional.
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description:
1. Type: Virgin SBR synthetic rubber with reinforced fiberglass facings top
and bottom, anti-microbial.
2. Properties:
a. Fire Resistance: Class B, when tested in accord with ASTM E 84. Passes smoke chamber test requirements of ASTM E 6623 and Methanamine Pill Test. 3. Installation Method: Glue-down.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Carpet edge strip: Burke Flooring, a Division of Burke Industries, Imperial
Reducer for glue-down installation; colors as selected by Interior Designer from
manufacturer's standard selection.
B. Adhesive: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining type recommended by
carpet and carpet tile manufacturer’s product data for installation conditions. Adhesive shall be solvent-free, release type, allowing removal of carpet without damage to carpet, or substrate. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Leveling compound; acceptable products:
1. Custom Building Products, LevelQuik RS.
2. Euclid Chemical Co., Super Flo-Top.
3. Mapei, Ultraplan 1 Plus.
D. Miscellaneous materials: Furnish fiberglass seaming tape, thread and similar
accessories required for carpet installation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6800-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Carpeting
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Subfloor curing:
1. Concrete subfloors shall be cured in accord with the requirements of the
Concrete section.
2. If a curing compound has been used, Contractor shall verify that compound is compatible with flooring manufacturer’s installation materials. 3. If the curing compound is not compatible, or if compatibility is unknown,
Contractor shall remove curing compound by shot-blasting or other
methods approved by floor finish manufacturer.
B. Concrete moisture vapor emission, humidity levels and pH testing: Perform one
or more of the following tests, as required by flooring manufacturer’s product
data, using the following methods:
1. Moisture vapor emissions: Perform tests on subfloors in accord with ASTM F1869 calcium chloride test and flooring manufacturer’s product data, to determine if surfaces are acceptable to receive specified flooring products.
2. Humidity level: Perform on subfloors in accord with ASTM F2170 in situ
probe and flooring manufacturer’s product data, to determine if surfaces
are acceptable to receive specified flooring products.
3. Concrete pH level: Perform on subfloors to verify that surfaces are
acceptable to receive specified flooring products.
4. Correction of conditions: Prior to installation, correct conditions that do
not meet flooring manufacture’s requirements, or that may be detrimental to flooring installation.
C. Vacuum substrate immediately prior to beginning carpet installation. Remove
debris, oil, grease and other foreign materials. Surfaces to receive installation
shall be dry.
D. Grind high areas and fill depressions with leveling compound where required to
produce smooth installation and for proper alignment of carpet with adjacent
flooring materials.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
A. Except where more stringent requirements are specified herein, comply with
manufacturer's product data and with CRI Commercial Installation Standard
104, Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials.
B. Lay out carpeting materials in accord with approved shop drawings.
C. Lay carpet with pattern and texture running in direction as shown on the drawings and approved shop drawings, and as directed by Interior Designer. Lay carpet with pattern and texture running in same direction. Do not seam weft
to warp. Lay out for minimum number of seams. Locate seams perpendicular to
doorways so as not to occur in doorways. Locate seams at doorways parallel to
openings directly under door.
D. Extend carpet and carpet tile under movable furniture and equipment and into
closets of rooms indicated to be carpeted unless other floor finish is indicated in
finish schedule.
E. Install carpet edge strip at locations where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic
and where carpet insets terminate, except where another device, such as a
threshold, is indicated.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 6800-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Carpeting
F. Maintain edges and seams straight and square with adjacent surfaces.
3.3 DOUBLE-GLUE INSTALLATION
A. Install specified cushion in accord with cushion and adhesive manufacturers’
product data:
1. Install rubber cushion over area to be carpeted, with seams perpendicular
to carpet seams and with edges butted against vertical surfaces and terminations. Install in largest sizes practicable for minimum number of seams. 2. Install cushion with specified adhesive; butt seams and edges tightly,
with no gaps.
3. Smooth out air bubbles using a roller.
B. Carpet
1. Install carpet with seams perpendicular to cushion seams. 2. Unroll, cut and fit carpet lengths for space prior to applying adhesive. In cutting, allow ½” overlap in adjacent widths. 3. Apply adhesive in accord with manufacturer’s product data: Apply to
half of width at a time, beginning at seam, with carpet width already laid.
4. As installation progresses, roll out air bubbles using a roller weighing
approximately 50 lbs.
5. Head bond seams, in accord with carpet manufacturer’s product data.
a. Prior to beginning installation, test carpet for satisfactory bond
using heat-bonding method on carpet scraps. Determine proper
temperature of seaming iron to prevent damage to face yarn and backing.
b. Apply seaming cement to cut backing and pile edges without
evidence on carpet faces . Compress ½” overlap at seam by fitting
against width already laid, then push looseness away from seam.
c. During seaming, exercise care to prevent improper temperature of
seaming iron. Correct cupping or peaking of seams while seam is
being made.
6. Trim and secure carpet edges.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At completion of installation, remove debris. Sort out scraps to be saved.
B. Vacuum carpet with a commercial type vacuum cleaner having a rotating
agitator in nozzle.
C. Use corner attachment for vacuuming in corners and crevices.
D. Remove stains with spot remover acceptable to carpet manufacturer.
E. Immediately after cleaning, cover carpeted areas with heavy kraft paper.
Maintain in place for remainder of construction period.
F. Just prior to Date of Substantial Completion, remove protective covering and
vacuum carpet. Steam clean areas if required to remove stains.
G. Replace carpet which cannot be cleaned.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 7716-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Stretched-Fabric Wall and Ceiling Systems
SECTION 09 7716
STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL AND CEILING SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall and ceiling track.
2. Acoustical core infill.
3. Fabric facing.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C423 – Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound
Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
2. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Standard details applicable to this Project.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Fabric panel layouts.
b. Details at perimeter edges, panel joints, penetrations, and special
conditions.
c. Component details with dimensions, profiles, thicknesses, and
attachment to supporting construction.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with reflected ceiling
plans, and construction details shown on Drawings.
3. Verified field dimensions for ceiling areas to receive fabric panels.
C. Samples:
1. Stretched-Fabric Panel: 12 by 12 in. prepared with specified materials;
showing fabric texture and color expected in finished installation.
2. Ceiling Track: 12 in. lengths of each profile.
3. Infill: 12 by 12 in. boards.
D. Installer Certification: Document prepared by stretched-fabric system
manufacturer confirming approval, authorization, or licensing of stretched-fabric
system installer selected for this Project.
E. Test Reports: Documents prepared by independent testing laboratory confirming
products meet specified material standards, and performance requirements.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 7716-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Stretched-Fabric Wall and Ceiling Systems
F. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Field conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
G. Installation Warranty: Installer’s limited lifetime warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
H. Maintenance Materials: Extra stock materials for Owners use, furnished from
same production run as installed products, packaged with protective covering
for storage, and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver and store on-
site as directed by Owner, including:
1. Fabric: Full size for replacement of 1-ceiling panel.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain stretched-fabric panel components through single
source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of stretched-fabric panel work
required for this Project; approved, authorized, or licensed by stretched-fabric
system manufacturer.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockups:
1. At location directed by design professional; install 1-panel sample ceiling
area on as-built construction with materials noted on approved
submittals, showing:
a. Substrate preparation.
b. Components.
c. Fabric color.
d. Fastening methods.
e. Trim details.
f. Workmanship.
g. Aesthetic effects.
2. Prepare mockup for design professional’s approval, after receipt of
approved submittals, and 3-weeks before start of installation. Prepare
additional mockups, if required by design professional, until approved.
NOTE: Final selection and approval of fabric color, based on aesthetic
effects, is judged solely by design professional. Do not purchase or install
fabric until approval of mockup by design professional.
3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockup unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by design professional.
4. Maintain approved mockups during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Approved mockups may remain as part of
finished installation.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 7716-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Stretched-Fabric Wall and Ceiling Systems
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle fabric panel products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install stretched-fabric products until building is enclosed with
HVAC and lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner
occupancy; and adjoining construction, painting and other wet work are
complete and dry.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL AND CEILING SYSTEMS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products:
1. Basis of Design: Fabritrak Systems; www.fabritrak.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description:
1. Use/Location: Wall and ceiling panels in Dining Hall 125.
2. Design: As shown on Drawings.
3. System Properties:
a. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.75 minimum; in accordance with
ASTM C423.
b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 0-25;
smoke developed 0-450; in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Installation Method: Mechanically attached track and infill with fabric
stretched in-place.
C. Components:
1. Track: Fabritrak; Acoustical Track System for Walls and Ceilings.
a. Material: Extruded PVC.
b. Depth: 1-3/8 in.
c. Profile: As selected by design professional.
d. Color: As selected by design professional.
2. Infill: : Fabritrak; Terracore Poly; Sound Absorbing Polyester Board.
a. Material: 100 percent polyester.
b. Thickness: 1 in.
c. Size: 2 by 4 ft., 4 by 4 ft., or 4 by 8 ft.
d. Color: White.
e. Properties:
1) Density: 5.53 lb./ft.3
2) Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.65 minimum; in accordance
with ASTM C423.
3. Fabric: : Fabritrak; Fabrispan; Wide Width & Ultra-Wide Width Fabric.
a. Material: 100 percent polyester.
b. Width: 10 ft.
c. Weight: Varies with selected fabric.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 7716-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Stretched-Fabric Wall and Ceiling Systems
d. Color: As selected by design professional.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
stretched-fabric panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Completion of rough-in installation for items located in or above
stretched-fabric panels, including plumbing, fire protection, HVAC,
electrical, and other work.
2. Manufacturer’s required field conditions for scheduled installation
period.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install stretched-fabric panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Abut panel edges to adjoining finishes, surfaces, or joint conditions
without reveals or gaps unless required by design.
2. Provide panel surfaces without wrinkles, sags, or other visible defects.
3. Provide tight, straight joints, without ripples, waviness, or other visible
defects.
4. Do not install fabric seams by sewing.
5. Installation Tolerances:
a. Panels from Location: 1/8 in., max.
b. Surfaces from Flush Alignment: 1/16 in. max.
c. Reveal Width: 1/16 in. max.
B. Framework:
1. Install framework around perimeter of each panel area with continuous
lengths to greatest extent possible.
2. Shim and scribe framework to align with adjoining surfaces.
3. Securely attach framework to substrate to prevent sagging or moving out
of place as fabric is stretched tight.
4. Mechanically attach framework to substrate using pneumatic stapler with
18 gauge diverging head staples forming divergent-tine anchors.
C. Infill:
1. Install infill in continuous layer, tight to substrate and framework.
2. Mechanically attach infill to substrate using pneumatic stapler with 18
gauge diverging head staples forming divergent-tine anchors.
3. Do not attach infill to substrate by adhesive taping, or gluing.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 7716-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Stretched-Fabric Wall and Ceiling Systems
D. Fabric:
1. Cut fabric from each roll in sequence of drops and matching direction of
weave for sequential and uniform installation.
2. Install fabric with warp and weft threads square, level and straight. Align
and match patterns, textures, and grain of fabric at seams. Join panels
without distortion to geometry of fabric or pattern throughout full length
of seam.
3. Stretch, re-stretch, and tension fabric over framework and air-cure for 24-
hours min. between each stretch until sufficiently taught to avoid sagging
under varying year-round temperature and humidity conditions.
4. Ensure framework does not telescope through fabric; and stretched fabric
does not puddle or dent when touched or leaned on, and is self-healing;
returning back to original finished condition, when pushed, punched, or
hit.
5. Securely attach fabric to framework with hand tools appropriate for joint
condition and nature of fabric. Do not attach fabric to framework by
nailing, tacking, stapling, adhesive taping, or gluing. Ensure fabric
surface is free of wrinkles, and weave is square, level, straight, and
properly aligned horizontally.
6. Install fabric in butt joined panels as shown on Drawings.
E. Clean fabric panels immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by fabric manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed work from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged work that cannot be
restored to acceptable condition, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 8436-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Sound Absorbing Ceiling Panels
SECTION 09 8436
SOUND ABSORBING CEILING PANELS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Acoustical panels.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C423 – Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound
Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
2. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
3. ASTM E1264 – Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
4. ASTM E1477 – Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of
Acoustical Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Standard details applicable to this Project.
4. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Acoustical panel layouts with panel dimensions, thickness, and
fastener patterns for attachment to supporting construction.
b. Location, size, and orientation of light fixtures, diffusers, speakers,
sprinkler heads, access panels, and other items penetrating
through panels.
c. Details at perimeter edges, panel joints, penetrations, and special
conditions.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with reflected ceiling
plans, and construction details shown on Drawings.
3. Verified field dimensions for ceiling areas to receive acoustical panels.
C. Samples:
1. Color: 8 by 8 in. swatches of color selected by design professional,
prepared on rigid backing; for verification.
2. Acoustical Panel: 12 by 12 in. prepared with specified materials; showing,
1-finished corner, 2-finished edges, 1-direct mount attachment point;
specified finish; and color approved by design professional.
D. Test Reports: Documents prepared by independent testing laboratory confirming
products meet specified material standards, and performance requirements.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 8436-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Sound Absorbing Ceiling Panels
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
F. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
G. Maintenance Materials: Extra stock materials for Owners use, furnished from
same production run as installed products, packaged with protective covering
for storage, and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver and store on-
site as directed by Owner, including:
1. Acoustical Panels: 1-full size panel.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain acoustical panels products through single source
from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of acoustical panel ceilings
required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
D. Mockups:
1. At location directed by design professional; install 1-panel sample ceiling
area on as-built construction with materials noted on approved
submittals, showing:
a. Substrate preparation.
b. Panel edges, finish, and color.
c. Cutout edges.
d. Fastening methods.
e. Workmanship.
f. Aesthetic effects.
2. Prepare mockup for design professional’s approval, after receipt of
approved submittals, and 3-weeks before start of installation. Prepare
additional mockups, if required by design professional, until approved.
3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockup, unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by design professional.
4. Maintain approved mockups during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Approved mockups may remain as part of
finished installation.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle acoustical panel products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 8436-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Sound Absorbing Ceiling Panels
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install acoustical panels until building is enclosed and
weathertight, with adjoining construction and work above ceilings complete,
wet-work complete and dry; and HVAC and lighting systems operating at
design conditions for Owner occupancy.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT-4)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design products:
1. Basis of Design: Sound Concepts; Acoustical Panel Ceilings;
www.soundconceptscan.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Sound-absorbing, fiberglass panels; meeting ASTM E1264 Type XII
Form 2 Pattern E Class A; with factory-applied, proprietary coating finish.
1. Use/Location: Retrofit acoustical panel ceiling in Exercise 154.
2. Design: As shown on Drawings.
3. Material: 6 lb./ft.3 density fiberglass.
4. Thickness: 1 in.
5. Size: 48 by 120 in. max.
6. Edge Profile: Square hardened, unless noted otherwise.
7. Finish: Euromat acoustically transparent, fine textured, flat latex coating
with appearance of Level 5 gypsum board finish.
8. Color: Match approved mockup.
9. Properties:
a. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.85 min.; in accordance with ASTM
C423.
b. Light Reflectance: (standard white) 92.5 percent; in accordance
with ASTM E1477.
c. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A; flame spread 20; smoke
developed 30; in accordance with ASTM E84.
10. Installation Method: Direct mount to existing gypsum board ceiling.
C. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to design professional’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Direct mount fasteners.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
acoustical panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify design professional of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 8436-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Sound Absorbing Ceiling Panels
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Deflection of existing gypsum board ceiling plane within plus or minus
1/8 inch in 12 ft.; non-cumulative.
2. Installation of finished items located in ceiling, including light fixtures,
speakers, diffusers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and other items
penetrating through panels.
3. Manufacturer’s required field conditions for scheduled installation
period.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Install panels in continuous layer, tight to adjoining finishes, surfaces, or
joint conditions, without reveals or gaps, unless noted otherwise.
2. Provide field-fabricated cutouts for finished items penetrating through
panels.
3. Mechanically attach panels to substrate with direct mount fasteners.
4. Provide tight, straight joints, without visible defects.
B. Clean acoustical panels immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by fabric manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed work from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged work that cannot be
restored to acceptable condition, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 9100-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Painting
SECTION 09 9100
PAINTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior paint and stain.
2. Exterior paint.
3. Paint schedules.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 2119 – Foamed-in-Place Insulation for prescriptive use of latex
vapor barrier primer sealer specified in Part 3 – Interior Paint and Stain
Schedule.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in
Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each of product, including:
1. Technical data sheets.
B. Product List: Show paint types, products, color designations, and room locations
of paint systems for each surface and item to be painted. Use room names and
numbers shown on Drawings. Cross-reference locations to paint systems shown
on Part 3, Paint Schedules.
C. Samples:
1. Paint Color Systems: 8 by 8 in. swatches of each color selected by
Architect, prepared on rigid backing; for verification.
a. Apply coats in steps showing each coat required for system.
b. Label each coat of each system.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Environmental conditions.
3. Preparation, and installation.
4. Maintenance.
E. Maintenance Materials: Extra stock materials for Owners use, furnished from
same production run as installed products, packaged with protective covering
for storage, and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver and store on-
site as directed by Owner, including:
1. Paint: 1-gallon of each primer, and finish coat color, in unopened
containers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 9100-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Painting
A. Source Limitations: Obtain paint products through single source from same
manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of painting work required for
this Project.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent inspection, testing, or special
inspection agency meeting ASTM E329, and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction; with experience, and capability to conduct required services.
D. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
E. Mockups:
1. At locations directed by design professional paint 100 ft.2 sample wall and
ceiling areas on as-built construction, and single designated items to
represent surfaces and conditions for each paint system and color with
materials noted on approved submittals, showing:
a. Substrate preparation.
b. Color and finish selections under actual lighting conditions.
c. Workmanship.
d. Aesthetic effects.
2. Prepare mockups for design professional’s approval, after receipt of
approved submittals, and 3-weeks before start of painting work. Prepare
additional mockups, if required by design professional, until approved.
NOTE: Final approval of paint color and finish selections are based on
mockups. If original color and finish selections are not approved, prepare
additional mockups with additional colors and finishes, if required by
design professional, until approved.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from
Contract Documents contained in mockup, unless such deviations are
specifically approved in writing by design professional.
4. Maintain approved mockups during construction as required basis for
acceptable installation. Approved mockups may remain as part of
finished work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle paint products in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install products that are
damaged, or aged beyond shelf life.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interior: Do not deliver or install paint products until building is enclosed with
HVAC and lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner
occupancy, wet work is completed, and residual moisture has dissipated.
1. Temperature: 65 to 85 degrees F.
2. Humidity: 40 to 60 percent.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 9100-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Painting
B. Exterior:
1. Do not apply paint when air and surface temperatures are less than 40
degrees F, or greater than 90 degrees F.
2. Do not apply paint when relative humidity is greater than 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 degrees F above dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT AND STAIN
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: As shown on Part 3, Paint Schedules.
2. Benjamin Moore; www.benjaminmoore.com
3. PPG; www.ppgpaints.com
4. Sherwin-Williams; www.sherwinwilliams.com
5. Substitutions: Not allowed.
NOTE: Final approval of color and finish selections, based on aesthetic
effects, is judged solely by design professional.
B. Description: Recommended by paint products manufacturer for conditions of
use and application.
1. Types: As shown on Part 3, Paint Schedules.
2. Colors: Standard or color matched as selected by design professional.
C. Compatibility: Provide paint products that are compatible with one another, and
with specified substrates; based on testing and manufacturer’s field experience
with conditions of use and installation.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of paint
and stain products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Locations of paintable, and non-paintable sealants.
2. Substrate moisture content meets requirements of paint products
manufacturer.
3. Recommended field conditions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 9100-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Painting
C. Pre-Installation Testing:
1. Concrete Moisture Testing: Test concrete floor slabs with Tramex CME5
moisture meter (www.tramexmeters.com ). Perform 8 tests for first 1,000
ft.2, and 5 tests for each additional 1,000 ft.2, taking highest reading. If any
test indicates water content over 4 percent, perform additional calcium
chloride, and relative humidity tests. Continue testing throughout
installation period..
2. Calcium Chloride Test: Perform 1 test every 1,000 ft.2 with min. of 3 tests
for moisture vapor emission (MVE), in accordance with ASTM F1869.
a. MVE less than 3 lb./1,000 ft.2; acceptable for painting.
b. MVE greater than 3 lb./1,000 ft.2; unacceptable for painting. Do
not start installation until unacceptable moisture conditions are
corrected. Contact paint manufacturer for recommendations.
3. Relative Humidity Test: Perform 1 test every 1,000 ft.2 with min. of 3 tests
for relative humidity (RH), in accordance with ASTM F2170.
a. RH less than 75 percent/1,000 ft.2; acceptable for painting.
b. RH greater than 75 percent/1,000 ft.2; unacceptable for painting.
Do not start installation until unacceptable moisture conditions
are corrected. Contact paint manufacturer for recommendations.
4. Use readings from both calcium chloride and relative humidity tests to
accurately determine concrete moisture conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates to receive paint in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in-place that are
removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in trades
involved to reinstall removed items.
2. Remove surface-applied protection, if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances detrimental to paint bond, including dust, dirt, oil,
and grease.
1. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
2. Re-prime over existing primers, with barrier coat primer required to
produce paint systems shown on Part 3, Paint Schedules.
NOTE: Do not allow dust, and other contaminates from cleaning adjacent
areas to fall on new, wet painted surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install paint in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Do not remove labels from paint product containers.
2. Paint systems as shown on Part 3, Paint Schedules include 2 finish coats
over primer, unless noted otherwise.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 9100-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Painting
3. Use paint systems shown on Part 3, Paint Schedules for new and existing
materials of same type, unless noted otherwise.
3.4 FIELD TESTING
A. Provide qualified testing agency meeting ASTM E329 to perform paint
installation inspection, testing, and reporting services.
1. Provide Construction Progress Schedule to testing agency, at start of
Project, for coordination and scheduling of services.
2. Cooperate with testing agency in performance of services.
3. Notify Architect 7-days before date and time of inspections and tests.
4. Submit inspection and testing reports to design professional within 3-
days after performing services.
B. Inspection and Testing Requirements:
1. Progress inspection of paint materials, paint systems, and installation
methods.
2. Test for number of coats, and dry film thicknesses against specified DFTs
with mil gauge every 100 ft.2, or as recommended by testing agency.
C. Repair, or replace painting, at no cost to Owner, where inspection or test results
show defects in materials, installation, or failure to meet requirements of
manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
D. Perform remedial painting work, and additional inspection and testing services
until approved, at no cost to Owner.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from over-spray, splatters, and spills. Promptly remove
residual paint and stain from adjacent surfaces using cleaning methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
B. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project; provide
“Wet Paint” signs at painted items and surfaces.
C. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work, as directed by design professional.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINT AND STAIN SCHEDULE
A. Concrete:
1. Semi-Gloss Epoxy Floor Sealer: Use for sealing unfinished interior
concrete floor slabs.
a. Sealer: Benjamin Moore; Corotech Moisture Tolerant Quick Set
Epoxy Sealer V156; 2-part, fast-dry, waterborne polyamide;
applied at dry film thickness of 1.4 to 1.6 mils.
b. Finish: Not required.
B. Wood:
1. Semi-Gloss Acrylic-Latex: Use for painted millwork, wood doors, and
trim.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer
N534; applied at dry film thickness of 1.4 mils.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 9100-6
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Painting
b. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss Finish
T546; applied at dry film thickness of 1.8 mils.
2. Semi-Gloss High-Performance Acrylic-Latex: Use for painted millwork,
wood doors, and trim in high-traffic areas for greater durability and
scuff-resistance.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer
N534; applied at dry film thickness of 1.4 mils.
b. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Scuff-X Interior Semi-Gloss
Finish 487; applied at dry film thickness of 1.6 to 1.8 mils.
C. Gypsum Board:
1. Flat Acrylic-Latex: Use for ceilings.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer
N534; applied at dry film thickness of 1.4 mils.
b. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Flat FinishT535;
applied at dry film thickness of 1.8 mils.
2. Eggshell Acrylic-Latex: Use for walls.
c. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer
N534; applied at dry film thickness of 1.4 mils.
d. Finish Coats: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Eggshell
Finish T538; applied at dry film thickness of 1.8 mils.
3. Eggshell High-Performance Acrylic-Latex: Use for walls in high-traffic
areas for greater durability and scuff-resistance.
c. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer
N534; applied at dry film thickness of 1.4 mils.
d. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Scuff-X Interior Eggshell
Finish 485; applied at dry film thickness of 1.6 to 1.8 mils.
4. Latex Vapor Barrier Primer Sealer: Use for prescriptive painted finish,
including 1-coat latex primer sealer plus 2-coats flat acrylic-latex paint
applied on interior gypsum board ceilings over spray foam insulation for
required Class 2 latex vapor retarder.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Latex Vapor Barrier Primer
Sealer 573; applied at dry film thickness of 1.3 mils.
b. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Flat Finish T535;
applied at dry film thickness of 1.8 mils.
D. Ferrous Metal (Steel and Iron):
1. Semi-Gloss Acrylic-Latex: Use for hollow metal doors and frames.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer
HP04; applied at dry film thickness of 1.7 to 2.3 mils.
b. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Semi-Gloss
HP29; applied at dry film thickness of 2.3 mils.
2. Semi-Gloss High-Performance Acrylic-Latex: Use for hollow metal doors
and frames in high-traffic areas for greater durability and scuff-resistance.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer
HP04; applied at dry film thickness of 1.7 to 2.3 mils.
b. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Scuff-X Interior Semi-Gloss
Finish 487; applied at dry film thickness of 1.6 to 1.8 mils.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 9100-7
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Painting
E. Non-Ferrous Metal (Galvanized and Aluminum):
1. Semi-Gloss High-Performance Acrylic-Latex: Use for hollow metal doors
and frames in high-traffic areas for greater durability and scuff-resistance.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer
HP04; applied at dry film thickness of 1.7 to 2.3 mils.
b. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Scuff-X Interior Semi-Gloss
Finish 487; applied at dry film thickness of 1.6 to 1.8 mils.
F. Stained Woodwork:
1. Alkyd Stain with Satin-Polyurethane Finish: 2-finish coats clear satin
polyurethane over 1-coat sealer and interior wood stain.
a. Stain Coat: PPG; Deft DFT400 Interior Oil Based Wood Stain.
b. Sealer Coat: PPG; Deft DFT61 Interior Water Based Sanding
Sealer.
c. Finish Coats: PPG; Deft DFT159 Interior Water Based
Polyurethane Satin Varnish.
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Block:
1. Satin Acrylic: Use for painted Maintenance Yard walls at Youth Pavilion
(Building 2).
a. Concrete Block Filler: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Hi-Build
Masonry Block Filler 571; applied at dry film thickness of 8.5 mils.
b. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec EXT Satin Finish 448; applied
at dry film thickness of 1.5 mils..
B. Cementitious Material:
1. Satin Acrylic: Use for fiber-cement siding.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Masonry Interior/Exterior
100% Acrylic Sealer 608; applied at dry film thickness of 0.95 mil.
b. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec EXT Satin Finish 448; applied
at dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
C. Wood:
1. Satin Acrylic: Use for wood ceilings, railings, heavy timber members.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Fresh Start Exterior Wood primer 094;
applied at dry film thickness of 1.7 mils.
b. Finish Coats: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec EXT Satin Finish 448;
applied at dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
D. Plastic:
1. Satin Acrylic: Use for PVC column covers and trim.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Insl-X Stix Waterborne Bonding Primer
SXA-110; applied at dry film thickness of 1.6 mils.
b. Finish Coats: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec EXT Satin Finish 448;
applied at dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
E. Ferrous Metal (Steel and Iron):
1. Semi-Gloss Acrylic: Use for miscellaneous items.
a. Pre-Prime: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer
HP04; stripe coat field welds.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 09 9100-8
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Painting
b. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer
HP04; applied at dry film thickness of 1.7 to 2.3 mils.
c. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Semi-Gloss
HP29; applied at dry film thickness of 2.3 mils.
F. Non-Ferrous Metal (Galvanized and Aluminum):
1. Satin Acrylic: Use for aluminum railings, galvanized lintel angles, and
miscellaneous items.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer
HP04; applied at dry film thickness of 1.7 to 2.3 mils.
b. Finish: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Low Luster
HP25; applied at dry film thickness of 2.3 mils.
2. Semi-Gloss Acrylic: Use for galvanized hollow metal doors and frames.
a. Primer: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer
HP04; applied at dry film thickness of 1.7 to 2.3 mils.
b. Finish Coats: Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic
Semi-Gloss HP29; applied at dry film thickness of 2.3 mils.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 2613-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Corner Guards
SECTION 10 2613
CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Stainless steel corner guards.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 8316 – Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling for material protected by
corner guards.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM A666 – Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Corner guard size, length, angle; fastener locations and spacing.
b. Detail at cut edge treatment.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
3. Maintenance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain corner guards through single source from same
manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of corner guards required for
this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle corner guards in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 2613-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Corner Guards
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install corner guards until building is enclosed with HVAC and
lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner occupancy; wet work
completed, and residual moisture dissipated.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Babcock-Davis; Stainless Steel Corner Guard;
www.babcock-davis.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Corner angle, 90 degrees, with countersunk fastener holes at
maximum 16 in. on-center, and rounded edges.
1. Use/Location: Protection of outside corners at fiberglass reinforced
paneling installed in food service areas.
2. Material: 16 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel meeting ASTM A666.
3. Size: 3 by 3 in. by 48 in. length, or as noted on Drawings.
4. Finish: No. 4 Satin, with removable protective film.
5. Installation Method: Surface mounted; mechanically attached.
C. Accessories: Recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use and
application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. Fasteners: No. 6 by 1-1/2 in. stainless steel flat head
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of corner
guards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, and
approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Installation and location of corner framing members for attachment of
fasteners.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 2613-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Corner Guards
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install corner guards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Set bottom of corner guard at top of wall base material.
B. Clean installed products immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 2815-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Toilet and Bath Accessories
SECTION 10 2815
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Grab bars.
2. Diaper changer.
3. Deck mounted soap dispenser.
4. Toilet tissue holders.
5. Recessed paper towel dispenser and waste receptacles.
6. Clothing hooks.
7. Shower amenities dispenser.
8. Shower rods, curtains and hooks.
9. ADA shower seats.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 1053 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry for concealed 2x wood
backing members for attachment of accessories.
2. Division 22 – Plumbing for rough-in, fittings, and fixtures including ADA
compliant hand-held shower unit, and valve box at accessible showers.
C. Work by Owner:
1. Mirrors.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): www.ada.gov
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law.
C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org
1. ASCE/SEI 7-10 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
D. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM A666 – Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
B. Product List: Show product, and location of each toilet accessory item for each
room to receive toilet accessories. Use room names and numbers as shown on
Drawings. Cross-reference toilet accessory items to item designations shown on
Drawings at Plumbing Fixture & Accessory Schedule.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 2815-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Toilet and Bath Accessories
C. Samples:
1. Toilet Accessories: Selected items, if requested by design professional; for
verification.
D. Manufacturer’s Test Reports: Documents prepared by independent testing
agency confirming grab bars installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions meet structural loading requirements of ASCE/SEI 7-10, and
authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
3. Maintenance.
4. Replacement parts information.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain toilet accessories through single source.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of toilet accessories required
for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle toilet accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to avoid damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: As shown on Drawings.
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
NOTE: Final approval of toilet accessory products, based on aesthetic
effects, is judged solely by design professional.
B. Description: As shown on Drawings.
C. Materials:
1. Stainless Steel: Type 304, 0.0312 in. minimum thickness, unless noted
otherwise; meeting ASTM A 666.
2. Finish: As shown on Drawings. 3. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other attachments of same material as accessory product.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 2815-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Toilet and Bath Accessories
D. Fabrication:
1. Provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer’s name and product model number on interior surface not exposed to view, or on back surface of each accessory. Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories.
2. Fabricate units with welded construction, tight seams and joints, and
exposed edges rolled, unless noted otherwise. Provide concealed
anchorage where possible.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of toilet
accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Installation and location of concealed backing members for attachment of
grab bars, and other surface mounted accessory items.
2. Installation of rough-openings, and concealed backing members as
required for mounting recessed accessory items.
3. Accessory mounting locations allow for room door swings; full access,
use, and service of accessory items.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mount accessories at heights and locations in accordance with ADA
Standards.
2. Install accessories plumb, level, and securely attached.
3. Test and adjust accessories for smooth operation.
4. Replace defective items.
B. Clean accessories, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 3100-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Manufactured Fireplaces
SECTION 10 3100
MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes:
1. Factory-built vent-free fireplaces.
2. Firebrick.
3. Gas logs.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 04 2114 – Surface Bonded Brick Veneer Masonry for fireplace
fronts.
2. Division 23 – HVAC for natural gas piping, and shut-off valves for gas
logs.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI Z21.11.2 – Gas Fired Room Heaters, Volume II, Unvented Room
Heaters.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM C1261 – Standard Specification for Firebox Brick for Residential
Fireplaces.
C. National Fireplace Institute (NFI): www.nficertified.org
1. NFI Certified Specialist for installation of gas vent-free fireplaces.
D. UL (UL): www.ul.com
1. UL 127 – Standard for Factory-Built Fireplaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Standard details applicable to this Project.
4. Building code evaluation reports.
5. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Firebox, firebrick lining, firebox enclosure framing with hearths,
facings, and mantels.
b. Clearances to combustibles.
c. Firebox and firebrick details, and alignment with adjoining
materials.
2. Cross-referencing manufacturer’s standard details with fireplace plans
and construction details shown on Drawings.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 3100-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Manufactured Fireplaces
C. Samples:
1. Firebrick: Full-size, 4 brick sets of each color, showing full range of color
variation and appearance characteristics expected in finished installation.
D. Installer Certification: Document prepared by National Fireplace Institute (NFI)
showing certification of fireplace installer selected for this Project, in accordance
with NFI Certified Specialist Programs for installation of gas vent-free fireplaces.
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
F. Vent-Free Gas Log Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited lifetime warranty against
defects in materials and workmanship.
G. Vent-Free Gas Log Burner Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited 10 year warranty
against defects in materials and workmanship.
H. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 2 year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, approved submittals, or authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain factory-built fireplaces, and installation products through single
source from same manufacturer.
2. Obtain firebrick through single source from same manufacturer.
3. Obtain gas logs through single source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of fireplaces required for this
Project; and certified by National Fireplace Institute (NFI).
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle fireplaces, firebrick, and gas logs in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle fireplaces, firebrick, and gas logs with care to avoid damage. Do not
install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FACTORY-BUILT VENT-FREE FIREPLACES (FP-1) and (FP-2)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Earthcore; Isokern Vent-Free Series; www.earthcore.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 3100-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Manufactured Fireplaces
B. Description: Prefabricated fireplaces with interlocking precast refractory blocks
designed for field assembly of firebox units; meeting UL 127.
1. Location:
a. FP-1: Grille 121A.
b. FP-2: Dining Hall 125
2. Models:
a. FP-1: Isokern 36” Vent-Free Tall; with 42-3/16 in. vertical opening
height.
1) Firebox Size: 42-15/16 in. wide by 25-3/16 in. deep by 48-
1/8 in. high.
2) Firebox Weight: 850 lb.
b. FP-2: Isokern 46” Vent-Free Tall; with 42-3/16 in. vertical opening
height.
1) Firebox Size: 52-3/4 in. wide by 25-3/16 in. deep by 48-1/8
in. high.
2) Firebox Weight: 1,044 lb.
3. Clearance to Combustibles:
a. Firebox: Zero clearance to uninsulated combustible framing at
bottom, top, sides and back.
b. Combustible Sheathing or Trim to Opening Top:
1) FP-1: 12 in.
2) FP-2: 12 in.
c. Combustible Sheathing or Trim to Opening Sides:
1) FP-1: 8 in.
2) FP-2: 8 in.
d. Mantle above Opening:
1) FP-1: 12 in. min. in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions for width of mantle.
2) FP-2: 12 in. min. in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions for width of mantle.
e. Opening to Sidewall:
1) FP-1: 24 in.
2) FP-2: 24 in.
f. Hearth Extension Beyond Front:
1) FP-1: 20 in.
2) FP-2: 20 in.
g. Hearth Extension Beyond Sides: 12 in.
h. Combustible Floor:
1) FP-1: 4-1/2 in.
2) FP-2: 4-1/2 in.
i. Insulation from Firebox: 3 in.
4. Installation Method: Built into firebox enclosure framing, and finish with
firebrick, hearths, facings, mantels, and gas logs.
C. Firebox Components:
1. Firebox Blocks: Precast refractory blocks cast with proprietary
lightweight concrete mixture of volcanic pumice aggregate, and
aluminum cement.
2. Firebox Adhesive: Earthcore Adhesive; proprietary pre-mixed, adhesive.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 3100-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Manufactured Fireplaces
3. Firebrick Mortar: Earthcore Isoset; proprietary pre-mixed, mortar.
2.2 FIREBRICK
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Earthcore Industries; Isokern Firebrick;
www.earthcore.com
2. Superior Clay; Firebrick; www.superiorclay.com
3. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Clay refractory brick meeting ASTM 1261.
1. Thickness: 1-1/4 in. thick; with single-layer at firebox bottoms, backs, and
sides.
2. Size: 9 by 4-1/2 in.
3. Weight: 3.8 lb., each brick.
4. Patterns:
a. Firebox Bottoms: Running Bond.
b. Firebox Sides and Backs: Herringbone
5. Color: Grey.
6. Installation Method: Set with 1/4 in. thick refractory mortar, and 1/4 to
3/8 in. face joints.
2.3 GAS LOGS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: RH Peterson; Real Frye Premium Gas Logs;
www.realfrye.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: G10 Series unvented gas log sets, meeting ANSI Z21.11.2; with
keyed shut-off valves.
1. Models:
a. FP-1: CHAS-24; 24 in.; Charred Aged Split Oak.
b. FP-2: CHAS-30; 30 in. Charred Aged Split Oak.
2. Burner Systems: G10-24/30 Gas Burners with variable BTU ratings from
19,000 to 37,000.
3. Control Systems: Remote control with variable flame height control, and
electronic ignition.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of vent-
free fireplaces, firebrick, and gas logs in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 3100-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Manufactured Fireplaces
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Clearances to combustibles.
2. Gas connections for gas logs.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install vent-free fireplaces, firebrick, and gas logs in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, approved submittals, and
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Test gas logs and shut-off valve for proper operation.
C. Clean firebrick immediately following installation, using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Replace damaged products that cannot be restored to acceptable condition, as
directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 4419-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
SECTION 10 4419
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Cabinets.
3. Fire extinguisher schedule.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 9100 – Painting for on-site paint finish of cabinet doors and
trim.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA):
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law.
C. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 10 – Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Sample warranty forms.
B. Product List: Show each fire extinguisher, cabinet, and wall bracket located by
room name and number shown on Drawings, including:
1. Extinguisher type, material, size, finish, and rating.
2. Cabinet type, material, size, finish, lettering, mounting height, and
installation details.
3. Bracket type, material, size, finish, wall sign, mounting height, and
installation details.
4. Cross-reference each fire extinguisher to scheduled requirements in Part
3, Fire Extinguisher Schedule.
C. Samples:
1. Cabinet Lettering: Full-size, vertical, red lettered, die-cut strip.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
E. Fire Extinguisher Warranty: Manufacturer’s 6-year limited warranty against
defects in materials and manufacturing.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 4419-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers, cabinets, and wall brackets
through single source from same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of fire extinguishers and
cabinets required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle fire extinguishers and cabinets in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS (FE-1)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: JL Industries; Cosmic 10E; www.activarcpg.com
2. Larsen’s Manufacturing; MP10; www.larsensmfg.com
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Class ABC, multi-purpose, dry chemical extinguisher containing
monoammonium phosphate powder for suppression of common combustible,
flammable liquid, gas, and electrical equipment fires; meeting NFPA 10.
1. Construction: Enameled-steel cylinder with siphon tube, replaceable
valve stem seal, visual pressure gauge, pull-pin, upright squeeze grip,
hose and nozzle.
2. Size: 21 in. high, by 7-3/4 in. wide, by 5-1/8 in. cylinder diameter. 3. Capacity: 10 lb. 4. Rating: 4A:80B:C
2.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS (FE-2)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: JL Industries; Saturn 25; www.activarcpg.com
2. Larsen’s Manufacturing; WC 2-1/2; www.larsensmfg.com
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Class K wet chemical extinguisher containing low pH, potassium
acetate solution for suppression of liquid cooking fires; meeting NFPA 10.
1. Construction: Stainless steel cylinder with protective nozzle tip orifice
seal and non-metallic nozzle tip finger guard, O-ring seal, replaceable
valve stem seal, visual pressure gauge, pull-pin, upright squeeze grip,
hose and nozzle.
2. Size: 24-1/2 in. high, by 9 in. wide, by 7 in. cylinder diameter.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 4419-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
3. Capacity: 2-1/2 gal.
4. Rating: 2-A:K.
2.3 RECESSED CABINETS (C-1) A. Acceptable products; subject to compliance with specified requirements provide Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: JL Industries; Ambassador Series, Model 2015;
www.activarcpg.com
2. Larsen Manufacturing; Architectural Series, Model 2712-R;
www.larsensmfg.com
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: 1. Type: Fully-recessed steel cabinet with steel trim and flush door; welded construction.
2. Tub: Cold-rolled steel, one-piece formed construction, prefinished in
manufacturer's standard white powder-coat finish.
a. Size: 27 in. high, by 12 in. wide, by 7-3/4 in. deep.
b. Wall Opening: 28 in. high, by 13 in. wide, by 7-5/8 in. deep.
3. Trim: Cold-rolled steel with 3/8 in. flat trim, and 5/8 in. door stop; prefinished in manufacturer's standard white powder-coat finish. a. Size: 30-3/8 in. high, by 15-3/4 in. wide.. 4. Door: Cold-rolled steel, prefinished in manufacturer's standard white
powder-coat finish.
a. Style: Full glass.
b. Glazing: Clear tempered glass.
5. Hardware: Full length piano hinge, roller catch, and zinc-plated pull
(PUS).
6. Lettering: JL Industries; No. 16, die-cut vinyl, self-adhering, pre-spaced
vertical red letters; factory-applied on door glazing. a. Copy: "FIRE EXTINGUISHER".
b. Size: 3/4 by 18 in.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Recommended by fire extinguisher and cabinet manufacturer for conditions of
use and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Architect’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements, including:
1. J-Hook: Manufacturer's standard hook designed to secure extinguisher
inside cabinet.
2. Wall Bracket (B-1): JL Industries, MB810C; optional bracket designed to support extinguisher securely on wall. 3. Fasteners.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of fire
extinguisher cabinets, wall brackets, and extinguishers in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, approved submittals, and
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 4419-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start of
installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Nominal 8 in. wall depth, required wall-opening sizes for recessed cabinets,
and location of concealed backing members at fastener locations for secure
installation of cabinets, and wall brackets.
2. Compliance of extinguisher grip handle mounting height, and reach
requirements with ADA Standards, or ANSI A117.1, and NFPA 10.
3.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET INSTALLATION
A. Install fire extinguisher cabinets in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Install cabinets plumb, level, and securely attached to wall structure with
minimum of 4-fasteners, located in each corner of cabinet tub. 2. Finish exposed fastener heads inside cabinets to match cabinet interior.
B. Clean installed cabinets, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
C. Paint cabinet trim and metal part of door in accordance with Section 09 9100; match wall color, or as directed by design professional.
3.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER INSTALLATION
A. Install fire extinguishers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, approved submittals, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install fully charged fire extinguishers not more than 30-days before Final Inspection
with inspection certification tag attached, including: charge date; name, address, and
contact information of service agent.
1. Install cabinet-mounted extinguishers inside cabinets with standard J-hook attached to back wall of cabinet. 2. Install wall-mounted extinguishers on optional wall brackets. 3. Install and secure extinguishers in plumb, vertical position with name and
operating instructions visible on front of extinguisher.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot be
restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
3.5 FIRE EXTINGUISHER SCHEDULE A. FE-1/C-1: Class ABC, 10 lb. dry chemical extinguisher installed inside recessed
painted steel cabinet as shown on Drawings, or directed by Architect.
B. FE-2/C-1: Class K, 2-1/2 gal. wet chemical stainless steel extinguisher installed inside recessed painted steel cabinet in food service areas as shown on Drawings, or
directed by Architect.
C. FE-2/B-1: Class K, 2-1/2 gal. wet chemical stainless steel extinguisher installed on
wall bracket in food service areas as shown on Drawings, or directed by Architect.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 4419-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 5113-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Metal Lockers
SECTION 10 5113
METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Double-tier metal lockers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 1053 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry for concealed 2x wood
backing members for attachment of lockers.
C. Work by Owner:
1. Locker numbering.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): www.ada.gov
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, as applicable to state law.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): www.ansi.org
1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as
applicable to state law.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Color charts.
3. Technical data sheets.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Locker layouts; indicate quantity of accessible lockers equal to 5-
percent of total lockers in each locker room, but not less than 1-
accessible locker, in accordance with authorities having
jurisdiction.
b. Locker interior feature elevations.
c. Hardware locations.
d. Locker numbering.
e. Details of locker, and locker base installation.
f. Details of lockers and components with dimensions, profiles,
metal thicknesses, fabrication, and attachment to supporting
construction.
2. Verified field dimensions between enclosing walls, or other limiting
conditions, and locations of concealed backing members for attachment to
walls.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 5113-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Metal Lockers
C. Samples:
1. Colors: 3 by 3 in. set of available colors, textures, and finishes; prepared
on material specified for lockers; for final selection, and verification.
2. Hardware: Selected items, if requested by design professional; for
verification.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions, including:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
3. Maintenance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain lockers through single source from same
manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of lockers required for this
Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle locker products in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install lockers until building is enclosed with HVAC and
lighting systems operating at design conditions for Owner occupancy; with wet
work completed, and residual moisture dissipated.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 DOUBLE-TIER METAL LOCKERS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements.
1. Basis of Design: As shown on Drawings.
2. ASI Storage Solutions; Traditional Plus Lockers; www.asistorage.com
3. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Heavy duty, cold rolled steel, fabricated with common intermediate
uprights separating units, and concealed ventilation provided by holes in door
flanges; meeting ADA Standards, or ANSI A117.1 as applicable to state law.
1. Type: Double-tier, without legs.
2. Construction: Welded.
3. Size: 12 in. wide by 15 in. deep by 72 in. high.
4. Finish: Powder coat applied at dry film thickness of 2 mil.
5. Color: As selected by design professional.
6. Installation Method: Set on fully enclosed locker base, and mechanically
attached to building floors and walls.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 5113-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Metal Lockers
C. Components:
1. Door Frames: Channel-shaped, 16 gauge on latch and hinge sides, top,
and bottom with intermediate cross frames at multiple tier lockers, and
continuous door strike flanges on latch and hinge sides.
2. Doors: Channel-shaped, 14 gauge on latch and hinge sides, and L-shaped
top and bottom; with 16 gauge full-height reinforcement channel, and
flush face without ventilation louvers.
3. Body: 16 gauge bottoms, tops, sides, and shelves; with 18 gauge backs.
4. Hardware: Each locker to have:
a. Hinge: Full-length, 16 gauge continuous piano type welded to
door and frame.
b. Handle: Recessed, 1-piece, 20 gauge formed stainless steel cup
designed to accommodate padlock.
c. Single-Point Latch: 11 gauge frame hook with padlock hasp
extending through recessed handle, with anti-theft device, and
rubber silencer mounted to frame.
d. Clothes Hooks: 3-wall hooks, and 1-double-prong ceiling hook.
e. Number Plate: Polished aluminum with 3/8 in. black numerals.
5. Locker Base: 4 in. high front and end sections; 14 gauge steel with powder
coat finish to match lockers.
6. Fillers: 20 gauge 14 gauge steel with powder coat finish to match lockers.
7. Slope Top: 18 gauge steel with powder coat finish to match lockers.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
lockers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Coordination of locker layout with in-place construction enclosing or
limiting locker installations.
2. Installation and location of concealed backing members for attachment of
lockers.
3. Accessible lockers meet requirements of ADA Standards, or ANSI A117.1
as applicable to state law.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install lockers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 5113-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Metal Lockers
1. Connect groups of lockers together with manufacturer's recommended
fasteners, through predrilled holes. Fit lockers together accurately to form
flush, tight, hairline joints.
2. Install lockers level, plumb, properly aligned, and securely attached
without distortion; install remaining hardware and accessory items.
a. Maintain tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 ft. for sag, bow, or other
variation from straight line; use concealed shims as required.
b. Install number plates at each door, after lockers are in place.
3. Fasten lockers to walls through back, near top and bottom, and through
bottom to locker base with manufacturer’s recommended fasteners.
4. Install tops, fillers, and base tight to adjoining work; install with
concealed fasteners where possible.
B. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation, without binding.
C. Clean lockers immediately following installation, using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
C. Do not allow construction use of lockers.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 7113-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Exterior Weather Screen Devices
SECTION 10 7113
EXTERIOR WEATHER SCREEN DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior retractable weather screens.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 26 – Electrical for rough-in, connections, and control wiring.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
B. Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA): www.fgiaonline.org
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance
Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing
Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Color charts.
3. Technical data sheets.
4. Wiring diagrams.
5. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Weather screen plan and elevation layouts.
b. Headbox mounting and attachment details.
c. Guide cable attachment details.
d. Wall switch location and mounting details for RT motor control.
e. Wind speed sensor location and mounting details.
f. Components and accessories.
2. Verified field dimensions for finished openings to receive weather
screens.
C. Samples:
1. Metal Colors: 3 by 3 in. set of available colors; prepared with material
specified for this Project; for selection, and verification..
2. Fabric Colors: 3 by 3 in. set of available colors; prepared with material
specified for this Project; for selection, and verification.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 7113-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Exterior Weather Screen Devices
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
3. Maintenance.
E. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 10-year limited warranty against defects in
materials, manufacturing, and workmanship of hardware, headbox assembly,
and fabric.
F. Finish Warranty: Manufacturer’s 10-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and factory-application of fluoropolymer finish.
G. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 5-year limited warranty against defects in
materials and manufacturing of motorized roller system, including: controls,
electronic accessories, and motors.
H. Installation Warranty: Installer’s 5-year limited warranty against defects in
installation, and failure to meet requirements of manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain weather screens, and accessories through single
source from same manufacturer, or from other manufacturers acceptable to
weather screen manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of weather screens required for
this Project; approved, authorized, or licensed by weather screen manufacturer.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle weather screen products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to avoid damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR RETRACTABLE WEATHER SCREENS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Draper; Exterior Motorized FlexShade XL;
www.draperinc.com
2. Fenetex Retractable Screens; One-Track; www.fenetex.com
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Exterior, custom fabricated, motorized, vertical roll-up, fabric
weather screens.
1. Type: Vertical lift.
2. Screen Size: As shown on Drawings.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 7113-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Exterior Weather Screen Devices
3. Metal Material: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T6; meeting ASTM B221.
4. Metal Finish: 70-percent PVDF fluoropolymer resin-based coating;
meeting AAMA 2605.
5. Metal Color: As selected by Architect.
6. RT Wall Switch Color: As selected by Architect.
7. Operation: Motorized.
8. Installation Method: Headbox and hem bar guide cables mounted and
mechanically attached as shown on Drawings.
C. Components:
1. Headbox: 5 by 5 in., angled, cassette-style extruded aluminum sections
with full-length cradle support for roller tube, ceiling mounting brackets,
and end caps.
2. Roller: Nominal 2-3/8 in. outside diameter, aluminum tube, with floating
brackets.
a. Roller Idler: Plastic idle end insert in roller fits over steel pin, and
rotates on pin with sealed bearing. Steel pin connects to bearing
mounted to bracket mounted inside headbox.
b. Fabric Connection: Spline attachment to roller tube at top, and
hem bar pocket at bottom.
c. Hem Bar: 1-in. wide by 2-in. high, steel weighted, extruded
aluminum; without liners.
3. Hem Bar Containment: Guide cables and attachment hardware.
4. Standard Motor Operator: Sonesse Radio Technology Motor; 110-120 volt,
1-phase, 60 Hz; tubular motor concealed inside roller tube; instantly
reversible, lifetime lubricated motor with built-in radio receiver;
equipped with internal thermal overload protector, electric brake, and
preset accessible limit switches.
4. Radio Technology Motor Controls: Somfy; DecoFlex WireFree RTS Switch
with standard Decora Wall Plate; 3-channel wireless wall switch for radio
motor control.
5. Wind Speed Sensor: Somfy; EOLIS RTS Sensor; 24 volt with Class 2
transformer; adjustable wind speed threshold of 6 to 31 mph.
6. Weather Screen Fabric: Phifer, SunTex 95-5%; without seams. Full basket-
weave vinyl-coated polyester fabric; provides weather and shading
barrier to protect against wind, sun, snow, and insects.
a. Composition: 28 percent polyester, 72 percent vinyl on polyester.
b. Mesh Weight: 15.4 oz./yd.2
c. Width: 126 in.
d. Fabric Thickness: 0.029 in.
e. Openness: Approximately 5 percent.
f. Color: As selected by Architect.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 7113-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Exterior Weather Screen Devices
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
weather screens in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Rough-opening dimensions to receive weather screens.
2. Installation of structural support members, mounting plates, and other
built-in items for attachment of headboxes, and guide cables.
3. Electrical rough-in for power supply, and control wiring.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install weather screens in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean installed weather screen components, immediately following installation,
using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide factory-authorized service representative to instruct Owner's personnel
in proper use, operation, and maintenance of motorized weather screens. Review
emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be
followed at time of operational failures or malfunctions.
B. Check motorized weather screens with Owner's personnel before Final
Inspection, and again 30-days before end of warranty period to determine that
operating and control systems are working properly.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
C. Do not allow construction use of weather screens after adjustment and cleaning.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 7119-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Bahama Hurricane Shutters
SECTION 10 7119
BAHAMA HURRICANE SHUTTERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Bahama hurricane shutters; certified for use on buildings located outside
the High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) with Florida Product
Approval No.
2. Shutter hardware.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org
1. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
2. ASTM E1996 – Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted
by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.
B. Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA): www.fgiaonline.org
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance
Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing
Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Catalog cut-sheets.
2. Color charts.
3. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Details of components with profiles, metal thicknesses, and
fabrication.
b. Details of installation and attachment to supporting construction.
c. Hardware and fastener locations.
2. Verified field dimensions for window openings and mounting conditions.
C. Samples:
1. Colors: 3 by 3 in. set of available colors, textures, and finishes; prepared
with material specified for this Project; for verification of color selection.
D. Product Certification: Document confirming current approval of specified
shutters by Florida Department of Business & Professional Regulation
(DBPR)/Product Approval for compliance with Florida Building Code
(https://floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_srch.aspx), including:
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 7119-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Bahama Hurricane Shutters
1. Code Version.
2. FL # (State Product Approval No.).
3. Manufacturer.
4. Product Category.
5. Product Model, Number or Name.
6. Product Description.
7. Approval for Use Outside HVHZ.
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
3. Maintenance.
F. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s 10-year limited warranty against defects in
materials, manufacturing, and factory-applied powder coat finish.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain shutters, and accessories through single source from
same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in installation of shutters required for this
Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle shutters in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 BAHAMA HURRICANE SHUTTERS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: Fortified Building Products; Bahama Hurricane Shutters;
www.fortifiedbuildingproducts.com
2. Substitutions: Not allowed.
B. Description: Operable, louvered, extruded aluminum Bahama shutters with
nominal 1-1/4 in. deep by 2 in. wide frame, 1-1/2 in. wide louver slats,
continuous mounting hinge, adjustable support arms, and pin latches with
keepers and thumb screws; meeting ASTM B221 and ASTM E1996, Level D,
Wind Zone 3.
1. Design: As shown on drawings.
2. Size: As required for openings and opening details as shown on
Drawings.
3. Finish: Factory-applied powder coat in accordance with AAMA 2605.
4. Color: As selected by Architect.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 10 7119-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Bahama Hurricane Shutters
5. Installation Method: Surface mounted and mechanically attached over
window head with fasteners penetrating structural substrate; and held in
40 percent open-position with adjustable support arms, and pin latches.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installation foreman present, that conditions of work previously
installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of
shutters in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install shutters in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Test, and adjust operable hardware for proper operation without binding, or
distortion.
C. Clean shutters immediately following installation and testing, using methods
and materials recommended by manufacturer.
D. Instruct Owner’s personnel on operation and maintenance of shutters.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged products that cannot
be restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 12 3649-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Quartzite Countertops
SECTION 12 3649
QUARTZITE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Quartzite Dimension Stone
2. Quartzite Countertops.
3. Installation Products.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 2200 – Millwork for cabinets and bar.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C97 – Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific
Gravity of Dimension Stone.
2. ASTM C170 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Dimension Stone.
3. ASTM C241 – Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone
Subjected to Foot Traffic.
4. ASTM C880 – Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimension
Stone.
5. ASTM C616 – Standard Specification for Quartz-Based Dimension Stone.
B. Natural Stone Institute (NSI):
1. Dimension Stone Design Manual, including:
a. Chapter 2: Standards and Specifications for Stone Products.
b. Chapter 8 : Quartz-Based Stone.
c. Chapter 17: Countertop Installation.
d. Chapter 21: Cleaning and Maintenance.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Color charts.
2. Technical data sheets.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, and construction details:
a. Supporting construction.
b. Countertop plan layouts with joint locations.
c. Direction of veining, grain, or other directional appearance
characteristics.
d. Stone-to-stone joint details.
e. Edge profiles.
f. Sealant joints at adjoining or enclosing construction.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 12 3649-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Quartzite Countertops
2. Verified field dimensions of supporting construction, and base cabinets to
receive stone countertops.
C. Samples:
1. Stone: 12 by 12 inch sample sets for each stone variety; including 2 or
more stones in each set, as necessary, to show full range of color variation
and appearance characteristics expected in finished installation.
D. Material Test Reports:
1. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Provided by sealant
manufacturer showing specified sealant will not stain or damage
quartzite natural stone.
E. Fabricator’s Instructions:
1. Installation.
2. Maintenance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain each variety of quartzite dimension stone through single source
from same quarry to ensure consistent quality, appearance, and physical
properties.
2. Obtain installation products through single source from same
manufacturer to ensure material compatibility.
B. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Specialized in custom fabrication and
installation of quartzite dimension stone work required for this Project.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Maintain copies of fabricator’s installation
instructions, approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm
installation requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 QUARTZITE DIMENSION STONE
A. Material: Quartzite natural stone; meeting ASTM C616.
1. Finish: Polished or honed; as shown on Drawings, or selected by
Designer.
2. Color: As shown on Drawings, or selected by Designer.
3. Properties:
a. Minimum Density: 160 lb./in.3; in accordance with ASTM C97.
b. Maximum Absorption: 1.0; in accordance with ASTM C97.
c. Minimum Compressive Strength: 20,000 lb./in.2; in accordance
with ASTM C170.
d. Minimum Hardness: 8; in accordance with ASTM C241.
e. Minimum Flexural Strength: 700-2,300 lb./in.2; in accordance with
ASTM C880.
B. Sources: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide products
sourced by the following:
2. Marmi Stone; www.marmistone.com
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 12 3649-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Quartzite Countertops
3. Walder Zanger Stone; www.walkerzanger.com
4. Substitutions: Not allowed.
C. Stone Fabrication:
1. Select stone for intended use to prevent finished stone members from
containing cracks, seams, and other defects.
2. Grade and mark fabricated stone members for final locations to provide
assembled countertops with overall uniform appearance.
3. Fabricate stone members in accordance with NSI – Dimension Stone
Design Manual, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
a. Clean sawed backs of stone members to remove rust stains and
iron particles.
b. Dress joints straight and at 90-degree angle to face, unless noted
otherwise.
c. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to
accommodate adjacent work.
d. Fabricate molded edges to provide uniform profiles with eased
arrises, and matched at joints between units. Ease outside corners
of molded edges, unless noted otherwise.
e. Finish exposed faces of stone members as noted on approved
submittals; match finishes on exposed edges of countertops,
splashes, and cutouts.
4. Inspect finished stone members at fabrication shop for compliance with
specified requirements for material, structural soundness, appearance,
and fabrication. Replace defective members.
2.2 QUARTZITE COUNTERTOPS
B. Description: Custom fabricated countertops, and splashes as shown on
Drawings. Comply with recommendations of NSI – Dimension Stone Design
Manual.
1. Countertops: Nominal 1-1/4 inch (30 mm) thick, unless noted otherwise.
a. Edge Profile: As shown on Drawings.
b. Finish: Polished.
2. Splashes: Nominal 3/4 inch (20 mm) thick back and side splashes, unless
noted otherwise.
a. Height: As shown on Drawings.
b. Top Edge Profile: As shown on Drawings.
3. Joints: Fabricate countertops with minimum number of sections for
joining on-site; locate joints as shown on approved submittals.
a. Joint Locations: Not within 18 inch of counter mounted plumbing
fixtures or food service equipment; and not where countertop
section less than 36 inch long may result.
b. Joint Type: Bonded, 1/32 inch or less in width.
4. Cutouts and Holes:
a. Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in
shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer.
Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 12 3649-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Quartzite Countertops
1) Provide vertical edges, with eased cutout edges at top and
bottom surfaces of countertop; and projecting 3/16 inch
into fixture opening.
b. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field
cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for
cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner
holes of largest radius practical.
c. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings,
undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.
5. Installation Method: Adhered to substrate surfaces, and base cabinets.
2.1 INSTALLATION PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: InnoChem/AKEMI; www.innochemllc.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Recommended by installation products manufacturer for conditions
of use and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to Designer’s review, and
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Adhesive: AKEMI; Hyperclear; 2-part epoxy bonding adhesive. Use with
specified coloring paste to match stone color.
2. Coloring: AKEMI; Colouring Paste. Use for coloring bonding adhesive.
3. Sealer: AKEMI; PEARL Impregnator.
4. Cleaner: AKEMI; Natural Stone Basic Cleaner.
5. Sealant: AKEMI; Marble Silicone; non-staining, paintable, joint sealing
material. Use for sealing perimeter joints between stone and adjoining
construction. Color: Translucent, unless noted otherwise.
C. Compatibility: Provide installation products compatible with one another, and
with specified substrates; based on testing and manufacturer’s field experience.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installer present, that conditions of work previously installed under
other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of quartzite countertops
in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, and
approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been
corrected.
B. Confirm:
1. Millwork and other mounting surfaces level to 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 12 3649-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Quartzite Countertops
C. Pre-installation Testing:
1. Test sealant on scrap pieces of quartzite countertop to verify sealant will
not stain, discolor, or degrade stone.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates to receive countertops in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Protect other construction from damage by countertop work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install countertops in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract
Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean installed countertops using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage during remainder of construction
period.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged work that cannot be
restored to acceptable condition, as directed by Designer.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 12 3669-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Simulated Quartz Countertops
SECTION 12 3669
SIMULATED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Simulated quartz countertops.
2. Installation products.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 2200 – Millwork for base cabinets.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C97 – Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific
Gravity of Dimension Stone.
2. ASTM C99 – Standard Test Method for Modulus of Rupture of
Dimension Stone.
3. ASTM C170 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Dimension Stone.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product and accessory, including:
1. Color charts.
2. Technical data sheets.
3. Sample warranty forms.
B. Shop Drawings: Product drawings indicating full extent of work; specifically
prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details:
a. Supporting construction.
b. Countertop plan layouts, and joint locations.
c. Direction of veining, grain, or other directional appearance
characteristics.
d. Piece-to-piece joint details.
e. Edge profiles.
f. Sealant joints at adjoining or enclosing construction.
2. Verified field dimensions of supporting construction, and base cabinets to
receive simulated quartz countertops.
C. Samples:
1. Colors: 3 by 3 inch set of available colors, textures, and finishes; prepared
with material specified for this Project; for selection, and verification.
D. Material Test Reports:
1. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Provided by sealant
manufacturer showing specified sealant will not stain or damage
simulated quartz.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 12 3669-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Simulated Quartz Countertops
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage, and handling.
2. Installation.
3. Maintenance.
F. Product Warranty: Manufacturer’s lifetime limited warranty against defects in
materials and manufacturing of simulated quartz material.
G. Fabrication/Installation Warranty: Fabricator/Installer’s 2-year limited warranty
against defects in fabrication, installation, and failure to meet requirements of
manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, or approved submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain each variety of simulated quartz through single source from same
manufacturer.
2. Obtain simulated quartz installation products through single source from
same manufacturer.
B. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Specialized in custom fabrication and
installation of simulated quartz products required for this Project; approved,
authorized, or licensed by simulated quartz manufacturer.
C. Installation Documents On-Site: Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions,
approved submittals, and related documents on-site to confirm installation
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle simulated quartz products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Handle products with care to prevent damage. Do not install damaged products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 SIMULATED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: As shown on Drawings, or selected by design
professional.
2. Cambria; www.cambriausa.com
3. Caesarstone; www.caesarstoneus.com
4. Silestone; www.silestoneusa.com
5. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
NOTE: Final selection and approval of simulated quartz materials, based on
aesthetic effects, is judged solely by design professional.
B. Description: Molded, composite sheet material composed of natural quartz
aggregates bonded together with plastic resins; fabricated into countertops, and
splashes as shown on Drawings.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 12 3669-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Simulated Quartz Countertops
1. Finish: Polished or matte; as shown on Drawings, or selected by design
professional.
2. Color: As shown on Drawings, or selected by design professional.
3. Properties:
a. Density: 0.087 lb./in.3; in accordance with ASTM C97.
b. Moisture Absorption: Negligible; in accordance with ASTM C97.
c. Modulus of Rupture: 6,800 lb./in.2; in accordance with ASTM C99.
d. Minimum Compressive Strength: 24,750 lb./in.2; in accordance
with ASTM C170.
4. Installation Method: Adhered to millwork and other supporting surfaces.
C. Components:
1. Countertops: Nominal 1-1/4 inch (30 mm) thick, unless noted otherwise.
a. Layout: As shown on Drawings.
b. Edge Profile: As shown on Drawings.
2. Splashes: Nominal 3/4 inch (20 mm) thick back and side splashes, unless
noted otherwise.
a. Height: As shown on Drawings.
b. Top Edge Profile: As shown on Drawings.
D. Fabrication: Shop-fabricate simulated quartz products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
1. Edges: Fabricate molded edges to provide uniform profiles, and matched
at joints between units.
a. Ease outside corners of molded edges, unless noted otherwise.
b. Match finishes on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and
cutouts.
2. Joints: Fabricate countertops with minimum number of pieces; locate
joints as shown on approved submittals. Cut joints straight, and at 90-
degree angle to face, unless noted otherwise.
a. Joint Locations: Not within 18 inch of counter mounted plumbing
fixtures or food service equipment; and not where countertop
section less than 36 inch long may result.
b. Joint Type: Bonded, 1/32 inch or less in width.
3. Cutouts and Holes:
a. Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in
shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer.
Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.
1) Provide vertical edges, with eased cutout edges at top and
bottom surfaces of countertop; and projecting 3/16 inch
into fixture opening.
b. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field
cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for
cutouts, and drill holes at corners of cutout locations with largest
radius practical.
c. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings,
undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 12 3669-4
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Simulated Quartz Countertops
d. Adjoining Work: Provide openings, reveals, and other features as
needed to accommodate adjoining work.
4. Inspect finished quartz products at fabrication shop for material, and
workmanship requirements,. Replace defective products.
5. Mark finished quartz components at fabrication shop for final locations,
and coordinated installation.
2.2 INSTALLATION PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide
Basis of Design, or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Basis of Design: InnoChem/AKEMI; www.innochemllc.com
2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01 2513 – Product
Substitution Procedures.
B. Description: Recommended by installation products manufacturer for conditions
of use and application, unless noted otherwise; subject to design professional’s
review, and compliance with specified requirements.
1. Adhesive: AKEMI; Platinum 3.0; Knife-grade, 2-part epoxyacrylate
bonding adhesive. Use with specified coloring paste to match simulated
quartz color.
2. Coloring: AKEMI; Colouring Paste. Use for coloring bonding adhesive.
3. Cleaner: AKEMI; Crystal Clean Spray.
4. Sealant: AKEMI; Natural Stone (Marble) Silicone; non-staining, paintable,
joint sealing material. Use for sealing perimeter joints between simulated
quartz and adjoining materials. Color: Translucent, unless noted
otherwise.
C. Compatibility: Provide installation products compatible with one another, and
with specified substrates; based on testing and manufacturer’s field experience.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with installer present, that conditions of work previously installed under
other sections or contracts are acceptable for installation of simulated quartz
products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents,
and approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been
corrected.
B. Confirm:
1. Millwork and other supporting surfaces level to 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
C. Pre-installation Testing:
1. Test sealant on scrap pieces of simulated quartz to verify sealant will not
stain, discolor, or degrade simulated quartz products.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 12 3669-5
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Simulated Quartz Countertops
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install simulated quartz products in accordance manufacturer’s instructions,
Contract Documents, and approved submittals.
B. Clean installed products, immediately following installation, using methods and
materials recommended by simulated quartz, and installation product
manufacturers instructions.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of Project.
B. Restore damaged products and finishes to new condition with no remaining
evidence of damage, or refinishing work. Replace damaged work that cannot be
restored to acceptable condition, as directed by design professional.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 31 3116-1
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Termite Control
SECTION 31 3116
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Soil treatment with termiticide solution.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard specifications, and descriptive literature
for each product, including:
1. Safety data sheet.
2. Technical data sheet.
3. EPA-Registered Label for termiticide.
4. Sample warranty form.
B. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Delivery, storage and handling.
2. Preparation and application.
3. Disposal of unused termiticide.
C. Soil Treatment Application Report:
1. Date and time of application.
2. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
3. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
4. Rates of application.
5. Methods of application.
6. Areas of application.
D. Warranty: Fully executed, issued in Owner’s name, and registered with
termiticide manufacturer, including:
1. Manufacturer’s 5-year warranty from date of Substantial Completion,
signed by Applicator and Contractor, against infestation of subterranean
termites.
2. Annual inspection for termite activity, effectiveness of termite barrier,
and maintenance issues.
3. Re-treatment, and repair or replacement of damage to buildings and
contents caused by termites, at no cost to Owner, if termite activity or
damage is discovered during warranty period.
4. Renewability, directly with Applicator, at end of initial 5-year period
beginning on the Date of Substantial Completion; services, terms, and
conditions to be determined at time of renewal.
5. Copy of Soil Treatment Application Report, attached.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Specialized in application of termiticide products
required for this Project; licensed by state where Project is located.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 31 3116-2
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Termite Control
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with environmental requirements of EPA-Registered Label, and
authorities having jurisdiction. Do not apply termiticide to soil that is wet or
frozen, or while precipitation is occurring.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 TERMITICIDE
A. EPA-Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction; mixed
in water solution; formulated for prevention of termite infestation.
1. Service Life: Minimum 5-years.
2. Installation Method: Soil treatment.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with applicator present, that conditions of work previously installed
under other sections or contracts are acceptable for application of termiticide in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Contract Documents, and
approved submittals.
1. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions upon discovery.
2. Prepare and submit written report, endorsed by installer, listing
unacceptable conditions.
3. Do not start application until unacceptable conditions are corrected; start
of application indicates acceptance of substrate conditions.
B. Confirm:
1. Removal of construction debris, vegetative matter, and other materials
from soil within areas to receive termiticide.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install measures to prevent runoff of termiticide solution from treatment areas.
B. Post warning signs around application areas.
C. Mix termiticide solution at maximum specified concentration, to uniform
consistency.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Distribute termiticide evenly over treatment areas. Apply solution at EPA-
Registered Label volume and rate, directly to soil, to establish continuous
horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier around and under building
construction, including:
1. Under slab-on-grade structures, including footings, building slabs, and
attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil before installation of
poured-in-place concrete.
2. Along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of
interior partition walls; around interior column footings, and piers; and
along entire outside perimeter of foundation walls from grade to bottom
of footing.
PHASE 2
ATLANTIC BEACH COUNTRY CLUB – PHASE 1 & 2 31 3116-3
SA_AE – 2022-352 ABCC Termite Control
3. Adjacent steps, porches, platforms, and equipment bases.
4. Voids in masonry construction.
5. Expansion joints, control joints, pipes, conduit, and other construction
penetrating slabs and below-grade walls.
B. Reapply termiticide solution to areas disturbed by earthwork, landscaping, or
other construction after initial application.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application; keep-off treated areas until
completely dry.
B. Protect termiticide solution dispersed in treated soil from dilution until slab-on-
grade structures are installed. Use waterproof barrier in accordance with EPA-
Registered Label instructions.
END OF SECTION
PHASE 2